GLENCOE LANGUAGE ARTS Grammar and Language Workbook G RADE 6 Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Copyright © by The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. All rights reserved. Except as permitted under the United States Copyright Act of 1976, no part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without the prior written permission of the publisher. Send all inquiries to: Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 8787 Orion Place Columbus, Ohio 43240-4027 ISBN 0-07-820539-5 Printed in the United States of America 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 009 03 02 01 00 Contents Handbook of Definitions and Rules .........................1 Troubleshooter ........................................................23 Part 1 Grammar ......................................................45 Unit 1 Subjects, Predicates, and Sentences 1.1 Kinds of Sentences: Declarative and Interrogative .........................................47 1.2 Kinds of Sentences: Exclamatory and Imperative ............................................49 1.3 Subjects and Predicates: Simple and Complete ..............................................51 1.4 Subjects and Predicates: Compound ..........53 1.5 Simple and Compound Sentences .............55 1.6 Sentence Fragments ....................................57 1.7 Run-On Sentences.......................................59 Unit 1 Review ..........................................................61 Cumulative Review .................................................62 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Unit 2 Nouns 2.8 Nouns: Proper and Common ......................63 2.9 Nouns: Singular and Plural ........................65 2.10 Nouns: Collective ........................................67 2.11 Nouns: Possessives .....................................69 Unit 2 Review ..........................................................71 Cumulative Review: Units 1–2................................72 Unit 3 Verbs 3.12 Action Verbs and Direct Objects ................75 3.13 Action Verbs and Indirect Objects .............77 3.14 Transitive and Intransitive Verbs ...............79 3.15 Linking Verbs and Predicate Words ..........81 3.16 Verb Tenses: Present, Past, and Future .....83 3.17 Main Verbs: Principal Parts ........................85 3.18 Helping Verbs..............................................87 3.19 Verb Forms: Present Progressive and Past Progressive....................................89 3.20 Perfect Tenses: Present and Past ................91 3.21 Irregular Verbs I...........................................93 3.22 Irregular Verbs II .........................................95 3.23 Irregular Verbs III ........................................97 3.24 More Practice with Verb Forms..................99 Unit 3 Review ........................................................101 Cumulative Review: Units 1–3 .............................102 Unit 4 Pronouns 4.25 Personal Pronouns ....................................105 4.26 Using Pronouns Correctly.........................107 4.27 Pronouns and Antecedents.......................109 4.28 Possessive Pronouns .................................111 4.29 Indefinite Pronouns ..................................113 Unit 4 Review ........................................................115 Cumulative Review: Units 1-4 ..............................116 Unit 5 Adjectives 5.30 Adjectives and Proper Adjectives ............119 5.31 Articles and Demonstratives.....................121 5.32 Adjectives That Compare..........................123 5.33 Special Adjectives That Compare ............125 Unit 5 Review ........................................................127 Cumulative Review: Units 1–5..............................128 Unit 6 Adverbs 6.34 Adverbs Modifying Verbs .........................131 6.35 Adverbs Modifying Adjectives and Adverbs ..............................................133 6.36 Adverbs That Compare .............................135 6.37 Irregular Comparative Forms....................137 6.38 Telling Adjectives and Adverbs Apart I .........................................139 6.39 Telling Adjectives and Adverbs Apart II........................................141 6.40 Avoiding Double Negatives ......................143 Unit 6 Review ........................................................145 Cumulative Review: Units 1–6 .............................146 Unit 7 Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections 7.41 Prepositions...............................................149 7.42 Prepositional Phrases................................151 7.43 Pronouns After Prepositions.....................153 7.44 Prepositional Phrases as Adjectives and Adverbs ..............................................155 7.45 Telling Prepositions and Adverbs Apart ...........................................157 7.46 Conjunctions .............................................159 7.47 Interjections...............................................161 Unit 7 Review ........................................................163 Cumulative Review: Units 1–7..............................164 Unit 8 Subject-Verb Agreement 8.48 Making Subjects and Verbs Agree ............167 8.49 Subject Pronouns and Verb Agreement.........................................169 8.50 Locating the Subject..................................171 8.51 Agreement with Compound Subjects......................................................173 Unit 8 Review ........................................................175 Cumulative Review: Units 1– 8 .............................176 Unit 9 Diagraming Sentences 9.52 Diagraming Simple Subjects and Simple Predicates ..............................179 9.53 Diagraming the Four Kinds of Sentences...............................................181 9.54 Diagraming Direct and Indirect Objects and Predicate Words....................183 9.55 Diagraming Adjectives and Adverbs ........185 9.56 Diagraming Prepositional Phrases............187 9.57 Diagraming Compound Sentence Parts ...........................................189 Unit 9 Review ........................................................191 Cumulative Review: Units 1– 9 .............................192 Table of Contents iii Part 3 Mechanics ...................................................211 Unit 11 Capitalization 11.63 Capitalizing Sentences, Quotations, and Salutations I .......................................213 11.64 Capitalizing Sentences, Quotations, and Salutations II ......................................215 11.65 Capitalizing Names and Titles of Persons I......................................217 11.66 Capitalizing Names and Titles of Persons II.....................................219 11.67 Capitalizing Names of Places I .................221 11.68 Capitalizing Names of Places II ................223 11.69 Capitalizing Other Proper Nouns and Adjectives I.........................................225 11.70 Capitalizing Other Proper Nouns and Adjectives II .......................................227 Unit 11 Review ......................................................229 Cumulative Review: Units 1–11 ...........................230 Unit 12 Punctuation 12.71 Using the Period and Other End Marks .......................................233 12.72 Using Commas I ........................................235 12.73 Using Commas II .......................................237 12.74 Using Commas III ......................................239 12.75 Using Commas IV......................................241 12.76 Commas in Review....................................243 12.77 Semicolons and Colons.............................245 12.78 Quotation Marks........................................247 12.79 Quotation Marks and Italics .....................249 12.80 Apostrophes ..............................................251 12.81 Hyphens.....................................................253 12.82 Abbreviations I ..........................................255 12.83 Abbreviations II.........................................257 12.84 Writing Numbers I.....................................259 12.85 Writing Numbers II ...................................261 Unit 12 Review ......................................................263 Cumulative Review: Units 1–12 ...........................264 Part 4 Vocabulary and Spelling ...........................267 Unit 13 Vocabulary and Spelling 13.86 Building Vocabulary: Learning from Context..............................................269 13.87 Building Vocabulary: Prefixes ..................271 13.88 Building Vocabulary: Suffixes..................273 13.89 Synonyms and Antonyms.........................275 13.90 Homonyms ................................................277 13.91 Basic Spelling Rules I ..............................279 iv Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 13.92 Basic Spelling Rules II ..............................281 13.93 Basic Spelling Rules III .............................283 13.94 Often Misspelled Words ...........................285 13.95 Easily Confused Words .............................287 13.96 Review: Building Vocabulary ..................289 13.97 Review: Basic Spelling Rules ..................291 Unit 13 Review ......................................................293 Cumulative Review: Units 1–13 ...........................294 Part 5 Composition................................................297 Unit 14 Composition 14.98 The Writing Process: Prewriting I ............299 14.99 The Writing Process: Prewriting II ...........301 14.100 The Writing Process: Drafting I ................303 14.101 The Writing Process: Drafting II ...............305 14.102 The Writing Process: Revising I................307 14.103 The Writing Process: Revising II ..............309 14.104 The Writing Process: Editing ....................311 14.105 The Writing Process: Presenting...............313 14.106 Outlining ...................................................315 14.107 Writing Effective Sentences I....................317 14.108 Writing Effective Sentences II ..................319 14.109 Writing Effective Sentences III .................321 14.110 Building Paragraphs I................................323 14.111 Building Paragraphs II ..............................325 14.112 Building Paragraphs III .............................327 14.113 Paragraph Ordering ...................................329 14.114 Personal Letters I.......................................331 14.115 Personal Letters II......................................333 14.116 Personal Letters III ....................................335 14.117 Business Letters: Letters of Request or Complaint..............................................337 14.118 Business Letters: Letters of Opinion .................................................339 Index ...................................................................341 TAE Tests Unit 1: Subjects, Predicates, and Sentences.................................................349 Unit 2: Nouns ......................................................351 Unit 3: Verbs........................................................353 Unit 4: Pronouns .................................................357 Unit 5: Adjectives ...............................................359 Unit 6: Adverbs ...................................................361 Unit 7: Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections.............................................365 Unit 8: Subject-Verb Agreement .........................369 Unit 9: Diagraming Sentences.............................371 Unit 10: Usage Glossary .......................................373 Unit 11: Capitalization ..........................................375 Unit 12: Punctuation .............................................377 Unit 13: Vocabulary and Spelling ........................381 Unit 14: Composition ............................................383 Answer Key to Testing Program ..........................387 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Part 2 Usage ..........................................................195 Unit 10 Usage Glossary 10.58 Usage: accept to a lot ................................197 10.59 Usage: beside to chose ..............................199 10.60 Usage: in to learn.......................................201 10.61 Usage: leave to sit......................................203 10.62 Usage: than to whose ................................205 Unit 10 Review ......................................................207 Cumulative Review: Units 1–10 ...........................208 Handbook of Definitions and Rules Handbook 1 Handbook SUBJECTS AND PREDICATES 1. The simple subject is the key noun or pronoun that tells what the sentence is about. A compound subject is made up of two or more simple subjects that are joined by a conjunction and have the same verb. The lantern glows. Moths and bugs fly nearby. 2. The simple predicate is the verb or verb phrase that expresses the essential thought about the subject of the sentence. A compound predicate is made up of two or more verbs or verb phrases that are joined by a conjunction and have the same subject. Rachel jogged down the hill. Pete stretched and exercised for an hour. 3. The complete subject consists of the simple subject and all the words that modify it. Golden curly hair framed the child’s face. The soft glow of sunset made her happy. 4. The complete predicate consists of the simple predicate and all the words that modify it or complete its meaning. Lindy ate a delicious muffin for breakfast. The apple muffin also contained raisins. 5. Usually the subject comes before the predicate in a sentence. In inverted sentences, all or part of the predicate precedes the subject. (You) Wait for me at the corner. (request) Through the toys raced the children. (inverted) Is the teacher feeling better? (question) There are seats in the first row. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill PARTS OF SPEECH Nouns 1. A singular noun is a word that names one person, place, thing, or idea. aunt meadow pencil friendship A plural noun names more than one person, place, thing, or idea. aunts meadows pencils friendships 2. To help you determine whether a word in a sentence is a noun, try adding it to the following sentences. Nouns will fit in at least one of these sentences: He said something about ________. I know something about a(n) ________. He said something about aunts. I know something about a meadow. 3. A common noun names a general class of people, places, things, or ideas. sailor city holiday music A proper noun specifies a particular person, place, thing, event, or idea. Proper nouns are always capitalized. Captain Ahab Rome Memorial Day Treasure Island Handbook 3 An abstract noun names an idea, a quality, or a characteristic. loyalty honesty democracy friendship 5. A collective noun names a group. When the collective noun refers to the group as a whole, it is singular. When it refers to the individual group members, the collective noun is plural. The family eats dinner together every night. (singular) The council vote as they wish on the pay increase. (plural) 6. A possessive noun shows possession, ownership, or the relationship between two nouns. Monica’s book the rabbit’s ears the hamster’s cage Verbs 1. A verb is a word that expresses action or a state of being and is necessary to make a statement. A verb will fit one or more of these sentences: He _________. We _________. She ________ it. He knows. We walk. She sees it. 2. An action verb tells what someone or something does. The two types of action verbs are transitive and intransitive. A transitive verb is followed by a word or words—called the direct object—that answer the question what? or whom? An intransitive verb is not followed by a word that answers what? or whom? Transitive: The tourists saw the ruins. The janitor washed the window. Intransitive: Owls hooted during the night. The children played noisily. 3. An indirect object receives what the direct object names. Marcy sent her brother a present. 4. A linking verb links, or joins, the subject of a sentence with an adjective or a noun. The trucks were red. (adjective) She became an excellent swimmer. (noun) 5. A verb phrase consists of a main verb and all its auxiliary, or helping, verbs. We had been told of his arrival. They are listening to a symphony. 6. Verbs have four principal parts or forms: base, past, present participle, and past participle. Form the past and past participle by adding -ed to the base. Base: I talk. Present Participle: I am talking. Past: I talked. Past Participle: I have talked. 4 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Handbook 4. A concrete noun names an object that occupies space or that can be recognized by any of the senses. leaf melody desk aroma Handbook 7. Irregular verbs form the past and past participle in other ways. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill PRINCIPAL PARTS OF IRREGULAR VERBS Base Form be beat become begin bite blow break bring catch choose come do draw drink drive eat fall feel find fly freeze get give go grow hang hang have know lay Past Form was, were beat became began bit blew broke brought caught chose came did drew drank drove ate fell felt found flew froze got gave went grew hung hanged had knew laid Past Participle been beaten become begun bitten or bit blown broken brought caught chosen come done drawn drunk driven eaten fallen felt found flown frozen got or gotten given gone grown hung hanged had known laid Base Form lead lend let lie lose put ride ring rise run say see set shrink sing sit speak spring steal swim take tear tell think throw wear win write Past Form led lent let lay lost put rode rang rose ran said saw set shrank or shrunk sang sat spoke sprang or sprung stole swam took tore told thought threw wore won wrote Past Participle led lent let lain lost put ridden rung risen run said seen set shrunk or shrunken sung sat spoken sprung stolen swum taken torn told thought thrown worn won written 8. The principal parts are used to form six verb tenses. The tense of a verb expresses time. Simple Tenses Present Tense: She speaks. (present or habitual action) Past Tense: She spoke. (action completed in the past) Future Tense: She will speak. (action to be done in the future) Perfect Tenses Present Perfect Tense: She has spoken. (action just done or still in effect) Past Perfect Tense: She had spoken. (action completed before some other past action) Future Perfect Tense: She will have spoken. (action to be completed before some future time) Handbook 5 10. The voice of a verb shows whether the subject performs the action or receives the action of the verb. A sentence is in the active voice when the subject performs the action. A sentence is in the passive voice when the subject receives the action of the verb. The robin ate the worm. (active) The worm was eaten by the robin. (passive) Pronouns 1. A pronoun takes the place of a noun, a group of words acting as a noun, or another pronoun. 2. A personal pronoun refers to a specific person or thing. First-person personal pronouns refer to the speaker, second-person pronouns refer to the one spoken to, and third-person pronouns refer to the one spoken about. Singular Plural First Person I, me, my, mine we, us, our, ours Second Person you, your, yours your, your, yours Third Person he, she, it, him, her, his, hers, its they, them, their, theirs 3. A reflexive pronoun refers to the subject of the sentence. An intensive pronoun adds emphasis to a noun or another pronoun. A demonstrative pronoun points out specific persons, places, things, or ideas. Reflexive: Nikki prepares himself for the day-long hike. Intensive: Nikki himself prepares for the day-long hike. Demonstrative: That was a good movie! These are the files you wanted. 4. An interrogative pronoun is used to form questions. A relative pronoun is used to introduce a subordinate clause. An indefinite pronoun refers to persons, places, or things in a more general way than a personal pronoun does. Interrogative: Whose are these? Which did you prefer? Relative: The bread that we tasted was whole wheat. Indefinite: Someone has already told them. Everyone agrees on the answer. 5. Use the subject form of a personal pronoun used as a subject or when it follows a linking verb. He writes stories. Are they ready? It is I. (after linking verb) 6. Use the object form of a personal pronoun when it is an object. Mrs. Cleary called us. (direct object) Stephen offered us a ride. (indirect object) Sara will go with us. (object of preposition) 7. Use a possessive pronoun to replace a possessive noun. Never use an apostrophe in a possessive personal pronoun. Their science experiment is just like ours. 6 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Handbook 9. Progressive forms of verbs are made up of a form of be and a present participle and express a continuing action. Emphatic forms are made up of a form of do and a base form and add emphasis or ask questions. Progressive: Marla is babysitting. The toddlers have been napping for an hour. Emphatic: They do prefer beef to pork. We did ask for a quiet table. Handbook 8. When a pronoun is followed by an appositive, use the subject pronoun if the appositive is the subject. Use the object pronoun if the appositive is an object. To test whether the pronoun is correct, read the sentence without the appositive. We eighth-graders would like to thank you. The success of us geometry students is due to Ms. Marcia. 9. In incomplete comparisons, choose the pronoun that you would use if the missing words were fully expressed. Harris can play scales faster than I (can). It is worth more to you than (it is to) me. 10. In questions use who for subjects and whom for objects. Who wants another story? Whom will the class choose as treasurer? In subordinate clauses use who and whoever as subjects after linking verbs, and use whom and whomever as objects. These souvenirs are for whoever wants to pay the price. The manager will train whomever the president hires. 11. An antecedent is the word or group of words to which a pronoun refers or that a pronoun replaces. All pronouns must agree with their antecedents in number, gender, and person. Marco’s sister spent her vacation in San Diego. The huge old trees held their own against the storm. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 12. Make sure that the antecedent of a pronoun is clearly stated. UNLCLEAR: Mrs. Cardonal baked cookies with her daughters, hoping to sell them at the bake sale. CLEAR: Mrs. Cardonal baked cookies with her daughters, hoping to sell the cookies at the bake sale. UNLCLEAR: If you don’t tie the balloon to the stroller, it will blow away. CLEAR: If you don’t tie the balloon to the stroller, the balloon will blow away. Adjectives 1. An adjective modifies, or describes, a noun or pronoun by providing more information or giving a specific detail. The smooth surface of the lake gleamed. Frosty trees glistened in the sun. 2. Most adjectives will fit this sentence: The _________ one seems very _________. The handmade one seems very colorful. 3. Articles are the adjectives a, an, and the. Articles do not meet the preceding test for adjectives. 4. A proper adjective is formed from a proper noun and begins with a capital letter. Tricia admired the Scottish sweaters. Our Mexican vacation was memorable. Handbook 7 6. Some adjectives have irregular comparative forms. POSITIVE: good, well bad far COMPARATIVE: better worse farther SUPERLATIVE: best worst farthest many, much more most little less least Adverbs 1. An adverb modifies a verb, an adjective, or another adverb. Adverbs tell how, where, when, or to what extent. The cat walked quietly. (how) She seldom misses a deadline. (when) The player moved forward. (where) The band was almost late. (to what extent) 2. Many adverbs fit these sentences: She thinks ______. She thinks ______ fast. She thinks quickly. She thinks unusually fast. She ______ thinks fast. She seldom thinks fast. 3. The comparative form of an adverb compares two actions. The superlative form compares more than two actions. For shorter adverbs add -er or -est to form the comparative or superlative. For most adverbs, add more or most or less or least to form the comparative or superlative. We walked faster than before. They listened most carefully to the final speaker. 4. Avoid double negatives, which are two negative words in the same clause. INCORRECT: I have not seen no stray cats. CORRECT: I have not seen any stray cats. Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections 1. A preposition shows the relationship of a noun or a pronoun to some other word. A compound preposition is made up of more than one word. The trees near our house provide plenty of shade. The schools were closed because of snow. 2. Common prepositions include these: about, above, according to, across, after, against, along, among, around, as, at, because of, before, behind, below, beneath, beside, besides, between, beyond, but, by, concerning, down, during, except, for, from, in, inside, in spite of, into, like, near, of, off, on, out, outside, over, past, round, since, through, till, to, toward, under, underneath, until, up, upon, with, within, without. 8 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Handbook 5. The comparative form of an adjective compares two things or people. The superlative form compares more than two things or people. Form the comparative by adding -er or combining with more or less. Form the superlative by adding -est or combining with most or least. POSITIVE COMPARATIVE SUPERLATIVE slow slower slowest charming more charming most charming Handbook 3. A conjunction is a word that joins single words or groups of words. A coordinating conjunction joins words or groups of words that have equal grammatical weight. Correlative conjunctions work in pairs to join words and groups of words of equal weight. A subordinating conjunction joins two clauses in such a way as to make one grammatically dependent on the other. I want to visit the art gallery and the museum. (coordinating) Both left and right turns were impossible in the traffic. (correlative) We go to the park whenever Mom lets us. (subordinating) COMMON CONJUNCTIONS Coordinating: and but Correlative: both...and either...or Subordinating: after although as as if as long as as soon as for nor or neither...nor not only...but also as though because before even though if in order that so yet whether...or since so that than though unless until when whenever where wherever whether while 4. A conjunctive adverb clarifies a relationship. Frank loved the old maple tree; nevertheless, he disliked raking its leaves. 5. An interjection is an unrelated word or phrase that expresses emotion or strong feeling. Look, there are two cardinals at the feeder. Good grief! Are you kidding? Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill CLAUSES AND COMPLEX SENTENCES 1. A clause is a group of words that has a subject and a predicate and is used as a sentence or a part of a sentence. There are two types of clauses: main and subordinate. A main clause has a subject and a predicate and can stand alone as a sentence. A subordinate clause has a subject and a predicate, but it cannot stand alone as a sentence. main sub. She became a vegetarian because she loves animals. 2. There are three types of subordinate clauses: adjective, adverb, and noun. a. An adjective clause is a subordinate clause that modifies a noun or pronoun. The wrens that built a nest in the backyard are now raising their young. b. An adverb clause is a subordinate clause that often modifies the verb in the main clause of the sentence. It tells when, where, how, why, or under what conditions. Before they got out, the goats broke the fence in several places. c. A noun clause is a subordinate clause used as a noun. Whatever we do will have to please everyone. (subject) The prize goes to whoever can keep the squirrels away from the feeder. (object of preposition) Handbook 9 main main Compound: The dancers bowed, and the audience clapped. Complex: sub. main Because they turn to face the sun, these flowers are called sunflowers. 4. A sentence that makes a statement is classified as a declarative sentence. My dad’s favorite horses are buckskins. An imperative sentence gives a command or makes a request. Please close the door on your way out. An interrogative sentence asks a question. When will the mail carrier arrive? An exclamatory sentence expresses strong emotion. Watch out! What a view that is! Phrases 1. A phrase is a group of words that acts in a sentence as a single part of speech. 2. A prepositional phrase is a group of words that begins with a preposition and ends with a noun or pronoun, which is called the object of the preposition. A prepositional phrase can act as an adjective or an adverb. The house on the hill is white. (modifies the noun house) Everyone in the house heard the storm. (modifies the pronoun everyone) The geese flew toward warmer weather. (modifies the verb flew) 3. An appositive is a noun or pronoun that is placed next to another noun or pronoun to identify it or give more information about it. An appositive phrase is an appositive plus its modifiers. Our sister Myra is home from college. Her college, Purdue University, is in Indiana. 4. A verbal is a verb form that functions in a sentence as a noun, an adjective, or an adverb. A verbal phrase is a verbal and other words that complete its meaning. a. A participle is a verbal that functions as an adjective. Present participles end in -ing. Past participles usually end in -ed. The squeaking floor board gave me away. The twisted tree was ancient. b. A participial phrase contains a participle and other words that complete its meaning. Moving quickly across the room, the baby crawled toward her mother. 10 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Handbook 3. Main and subordinate clauses can form several types of sentences. A simple sentence has only one main clause and no subordinate clauses. A compound sentence has two or more main clauses. A complex sentence has at least one main clause and one or more subordinate clauses. main Simple: The apples fell off the tree. Handbook c. A gerund is a verbal that ends in -ing. It is used in the same way a noun is used. Sailing is a traditional vacation activity for the Andersons. d. A gerund phrase is a gerund plus any complements or modifiers. Walking to school is common for many school children. e. An infinitive is a verbal formed from the word to and the base form of a verb. It is often used as a noun. Because an infinitive acts as a noun, it may be the subject of a sentence or the direct object of an action verb. To sing can be uplifting. (infinitive as subject) Babies first learn to babble. (infinitive as direct object) f. An infinitive phrase contains an infinitive plus any complements or modifiers. The flight attendants prepared to feed the hungry passengers. SUBJECT-VERB AGREEMENT 1. A verb must agree with its subject in person and number. The kangaroo jumps. (singular) The kangaroos jump. (plural) She is leaping. (singular) They are leaping. (plural) 2. In inverted sentences the subject follows the verb. The sentence may begin with a prepositional phrase, the word there or here, or a form of do. Into the pond dove the children. Does a bird have a sense of smell? There is a squeak in that third stair. 3. Do not mistake a word in a prepositional phrase for the subject. The glass in the window is streaked. (The singular verb is agrees with the subject, glass.) Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 4. A title is always singular, even if nouns in the title are plural. Instant World Facts is a helpful reference book. 5. Subjects combined with and or both need a plural verb unless the parts are of a whole unit. When compound subjects are joined with or or nor, the verb agrees with the subject listed last. Canterbury and Coventry have famous cathedrals. A bagel and cream cheese is a filling snack. Either two short stories or a novel is acceptable for your book report. 6. A verb must agree in number with an indefinite pronoun subject. Indefinite pronouns that are always singular: anybody, anyone, anything, each, either, everybody, everyone, everything, neither, nobody, no one, nothing, one, somebody, someone, and something. Always plural: both, few, many, others, and several Either singular or plural: all, any, most, none, and some Most of the snow has melted. All of the children have eaten. Handbook 11 a lot, alot Always write this expression, meaning “very much” or “a large amount,” as two words. The neighbors pitched in, and the job went a lot faster. accept, except Accept, a verb, means “to receive” or “to agree to.” Except may be a preposition or a verb. As a preposition it means “other than.” As a verb it means “to leave out, to make an exception.” I accept your plan. We ate everything except the crust. all ready, already All ready means “completely prepared.” Already means “before” or “by this time.” They were all ready to leave, but the bus had already departed. all together, altogether The two words all together mean “in a group.” The single word altogether is an adverb meaning “completely” or “on the whole.” The teachers met all together after school. They were altogether prepared for a heated discussion. beside, besides Beside means “next to.” Besides means “in addition to.” The sink is beside the refrigerator. Besides the kitchen, the den is my favorite room. between, among Use between to refer to or to compare two separate nouns. Use among to show a relationship in a group. The joke was between Hilary and Megan. The conversation among the teacher, the principal, and the janitor was friendly. bring, take Use bring to show movement from a distant place to a closer one. Use take to show movement from a nearby place to a more distant one. You may bring your model here. Please take a brochure with you when you go. can, may Can indicates the ability to do something. May indicates permission to do something. Constance can walk to school. She may ride the bus if she wishes. choose, chose Choose means “to select.” Chose is the past participle form, meaning “selected.” I choose the blue folder. Celia chose the purple folder. fewer, less Use fewer with nouns that can be counted. Use less with nouns that cannot be counted. There were fewer sunny days this year. I see less fog today than I expected. 12 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Handbook USAGE GLOSSARY in, into Use in to mean “inside” or “within” and into to indicate movement or direction from outside to a point within. The birds nest in the trees. A bird flew into our window yesterday. its, it’s Its is the possessive form of the pronoun it. Possessive pronouns never have apostrophes. It’s is the contraction of it is. The dog lives in its own house. Who is to say whether it’s happy or not. lay, lie Lay means “to put” or “to place,” and it takes a direct object. Lie means “to recline” or “to be positioned,” and it never takes an object. We lay the uniforms on the shelves each day. The players lie on the floor to do their sit-ups. learn, teach Learn means “to receive knowledge.” Teach means “to give knowledge.” Children can learn foreign languages at an early age. Mr. Minton will teach French to us next year. leave, let Leave means “to go away.” Let means “to allow” or “to permit.” I will leave after fourth period. Dad will let me go swimming today. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill loose, lose Use loose to mean “not firmly attached” and lose to mean “to misplace” or “to fail to win.” The bike chain was very loose. I did not want to lose my balance. many, much Use many with nouns that can be counted. Use much with nouns that cannot be counted. Many ants were crawling near the anthill. There was much discussion about what to do. precede, proceed Precede means “to go or come before.” Proceed means “to continue.” Lunch will precede the afternoon session. Marly can proceed with her travel plans. quiet, quite Quiet means “calm” or “motionless.” Quite means “completely” or “entirely.” The sleeping kitten was quiet. The other kittens were quite playful. raise, rise Raise means “to cause to move upward,” and it always takes an object. Rise means “to get up”; it is intransitive and never takes an object. Please raise your hand if you would like to help. I left the bread in a warm spot to rise. Handbook 13 Handbook formally, formerly Formally is the adverb form of formal. Formerly is an adverb meaning “in times past.” They formally agreed to the exchange. Lydia formerly lived in Spain, but now she lives in New York City. than, then Than is a conjunction that is used to introduce the second element in a comparison; it also shows exception. Then is an adverb meaning “at that time.” Wisconsin produces more milk than any other state. First get comfortable, then look the pitcher right in the eye. their, they’re Their is the possessive form of the personal pronoun they. They’re is the contraction of they are. The Westons returned to their favorite vacation spot. They’re determined to go next year as well. theirs, there’s Theirs means “that or those belonging to them.” There’s is the contraction of there is. Theirs is one of the latest models. There’s another pitcher of lemonade in the refrigerator. to, too, two To is a preposition meaning “in the direction of.” Too means “also” or “excessively.” Two is the number that falls between one and three. You may go to the library. It is too cold for skating. There are only two days of vacation left. where at Do not use at in a sentence after where. Where were you yesterday afternoon? (not Where were you at yesterday afternoon?) whose, who’s Whose is the possessive form of who. Who’s is the contraction of who is. Do you know whose books these are? Who’s willing to help me clean up? your, you’re Your is the possessive form of you. You’re is the contraction of you are. Please arrange your schedule so that you can be on time. If you’re late, you may miss something important. CAPITALIZATION 1. Capitalize the first word of every sentence, including direct quotations and sentences in parentheses unless they are contained within another sentence. In Poor Richard’s Almanack, Benjamin Franklin advises, “Wish not so much to live long as to live well.” (This appeared in the almanac published in 1738.) 2. Capitalize the first word in the salutation and closing of a letter. Capitalize the title and name of the person addressed. Dear Professor Nichols: Sincerely yours, 14 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Handbook sit, set Sit means “to place oneself in a sitting position.” It rarely takes an object. Set means “to place” or “to put” and usually takes an object. Set can also be used to describe the sun going down. Please sit in your assigned seats. Set those dishes down. The sun set at 6:14. Handbook 3. Always capitalize the pronoun I no matter where it appears in the sentence. Since I knew you were coming, I baked a cake. 4. Capitalize the following proper nouns: a. Names of individuals, the initials that stand for their names, and titles preceding a name or used instead of a name Governor Cordoba A. C. Shen Aunt Margaret Dr. H. C. Harada General Diaz b. Names and abbreviations of academic degrees, and Jr. and Sr. Richard Boe, Ph.D. Sammy Davis Jr. c. Names of cities, countries, states, continents, bodies of water, sections of the United States, and compass points when they refer to a specific section of the United States Boston Dade County North Carolina Australia Amazon River the South d. Names of streets, highways, organizations, institutions, firms, monuments, bridges, buildings, other structures, and celestial bodies Route 51 Circle K Society Tomb of the Unknown Soldier Golden Gate Bridge Coventry Cathedral North Star e. Trade names and names of documents, awards, and laws No-Sneez tissues the Fourteenth Amendment Golden Globe Award the Monroe Doctrine f. Names of most historical events, eras, holidays, days of the week, and months Boston Tea Party Bronze Age Labor Day Friday July Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill g. First, last, and all important words in titles of literary works, works of art, and musical compositions Giants in the Earth (book) “I Ask My Mother to Sing” (poem) Venus de Milo (statue) “America, The Beautiful” (composition) h. Names of ethnic groups, national groups, political parties and their members, and languages Hispanics Chinese Irish Italian Republican party 5. Capitalize proper adjectives (adjectives formed from proper nouns). English saddle horse Thai restaurant Midwestern plains PUNCTUATION, ABBREVIATIONS, AND NUMBERS 1. Use a period at the end of a declarative sentence and at the end of a polite command. Mrs. Miranda plays tennis every Tuesday. Write your name in the space provided. 2. Use a question mark at the end of an interrogative sentence. When will the new books arrive? Handbook 15 4. Use a comma in the following situations: a. To separate three or more words, phrases, or clauses in a series A tent, sleeping bag, and sturdy shoes are essential wilderness camping equipment. b. To set off two or more prepositional phrases After the sound of the bell, we realized it was a false alarm. c. After an introductory participle and an introductory participial phrase Marveling at the sight, we waited to see another shooting star. d. After conjunctive adverbs Snow is falling; however, it is turning to sleet. e. To set off an appositive if it is not essential to the meaning of the sentence Mr. Yoshino, the head of the department, resigned yesterday. f. To set off words or phrases of direct address Micha, have you called your brother yet? It’s good to see you, Mrs. Han. g. Between the main clauses of compound sentences Whiskers liked to watch the goldfish, and she sometimes dipped her paw in the bowl. h. After an introductory adverb clause and to set off a nonessential adjective clause Whenever we get careless, we always make mistakes. Spelling errors, which are common, can now be corrected by computer. i. To separate parts of an address or a date 1601 Burma Drive, Waterbury, Connecticut She was born on February 2, 1985, and she now lives in Bangor, Maine. j. After the salutation and close of a friendly letter and after the close of a business letter Dear Dad, Cordially, Yours, 5. Use a semicolon in the following situations: a. To join main clauses not joined by a coordinating conjunction The house looks dark; perhaps we should have called first. b. To separate two main clauses joined by a coordinating conjunction when such clauses already contain several commas After a week of rain, the farmers around Ames, Iowa, waited hopefully; but the rain, unfortunately, had come too late. c. To separate main clauses joined by a conjunctive adverb or by for example or that is Jen was determined to win the race; nonetheless, she knew that it took more than determination to succeed. 16 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Handbook 3. Use an exclamation point to show strong feeling and indicate a forceful command. Oh, no! It was a terrific concert! Don’t go outside without your gloves on! Handbook 6. Use a colon to introduce a list of items that ends a sentence. Bring the following tools: hammer, speed square, and drill. 7. Use a colon to separate the hour and the minute in time measurements and after business letter salutations. Dear Sir: Dear Ms. O’Connor: 12:42 A.M. 8. Use quotation marks to enclose a direct quotation. When a quotation is interrupted, use two sets of quotation marks. Use single quotation marks for a quotation within a quotation. “Are you sure,” asked my mother, “that you had your keys when you left home?” “Chief Seattle’s speech begins, ‘My words are like the stars that never change,’” stated the history teacher. 9. Always place commas and periods inside closing quotation marks. Place colons and semicolons outside closing quotation marks. Place question marks and exclamation points inside closing quotation marks only when those marks are part of the quotation. “Giraffes,” said Ms. Wharton, “spend long hours each day foraging.” You must read “The Story of an Hour”; it is a wonderful short story. He called out, “Is anyone home?” Are you sure she said, “Go home without me”? Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 10. Use quotation marks to indicate titles of short stories, poems, essays, songs, and magazine or newspaper articles. “The Thrill of the Grass” (short story) “My Country ’Tis of Thee” (song) 11. Italicize (underline) titles of books, plays, films, television series, paintings and sculptures, and names of newspapers and magazines. Up from Slavery (book) Free Willy (film) The Spirit of ’76 (painting) Chicago Tribune (newspaper) Weekend Woodworker (magazine) 12. Add an apostrophe and -s to form the possessive of singular indefinite pronouns, singular nouns, and plural nouns not ending in -s. Add only an apostrophe to plural nouns ending in -s to make them possessive. everyone’s best friend the rabbit’s ears the children’s toys the farmers’ fields Handbook 17 14. Use a hyphen to divide words at the end of a line. esti-mate mone-tary experi-mentation 15. Use a hyphen in a compound adjective that precedes a noun. Use a hyphen in compound numbers and fractions used as adjectives. a blue-green parrot a salt-and-pepper beard twenty-nine one-third cup of flour 16. Use a hyphen after any prefix joined to a proper noun or a proper adjective. Use a hyphen after the prefixes all-, ex-, and self- joined to a noun or adjective, the prefix anti- joined to a word beginning with i-, and the prefix vice- except in the case of vice president. all-knowing ex-spouse self-confidence anti-inflammatory vice-principal 17. Use dashes to signal a break or change in thought. I received a letter from Aunt Carla—you have never met her—saying she is coming to visit. 18. Use parentheses to set off supplemental material. Punctuate within the parentheses only if the punctuation is part of the parenthetical expression. Place one gallon (3.8 liters) of water in a plastic container. 19. Abbreviate a person’s title and professional or academic degrees. Ms. K. Soga, Ph.D. Dr. Quentin 20. Use the abbreviations A.M. and P.M. and B.C. and A.D. 9:45 A.M. 1000 B.C. A.D. 1455 21. Abbreviate numerical measurements in scientific writing but not in ordinary prose. The newborn snakes measured 3.4 in. long. Pour 45 ml warm water into the beaker. 22. Spell out cardinal and ordinal numbers that can be written in one or two words or that appear at the beginning of a sentence. Two hundred twenty runners crossed the finish line. Observers counted forty-nine sandhill cranes. 23. Express all related numbers in a sentence as numerals if any one should be expressed as a numeral. There were 127 volunteers, but only 9 showed up because of the bad weather. 18 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Handbook 13. Use an apostrophe in place of omitted letters or numerals. Use an apostrophe and -s to form the plural of letters, numerals, and symbols. is + not = isn’t will + not = won’t 1776 is ’76 Cross your t ’s and dot your i ’s. Handbook 24. Spell out ordinal numbers. Nina won third place in the spelling bee. 25. Use words for decades, for amounts of money that can be written in one or two words, and for the approximate time of day or when A.M. or P.M. is not used. the ninties ten dollars sixty cents half past five 26. Use numerals for dates; for decimals; for house, apartment, and room numbers; for street or avenue numbers; for telephone numbers; for page numbers; for percentages; for sums of money including both dollars and cents; and to emphasize the exact time of day or when A.M. or P.M. is used. June 5, 1971 Apartment 4G $207.89 0.0045 1520 14th Street 8:20 A.M. VOCABULARY AND SPELLING 1. Clues to the meaning of an unfamiliar word can be found in its context. Context clues include definition, the meaning stated; example, the meaning explained through one familiar case; comparison, similarity to a familiar word; contrast, opposite of a familiar word; and cause and effect, a reason and its results. 2. The meaning of a word can be obtained from its base word, its prefix, or its suffix. telegram tele = distant dentate dent = tooth subartic sub = below marvelous -ous = full of 3. The i comes before the e, except when both letters follow a c or when both letters are pronounced together as an a– sound. However, many exceptions exist to this rule. receive (ei after c) weigh (a– sound) height (exception) yield (i before e) Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 4. An unstressed vowel is a vowel sound that is not emphasized when the word is pronounced. Determine how to spell this sound by comparing it to a known word. informant (compare to information) hospital (compare to hospitality) 5. When joining a prefix that ends in the same letter as the word, keep both consonants. illegible disservice 6. When adding a suffix to a word ending in a consonant + y, change the y to i unless the prefix begins with an i. If the word ends in a vowel + y, keep the y. tried played spraying 7. Double the final consonant before adding a suffix that begins with a vowel to a word that ends in a single consonant preceded by a single vowel if the accent is on the root’s last syllable. popping transferred unforgettable 8. When adding a suffix that begins with a consonant to a word that ends in silent e, generally keep the e. If the suffix begins with a vowel or y, generally drop the e. If the suffix begins with a or o and the word ends in ce or ge, keep the e. If the suffix begins with a vowel and the word ends in ee or oe, keep the e. stately noisy courageous agreeable Handbook 19 10. When forming compound words, maintain the spelling of both words. backpack honeybee 11. Most nouns form their plurals by adding -s. However, nouns that end in -ch, -s, -sh, -x, or -z form plurals by adding -es. If the noun ends in a consonant + y, change y to i and add -es. If the noun ends in -lf, change f to v and add -es. If the noun ends in -fe, change f to v and add -s. marks leaches rashes foxes flies elves lives 12. To form the plural of proper names and one-word compound nouns, follow the general rules for plurals. To form the plural of hyphenated compound nouns or compound nouns of more than one word, make the most important word plural. Wilsons Diazes housekeepers sisters-in-law editors-in-chief 13. Some nouns have the same singular and plural forms. deer moose Composition Writing Themes and Paragraphs 1. Use prewriting to find ideas to write about. One form of prewriting, freewriting, starts with a subject or topic and branches off into related ideas. Another way to find a topic is to ask and answer questions about your starting subject, helping you to gain a deeper understanding of your chosen topic. Also part of the prewriting stage is determining who your readers or audience will be and deciding your purpose for writing. Your purpose—writing to persuade, to explain, to describe, or to narrate—is partially shaped by who your audience will be. 2. To complete your first draft, organize your prewriting into an introduction, body, and conclusion. Concentrate on unity and coherence of the overall piece. Experiment with different paragraph orders: chronological order places events in the order in which they happened; spatial order places objects in the order in which they appear; and compare/contrast order shows similarities and differences in objects or events. 3. Revise your composition if necessary. Read through your draft, looking for places to improve content and structure. Remember that varying your sentence patterns and lengths will make your writing easier and more enjoyable to read. 20 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Handbook 9. When adding -ly to a word that ends in a single l, keep the l. If it ends in a double l, drop one l. If it ends in a consonant + le, drop the le. meal, meally full, fully incredible, incredibly Handbook 4. In the editing stage, check your grammar, spelling, and punctuation. Focus on expressing your ideas clearly and concisely. 5. Finally, prepare your writing for presentation. Sharing your composition, or ideas, with others may take many forms: printed, oral, or graphic. Outlining 1. The two common forms of outlines are sentence outlines and topic outlines. Choose one type of outline and keep it uniform throughout. 2. A period follows the number or letter of each division. Each point in a sentence outline ends with a period; the points in a topic outline do not. 3. Each point begins with a capital letter. 4. A point may have no fewer than two subpoints. SENTENCE OUTLINE I. This is the main point. A. This is a subpoint of I. 1. This is a detail of A. a. This is a detail of 1. b. This is a detail of 1. 2. This is a detail of A. B. This is a subpoint of I. II. This is another main point. TOPIC OUTLINE I. Main point A. Subpoint of I 1. Detail of A a. Detail of 1 b. Detail of 1 2. Detail of A B. Subpoint of I II. Main point Writing Letters Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 1. Personal letters are usually handwritten in indented form (first line of paragraphs, each line of the heading and inside address, and the signature are indented). Business letters are usually typewritten in block or semiblock form. Block form contains no indents; semiblock form indents only the first line of each paragraph. 2. The five parts of a personal letter are the heading (the writer’s address and the date), salutation (greeting), body (message), complimentary close (such as “Yours truly,”), and signature (the writer’s name). Business letters have the same parts and also include an inside address (the recipient’s address). Handbook 21 Heading ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ Salutation _________________________ __________________________ __________________________ __________________________ __________________________ Body _________________________ __________________________ __________________________ __________________________ _________________________ __________________________ __________________________ __________________________ Complimentary Close _______ Signature ___________ BUSINESS LETTER Heading ____________ ____________ ____________ _______ Inside Address ________ __________ ____________ Salutation __________________________ __________________________ __________________________ ________________ Body __________________________ __________________________ __________________________ ________________ __________________________ __________________________ ________________ Complimentary Close _______ Signature ___________ 3. Reveal your personality and imagination in colorful personal letters. Keep business letters brief, clear, and courteous. 4. Personal letters include letters to friends and family members. Thank-you notes and invitations are personal letters that may be either formal or informal in style. 5. Use a letter of request, a type of business letter, to ask for information or to place an order. Be concise, yet give all the details necessary for your request to be fulfilled. Keep the tone of your letter courteous, and be generous in allotting time for a response. 6. Use an opinion letter to take a firm stand on an issue. Make the letter clear, firm, rational, and purposeful. Be aware of your audience, their attitude, how informed they are, and their possible reactions to your opinion. Support your statements of opinion with facts. 22 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Handbook PERSONAL LETTER Troubleshooter frag Sentence Fragments 24 run-on Run-on Sentences 26 agr Lack of Subject-Verb Agreement 28 tense Incorrect Verb Tense or Form 32 pro Incorrect Use of Pronouns 34 adj Incorrect Use of Adjectives 36 com Incorrect Use of Commas 38 apos Incorrect Use of Apostrophes 41 cap Incorrect Capitalization 44 Troubleshooter 23 PROBLEM 1 Fragment that lacks a subject frag Martha asked about dinner. Hoped it was lasagna. frag I jogged around the park twice. Was hot and tired afterward. frag Li Cheng raced to the bus stop. Arrived just in the nick of time. SOLUTION Martha asked about dinner. She hoped it was lasagna. I jogged around the park twice. I was hot and tired afterward. Li Cheng raced to the bus stop. He arrived just in the nick of time. Make a complete sentence by adding a subject to the fragment. PROBLEM 2 Fragment that lacks a predicate frag The carpenter worked hard all morning. His assistant after lunch. frag Ant farms are fascinating. The ants around in constant motion. frag Our class went on a field trip. Mammoth Cave. 24 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Troubleshooter Sentence Fragments SOLUTION Troubleshooter The carpenter worked hard all morning. His assistant helped after lunch. Ant farms are fascinating. The ants crawl around in constant motion. Our class went on a field trip. Mammoth Cave was our destination. Make a complete sentence by adding a predicate. PROBLEM 3 Fragment that lacks both a subject and a predicate frag I heard the laughter of the children. In the nursery. frag After the spring rain. The whole house smelled fresh and clean. frag The noisy chatter of the squirrels awakened us early. In the morning. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill SOLUTION I heard the laughter of the children in the nursery. After the spring rain, the whole house smelled fresh and clean. The noisy chatter of the squirrels awakened us early in the morning. Combine the fragment with another sentence. Need More Help? More help in avoiding sentence fragments is available in Lesson 6. Troubleshooter 25 PROBLEM 1 Two main clauses separated only by a comma run-on Extra crackers are available, they are next to the salad bar. run-on Hurdles are Sam’s specialty, he likes them best. SOLUTION A Extra crackers are available. They are next to the salad bar. Make two sentences by separating the first clause from the second with end punctuation, such as a period or a question mark, and starting the second sentence with a capital letter. SOLUTION B Hurdles are Sam’s specialty; he likes them best. Place a semicolon between the main clauses of the sentence. PROBLEM 2 Two main clauses with no punctuation between them run-on The law student studied hard she passed her exam. run-on Kamil looked for the leash he found it in the closet. 26 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Troubleshooter Run-on Sentences SOLUTION A The law student studied hard. She passed her exam. Troubleshooter Make two sentences out of the run-on sentence. SOLUTION B Kamil looked for the leash, and he found it in the closet. Add a comma and a coordinating conjunction between the main clauses. PROBLEM 3 Two main clauses without a comma before the coordinating conjunction run-on You can rollerskate like a pro but you cannot ice skate. run-on Julian gazed at the moon and he marveled at its brightness. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill SOLUTION You can rollerskate like a pro, but you cannot ice skate. Julian gazed at the moon, and he marveled at its brightness. Add a comma before the coordinating conjunction. Need More Help? More help in avoiding run-on sentences is available in Lesson 7. Troubleshooter 27 PROBLEM 1 A subject separated from the verb by an intervening prepositional phrase agr The stories in the newspaper was well written. agr The house in the suburbs were just what she wanted. SOLUTION The stories in the newspaper were well written. The house in the suburbs was just what she wanted. Make sure that the verb agrees with the subject of the sentence, not with the object of a preposition. The object of a preposition is never the subject. PROBLEM 2 A sentence that begins with here or there agr Here go the duck with her ducklings. agr There is the pencils you were looking for. agr Here is the snapshots from our vacation to the Grand Canyon. 28 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Troubleshooter Lack of Subject-Verb Agreement SOLUTION Troubleshooter Here goes the duck with her ducklings. There are the pencils you were looking for. Here are the snapshots from our vacation to the Grand Canyon. In sentences that begin with here or there, look for the subject after the verb. Make sure that the verb agrees with the subject. PROBLEM 3 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill An indefinite pronoun as the subject agr Each of the animals have a unique way of walking. agr Many of the movies was black and white. agr None of the leaves is turning colors yet. SOLUTION Each of the animals has a unique way of walking. Many of the movies were black and white. None of the leaves are turning colors yet. Some indefinite pronouns are singular, some are plural, and some can be either singular or plural. Determine whether the indefinite pronoun is singular or plural, and make the verb agree. Troubleshooter 29 PROBLEM 4 agr The students and the teacher adores the classroom hamster. agr The expert and best source of information are Dr. Marlin. SOLUTION A The students and the teacher adore the classroom hamster. Use a plural verb if the parts of the compound subject do not belong to one unit or if they refer to different people or things. SOLUTION B The expert and best source of information is Dr. Marlin. Use a singular verb if the parts of the compound subject belong to one unit or if they refer to the same person or thing. PROBLEM 5 A compound subject that is joined by or or nor agr Either Hester or Sue are supposed to pick us up. agr Neither pepper nor spices improves the flavor of this sauce. agr Either Caroline or Robin volunteer at the local food pantry. agr Neither the coach nor the screaming fans agrees with the referee’s call. 30 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Troubleshooter A compound subject that is joined by and SOLUTION Troubleshooter Either Hester or Sue is supposed to pick us up. Neither pepper nor spices improve the flavor of this sauce. Either Caroline or Robin volunteers at the local food pantry. Neither the coach nor the screaming fans agree with the referee’s call. Make the verb agree with the subject that is closer to it. More help with subject-verb agreement is available in Lessons 48–51. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Need More Help? Troubleshooter 31 PROBLEM 1 An incorrect or missing verb ending tense We talk yesterday for more than an hour. tense They sail last month for Barbados. tense Sally and James land at the airport yesterday. SOLUTION We talked yesterday for more than an hour. They sailed last month for Barbados. Sally and James landed at the airport yesterday. To form the past tense and the past participle, add -ed to a regular verb. PROBLEM 2 An improperly formed irregular verb tense Our hair clinged to us in the humid weather. tense Trent drinked all the orange juice. tense The evening breeze blowed the clouds away. 32 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Troubleshooter Incorrect Verb Tense or Form SOLUTION Troubleshooter Our hair clung to us in the humid weather. Trent drank all the orange juice. The evening breeze blew the clouds away. Irregular verbs vary in their past and past participle forms. Look up the ones you are not sure of. Consider memorizing them if you feel it is necessary. PROBLEM 3 Confusion between a verb’s past form and its past participle tense Helen has took first place in the marathon. SOLUTION Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Helen has taken first place in the marathon. Use the past participle form of an irregular verb, and not its past form, when you use the auxiliary verb have. Need More Help? More help with correct verb forms is available in Lessons 19–24. Troubleshooter 33 PROBLEM 1 A pronoun that refers to more than one antecedent pro The wind and the rain came suddenly, but it did not last. pro Henry ran with Philip, but he was faster. pro When Sarah visits Corinne, she is glad for the company. SOLUTION The wind and the rain came suddenly, but the rain did not last. Henry ran with Philip, but Philip was faster. When Sarah visits Corinne, Corinne is glad for the company. Substitute a noun for the pronoun to make your sentence clearer. PROBLEM 2 Personal pronouns as subjects pro Him and Mary unfurled the tall, white sail. pro Nina and them bought theater tickets yesterday. pro Karen and me heard the good news on the television. 34 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Troubleshooter Incorrect Use of Pronouns SOLUTION Troubleshooter He and Mary unfurled the tall, white sail. Nina and they bought theater tickets yesterday. Karen and I heard the good news on the television. Use a subject pronoun as the subject part of a sentence. PROBLEM 3 Personal pronouns as objects pro The horse galloped across the field to Anne and I. pro The new signs confused Clark and they. pro Grant wrote she a letter of apology. SOLUTION The horse galloped across the field to Anne and me. The new signs confused Clark and them. Grant wrote her a letter of apology. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill An object pronoun is the object of a verb or preposition. Need More Help? More help with correct use of pronouns is available in Lessons 25–29. Troubleshooter 35 PROBLEM 1 Incorrect use of good, better, best adj Is a horse more good than a pony? adj Literature is my most good subject. SOLUTION Is a horse better than a pony? Literature is my best subject. The words better and best are the comparative and superlative forms of the word good. Do not use the words more or most before the irregular forms of comparative and superlative adjectives. PROBLEM 2 Incorrect use of bad, worse, worst adj That game was the baddest game our team ever played. SOLUTION That game was the worst game our team ever played. Do not use the suffixes -er or -est after the irregular forms of comparative and superlative adjectives. Do not use the words more or most before the irregular forms of comparative and superlative adjectives. 36 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Troubleshooter Incorrect Use of Adjectives PROBLEM 3 Incorrect use of comparative adjectives Troubleshooter This bike is more faster than my old bike. adj SOLUTION This bike is faster than my old bike. Do not use -er and more together. PROBLEM 4 Incorrect use of superlative adjectives adj Kara said it was the most biggest lawn she ever had to mow. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill SOLUTION Kara said it was the biggest lawn she ever had to mow. Do not use -est and most together. Need More Help? More help with the correct use of adjectives is available in Lessons 30–33. Troubleshooter 37 PROBLEM 1 Missing commas in a series of three or more items com We saw ducks geese and seagulls at the park. com Jake ate dinner watched a movie and visited friends. SOLUTION We saw ducks, geese, and seagulls at the park. Jake ate dinner, watched a movie, and visited friends. If there are three or more items in a series, use a comma after each item except the last one. PROBLEM 2 Missing commas with direct quotations com “The party” said José “starts at seven o’clock.” com “My new book” Roger exclaimed “is still on the bus!” 38 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Troubleshooter Incorrect Use of Commas SOLUTION Troubleshooter “The party,” said José, “starts at seven o’clock.” “My new book,” Roger exclaimed, “is still on the bus!” If a quotation is interrupted, the first part ends with a comma followed by quotation marks. The interrupting words are also followed by a comma. PROBLEM 3 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Missing commas with nonessential appositives com Maria our new friend is from Chicago. com The old lane a tree-lined gravel path is a great place to walk on a hot afternoon. SOLUTION Maria, our new friend, is from Chicago. The old lane, a tree-lined gravel path, is a great place to walk on a hot afternoon. Decide whether the appositive is truly essential to the meaning of the sentence. If it is not essential, set it off with commas. Troubleshooter 39 PROBLEM 4 Karen who started early finished her work before noon. com SOLUTION Karen, who started early, finished her work before noon. Decide whether the clause is truly essential to the meaning of the sentence. If it is not essential, then set it off with commas. PROBLEM 5 Missing commas with introductory adverb clauses com When the wind rises too high the boats lower their sails. SOLUTION When the wind rises too high, the boats lower their sails. Place a comma after an introductory adverbial clause. Need More Help? More help with commas is available in Lessons 72–76. 40 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Troubleshooter Missing commas with nonessential adjective clauses Incorrect Use of Apostrophes Troubleshooter PROBLEM 1 Singular possessive nouns apos Pablos new bicycle is in Charles yard. apos Bills video collection is really great. apos That horses saddle has real silver on it. SOLUTION Pablo’s new bicycle is in Charles’s yard. Bill’s video collection is really great. That horse’s saddle has real silver on it. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Place an apostrophe before a final -s to form the possessive of a singular noun, even one that ends in -s. PROBLEM 2 Plural possessive nouns that end in -s apos The girls team won the tournament. apos The boats sails are very colorful against the blue sky. apos The model cars boxes are in my room. Troubleshooter 41 SOLUTION Troubleshooter The girls’ team won the tournament. The boats’ sails are very colorful against the blue sky. The model cars’ boxes are in my room. Use an apostrophe by itself to form the possessive of a plural noun that ends in -s. PROBLEM 3 Plural possessive nouns that do not end in -s apos The deers best habitat is a deep, unpopulated woodland. apos The childrens clothes are on the third floor. SOLUTION The deer’s best habitat is a deep, unpopulated woodland. The children’s clothes are on the third floor. PROBLEM 4 Possessive personal pronouns apos The poster is her’s, but the magazine is their’s. 42 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill When a plural noun does not end in -s, use an apostrophe and an -s to form the possessive of the noun. SOLUTION The poster is hers, but the magazine is theirs. Troubleshooter Do not use apostrophes with possessive personal pronouns. PROBLEM 5 Confusion between its and it’s apos The old tree was the last to lose it’s leaves. apos Its the best CD I have ever heard them put out. SOLUTION Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill The old tree was the last to lose its leaves. It’s the best CD I have ever heard them put out. Use an apostrophe to form the contraction of it is. The possessive of the personal pronoun it does not take an apostrophe. Need More Help? More help with apostrophes and possessives is available in Lessons 11 and 80. Troubleshooter 43 PROBLEM 1 Words that refer to ethnic groups, nationalities, and languages Many irish citizens speak both english and gaelic. cap SOLUTION Many Irish citizens speak both English and Gaelic. Capitalize proper nouns and adjectives referring to ethnic groups, nationalities, and languages. PROBLEM 2 The first word of a direct quotation cap Yuri said, “the rain off the bay always blows this way.” SOLUTION Yuri said, “The rain off the bay always blows this way.” Capitalize the first word of a direct quotation if it is a complete sentence. A direct quotation is the speaker’s exact words. Need More Help? More help with capitalization is available in Lessons 63–70. 44 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Troubleshooter Incorrect Capitalization Grammar Grammar 45 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 1: Subjects, Predicates, and Sentences Lesson 1 Kinds of Sentences: Declarative and Interrogative A sentence is a group of words that expresses a complete thought. All sentences begin with a capital letter and end with a punctuation mark. Different kinds of sentences have different purposes. Grammar A declarative sentence makes a statement. It ends with a period. Last summer I went on a long trip. An interrogative sentence asks a question. It ends with a question mark. Where did you go on your vacation?  Exercise 1 Insert a period if the sentence is declarative. Insert a question mark if it is interrogative. My family and I went to Alaska . 1. Have you ever been that far north ? 2. Alaska is a wonderful and wild state . 3. Isn’t it the largest state in the union ? Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 4. Was the weather hotter than you expected ? 5. Some days were so warm that I wore shorts . 6. In some parts of Alaska, the sun never sets in summer . 7. Summers in Alaska don’t last very long . 8. Are Alaskan winters as cold as they say ? 9. The ground under much of Alaska is permanently frozen . 10. How can animals live in such a cold climate ? 11. All the animals in Alaska are equipped for the cold . 12. Did you see any bears in Alaska ? 13. We saw a lot of brown bears at Katmai National Monument . Unit 1, Subjects, Predicates, and Sentences 47 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 14. Male brown bears can be as tall as ten feet . 15. Can an animal that big move very fast ? 16. A brown bear can run as fast as twenty-five miles per hour . 17. Do you think you’d be afraid of a brown bear ? 18. Did you know that the highest mountain in North America is in Alaska ? 19. The mountain is called Denali . 21. Denali is a Native American word that means “the great one” . 22. At one time only Native Americans lived in Alaska . 23. Who were the first white settlers in Alaska ? 24. Russians built a settlement on Kodiak Island in 1784 . 25. Why did the Russians want to settle in Alaska ? 26. They went there to look for furs . 27. Russia sold Alaska to the United States in 1867 . 28. How much did the United States pay for Alaska ? 29. Alaska cost the United States $7.2 million . 30. Does that seem like a lot of money to you ? 31. When did Americans begin going to Alaska ? 32. Americans began going to Alaska during the 1890s and 1900s . 33. They went there to look for gold . 34. Large amounts of “black gold” were discovered in Alaska in 1968 . 35. What is “black gold” ? 36. “Black gold” is another name for oil . 37. Alaska also has coal, platinum, copper, and uranium . 38. Did you take many pictures during your trip ? 39. I took a great shot of an eagle catching a salmon . 40. Do you want to see some other pictures I took ? 48 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 20. What does Denali mean ? Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 2 Kinds of Sentences: Exclamatory and Imperative In addition to declarative and interrogative sentences, there are two other types of sentences. An exclamatory sentence shows strong feeling. It ends with an exclamation point. I never saw so much traffic! Grammar An imperative sentence commands someone to do something. The subject you is understood. An imperative sentence can end with either a period or an exclamation point. (You) Look both ways before crossing the street. (You) Look out! Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill  Exercise 1 Write exc. in the blank before each exclamatory sentence and imp. before each imperative sentence. exc. That alarm clock is too loud! imp. 1. Give the orange juice to Cecilia. exc. 2. How sleepy I am! exc. 3. What a funny dream I had last night! exc. 4. I can hardly wait for the dance! imp. 5. Please don’t talk so loudly. imp. 6. Tell Kwasi that it’s time to get up. imp. 7. Put the timer where you’ll be sure to see it. exc. 8. I love peanut butter sandwiches! exc. 9. The toast is burning! imp. 10. Give this bottle to the baby. exc. 11. Becky spilled all her cereal! imp. 12. Mop it up with a paper towel. imp. 13. Help me set the table. exc. 14. I’m in trouble if I’m late for school! exc. 15. Jan forgot to do her math homework! Unit 1, Subjects, Predicates, and Sentences 49 imp. 16. Please take these books back to the library. imp. 17. Pour some more milk for Ricardo. exc. 18. How I would love to be a rock star! imp. 19. Get that cat off the table! exc. 20. The puppy chewed a hole in my sock! imp. 21. Pull up the anchor so we can be on our way. exc. 22. Gordo is such a cute puppy! imp. 23. Take these old magazines to your art teacher. imp. 24. Be careful not to drop the plates. exc. 25. My new sneakers are covered with mud! imp. 26. Comb Tina’s hair and put a ribbon in it. exc. 27. I wish Dad would drive us to school! exc. 28. I can’t believe you ate all of that! exc. 29. Oh, no, the car won’t start! imp. 30. Make sure you have enough air in your bike tires. imp. 31. Put your dishes in the sink before you leave. imp. 32. Don’t forget to call me when you get home. exc. 33. I dropped my ring into the sink! exc. 34. You spilled juice on the floor! imp. 35. Make sure you tie your shoes before jogging. imp. 36. Put this apple in your pocket.  Writing Link Write a paragraph explaining how to play a game. Use exclamatory and imperative sentences. 50 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 3 Subjects and Predicates: Simple and Complete Every sentence has two parts: a subject and a predicate. The subject part of a sentence names whom or what the sentence is about. The predicate part of a sentence tells what the subject does or has. It can also describe what the subject is or is like. SUBJECT PART The mountain climbers PREDICATE PART reached the peak. Grammar The complete subject is all of the words in the subject part of a sentence. The complete predicate is all of the words in the predicate part of a sentence. COMPLETE SUBJECT The horse’s black mane COMPLETE PREDICATE was blowing in the wind. The simple subject is the main person or thing in the subject part of a sentence. The simple predicate is the main word or group of words in the predicate part of a sentence. SIMPLE SUBJECT The horse’s black mane SIMPLE PREDICATE was blowing in the wind.  Exercise 1 Draw one line under each complete subject and two lines under each complete predicate. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill The bottle of milk is in the refrigerator. 1. That little dog is following us to school. 2. Brian forgot his flute. 3. The yellow canary fell in love with the shiny mirror. 4. Those plaid slacks are much too long for me. 5. Kisha hated the movie. 6. The big, shaggy animals in the pen are yaks. 7. The girl’s long red hair shone in the sun. 8. The Yellow Hornets won the softball game. 9. My cousin Diana hit the ball right over the fence. 10. A sudden rainstorm ended the game. Unit 1, Subjects, Predicates, and Sentences 51 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 11. He spilled the popcorn on the person in front of him. 12. Franco walked home alone. 13. The fire engine raced by on the way to a fire. 14. Dad’s tie was ruined by the gooey mess. 15. The red construction paper is in the cabinet. 16. Captain Kidd was a fearsome pirate. 18. The small boat sank in the big waves. 19. The brave soldier was rescued. 20. Alison’s stepmother teaches English at the high school.  Exercise 2 Draw one line under each simple subject and two lines under each simple predicate. I am twelve years old today. 1. Marco was born in Venice, Italy. 2. Chanel’s father traded his used car for a new one. 3. He traveled all the way to China by himself. 4. Those two were the first to cross the finish line. 5. In March, I returned all of my library books. 6. At least one hundred people waited in line. 7. He told his little sister a bedtime story. 8. Scott’s cousin lost his favorite jacket. 9. The diagram showed three secret passageways. 10. Chen’s nickname was “Louisville Slugger.” 11. Marina never told people her secret. 12. The musician strummed the guitar quietly. 13. Christopher read every book by his favorite author. 14. The red skirt cost more than the blue skirt. 15. The Buckeroos made Gary an honorary member of the team. 52 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 17. The band played for two hours. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 4 Subjects and Predicates: Compound Some sentences have more than one simple subject or simple predicate. A compound subject is two or more simple subjects that have the same predicate. The simple subjects are joined by and, or, or but. Mummies and art objects are found in Egyptian tombs. Grammar A compound predicate is two or more simple predicates that have the same subject. The simple predicates are connected by and, or, or but. The archaeologists excavated the tomb and discovered the treasure. Some sentences have both a compound subject and a compound predicate. The pharaoh and his wife loved the people and did many good works.  Exercise 1 Draw one line under the compound subject and two lines under the simple predicate that they share. Volcanoes and earthquakes cause great destruction. 1. Rome and Florence are two cities in Italy. 2. Both Sara and Caroline were chosen for the team. 3. Cinders and ashes rose from the fire. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 4. People and animals mingle at the zoo. 5. Historians, archaeologists, and tourists love to explore ancient ruins. 6. Paintings and other objects were on display at the museum. 7. Smoke and car exhaust pollute the air. 8. Hot dogs and hamburgers sizzled on the grill. 9. In Egypt mummies and pyramids are favorite subjects of study. 10. My uncle and brother visited me in the hospital. 11. In the summer Shama and I swim every day. 12. Gold and silver cost more than copper. 13. Food and dishes filled the table. 14. The doctor and her nurse waited for the next patient. Unit 1, Subjects, Predicates, and Sentences 53 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 15. Teeth and bones need calcium for strength. 16. Emily and Bill met Ron at the movies. 17. The lion and cheetah are predators. 18. The Ohio River and the Missouri River flow into the Mississippi River. 19. The librarian and their teacher helped them.  Exercise 2 Draw one line under each simple or compound subject and two lines under each compound predicate. LaToya opened her book and raised her hand. 1. Farmers raise crops and sell them to food companies. 2. Mom and Juan made a casserole and put it in the oven. 3. They left the party and headed home. 4. We changed our clothes and went out for dinner. 5. Both Ahmed and Tanika study hard and get good grades. 6. The cat opened its mouth and yawned. 7. Shawn ignored the television and did his homework. 8. Mom and Dad built a doghouse and painted it. 9. My stepbrother opened the door and ran into the yard. 10. The dog followed him and barked. 11. At night we sit on the front porch and tell stories. 12. Our team scored a run and won the game. 13. Sarah will turn on the light and close the curtain. 14. Alicia and Consuelo went to the store and bought milk. 15. The thunder and lightning scared the campers and kept them awake. 16. Kevin likes hamsters and keeps them as pets. 17. I will wash the dishes and put them away. 18. The 4-H Club raises animals and shows them at fairs. 54 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 20. Most men and women exercise to stay in shape. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 5 Simple and Compound Sentences A simple sentence has one subject and one predicate. SUBJECT Natalie Bill and Edward The runners PREDICATE won the marbles tournament. signed up for the paper drive. lined up and waited for the starting signal. Grammar A compound sentence contains two or more simple sentences joined by a comma and and, but, or or. They can also be joined by a semicolon (;). Jessica’s cake won first prize, and Katherine won the sack race. Jessica’s cake won first prize; Katherine won the sack race.  Exercise 1 Write S in the blank before each simple sentence and C before each compound sentence. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill S You and I should go to the fair and see the sights. S 1. Both adults and kids love to go to the fair. C 2. You buy the tickets, and I’ll get the popcorn. C 3. The animals are over there, and the crafts are down this way. S 4. Julieta won a blue ribbon for her painting. S 5. The games and contests are along the crowded fairway. S 6. The bubble gum contest and the juggling contest are almost over. C 7. Al blew a huge bubble, but Fernanda’s bubble was bigger. C 8. Jack’s pig is groomed well; it’s friendly, too. S 9. The pig got away and escaped into the crowd. C 10. I want a hot dog, but Mom says to wait. C 11. Mrs. Collins bakes wonderful pies, and her children eat them. C 12. I want to ride the Ferris wheel, but Ted is afraid. S 13. The roller coaster and the spaceship are the most popular rides. C 14. Give the calf’s rope to me, or tie it to the post. C 15. Anita won first prize; Franco came in second. Unit 1, Subjects, Predicates, and Sentences 55 S 16. My frog, Big Nell, had the longest legs and jumped farthest. C 17. You can put the trophy on the mantel, or you can put it on the shelf. C 18. The cats slept in their cages, and their owners waited nervously. C 19. Puff was the prettiest cat, but she didn’t win. C 20. I’d like to take a kitten home, but we already have too many cats. S 21. The goat ate its blue ribbon and took a nap. C 22. Anita raised the champion cow; her brother showed it at the fair. S 23. The chicken and the rooster stood side by side. C 24. Randi raises rabbits, and Shelly shears sheep. S 25. The biggest pumpkin and the biggest tomato are on that table. C 26. Dad picked the lettuce; I made a prizewinning salad. C 27. Jenny feeds the rabbits, and Andy brushes them. S 28. My sister and her friends made that quilt. C 29. She made the squares for the quilt, and Mandy sewed them together. S 30. At the dog show, two terriers got into a fight. S 31. The grape jelly and the orange marmalade taste wonderful on toast. C 32. Give the chickens some corn, and fill their water dish. S 33. The ponies and the horses are in the barn. C 34. My sister found a wallet, and I took it to the lost-and-found. C 35. Throw a table tennis ball into the goldfish bowl, and win a prize. C 36. Herbie won a stuffed gorilla; Alma won a stuffed tiger.  Writing Link Write a paragraph that explains how to prepare your favorite food. Use at least two compound sentences. 56 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 6 Sentence Fragments A sentence must have both a subject and a predicate to express a complete thought. A group of words that lacks a subject, a predicate, or both is a sentence fragment. A fragment does not express a complete thought and should be avoided in writing. Grammar Almost stopped them. (lacks a subject) The three explorers. (lacks a predicate) Almost to the top. (lacks a subject and a predicate)  Exercise 1 Draw one line under the complete subject and two lines under the complete predicate of each complete sentence. If a sentence is not complete, write F (fragment) in the blank. F Of brave explorers. 1. History tells tales of brave explorers. F 2. Christopher Columbus. F 3. Sailed in three ships. 4. Christopher Columbus and his men sailed in three ships. 5. Their long voyage brought them to the New World. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill F 6. The explorer Amerigo Vespucci. 7. America was named for the Italian explorer Amerigo Vespucci. 8. Sir Edmund Hillary was the first to climb Mt. Everest. F 9. A very high mountain. 10. Everest is a high mountain in Nepal. 11. Hillary and his group almost died in the cold. F 12. Hard to breathe. 13. It is hard to breathe on extremely high mountains. 14. Oxygen is very thin that high up. 15. Peary reached the North Pole first. 16. His dogs pulled him on a sled. Unit 1, Subjects, Predicates, and Sentences 57 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ F 17. Arrived there before him. 18. Captain Cook, might have arrived there before him. 19. Other explorers found the Northwest Passage. F 20. Atlantic and Pacific oceans. 21. This watery passage joins the Atlantic and Pacific oceans. F 22. Many of today’s explorers. Grammar 23. Many of today’s explorers look to the skies. 24. Others explore the deep oceans. 25. You can also explore without leaving your room. 26. You can explore with your mind. 27. Some scientific discoveries are based on theories. 28. Johannes Kepler discovered the cause of tides. 29. Few people believed him. 30. Isaac Newton made many important scientific discoveries. F 31. Without these people. 32. These people made a difference in our world. 33. Modern astronauts depend on their discoveries. F 35. Much different from today’s. 36. Tomorrow’s world will be much different. 37. Space travel may be common. F 38. The world tomorrow.  Writing Link Write two complete sentences about a process you would like to learn more about. 58 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 34. Today’s scientists are still exploring new ideas. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 7 Run-On Sentences A run-on sentence is two or more sentences incorrectly written as one sentence. Correct a run-on sentence by writing separate sentences or by combining the sentences with a semicolon (;) or with a comma and and, or, or but. RUN-ON SENTENCE Bill won the race, the crowd cheered. Grammar CORRECTED SENTENCE Bill won the race. The crowd cheered. Bill won the race; the crowd cheered. Bill won the race, and the crowd cheered.  Exercise 1 Write R next to each run-on sentence. R R You took a chance you lost the game. 1. Architects design buildings, their buildings can take years to complete. 2. Lionel took the subway and then transferred to a bus. 3. The colors in his painting are quite striking. 4. I ordered a small sweatshirt, but I received a large one. R 5. Preheat the oven, bake for one hour. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 6. The tower cleared the runway, but the plane still could not take off. R 7. Yori took an aspirin, there was only one left. R 8. The bill comes to almost twenty dollars, are you going to pay it? 9. Of all the birds at the pet store, we liked the parrots best. 10. Subtract ten from twelve for the answer. 11. Here is your present, but don’t open it until your birthday. R 12. Clean your room first and then we can go to the movie. R 13. Daryl’s first test was too easy, his second test was much more difficult. 14. Go to the first street; then turn left. 15. The first store had the best selection, but the second store had the album I wanted. Unit 1, Subjects, Predicates, and Sentences 59 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ R 16. Look at all the people at the parade I wonder where we can sit. 17. Susie is planning a surprise party; Karen doesn’t suspect a thing. R 18. The night sky was clear many stars could be seen. R 19. George and Hernando are walking to the park, I am riding my bicycle. 20. Saturday’s softball game will have to be postponed if it rains. R 21. Tonight we are going to see a skating competition I hope it is like the Grammar Olympics. 22. Cynthia wrote a letter to Cousin Jane, and Dad mailed it for her. 23. Mike is reading The Adventures of Tom Sawyer, but Jamie is reading The Prince and the Pauper. R 24. The actors are sewing their own costumes it is quite a challenge. 25. Scott’s jacket is colorful; it is also very warm. R 26. The new bridge has several special features one of them is a carving of a ship. 27. We can eat first, or we can start the tour. 28. Buy the seeds this week, and plant them next week.  Exercise 2 Underline each run-on sentence in the paragraph. If you’re looking for something to do with your free time, you might think about starting cards, some people collect the autographs of famous people, did you know there are even some people who collect colorful shopping bags from different stores? If you have a special interest in sports or music, you might decide to collect baseball caps or photos of musicians. If you like nature, you could collect seashells, fossils, or wooden carvings of ducks. Collecting is fun, collecting can be profitable. The items you collect can double or even triple in value over the years, stamps and coins are good examples of this. Most people enjoy collecting because they like looking for new items to add to their collection. Finding a rare shell or discovering a one-of-a-kind baseball card in your grandmother’s attic is a real thrill for most collectors. 60 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill a collection. There are millions of collectors in the world. Some people collect baseball Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 1 Review  Exercise 1 Write dec. in the blank before each declarative sentence, int. before each interrogative sentence, exc. before each exclamatory sentence, and imp. before each imperative sentence. exc. What a great skateboard this is! 1. Should I bring an umbrella? dec. 2. It’s been raining for three days. imp. 3. Come with me to the store. int. 4. Are your shoes too tight? exc. 5. My library card is ruined! Grammar int.  Exercise 2 Write S before each simple sentence, C before each compound sentence, and F before each sentence fragment. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill S The oldest zoo in the United States is in Philadelphia. S 1. Washington and Jefferson liked to fish. C 2. I want to get a cat, but my sister wants a dog. F 3. In the doghouse behind the garage. C 4. The horses are in the barn; the cows are in the field. S 5. Bring it here, please.  Exercise 3 Draw one line under each simple subject. Draw two lines under each simple predicate. Separate the complete subject and complete predicate with a vertical line (|). Many children|love animals. 1. Big dogs need lots of space. 2. Kendall made a valentine for his stepmother and gave it to her. 3. The postcard from Eliza is on the table. 4. The dog and cat chased the squirrel up the tree. 5. The red book belongs to Eliza and Ted. Unit 1, Subjects, Predicates, and Sentences 61 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Cumulative Review: Unit 1  Exercise 1 Write dec. if the sentence is declarative, int. if it is interrogative, exc. if it is exclamatory, or imp. if it is imperative. Is Bobby home? dec. 1. The lightbulb is burned out. int. 2. Will you help me shovel the driveway? exc. 3. Wow, that was a fantastic movie! imp. 4. Please give Miss Kitty some milk. dec. 5. Your red shirt is in the dryer. exc. 6. What a cold day it is! int. 7. Did you wear your boots today? dec. 8. The cat is chasing the dog. imp. 9. Don’t drop these eggs. int. 10. Is it my turn now?  Exercise 2 Draw one line under each simple subject. Draw two lines under each simple predicate. Separate the complete subject from the complete predicate with a vertical line (|). The pirates|sailed down the coast. 1. Alma and Phil swam laps together. 2. My mom found the money. 3. My friend’s dog and my neighbor’s cat growl at each other. 4. The third pig’s house was made of brick. 5. The straw basket was full of apples and nuts. 6. The small boy led the way to the castle and opened the door. 7. The tired soldiers charged up the hill. 8. The pizza and drinks were eight dollars. 9. Cara and Tim closed their eyes during the scary movie. 10. Cora’s aunt knitted her a sweater and a hat. 62 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar int. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 2: Nouns Lesson 8 Nouns: Proper and Common A noun is a word that names a person, place, thing, or idea. There are two basic kinds of nouns: common nouns and proper nouns. A common noun names any person, place, thing, or idea. Grammar A proper noun names a particular person, place, thing, or idea. It may consist of one or more words. Always begin a proper noun with a capital letter. If a proper noun has more than one word, capitalize the first word and all the important words. People: Places: Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Things: COMMON NOUN student police officer school park poem painting PROPER NOUN Jan Lopez Captain Michael Millay Dewey Middle School Central Park “Jabberwocky” Mona Lisa  Exercise 1 Write com. above each common noun and prop. above each proper noun. com. com. com. My stepfather bought me blue slacks and a red jacket. prop. prop. com. 1. Uncle Lloyd, Aunt June, and I went to a movie. prop. com. com. 2. The Cubs won the first game of the season. prop. com. com. prop. 3. Felicia scored ten points in the game against Davis School. prop. prop. prop. 4. The Americans fought the British in the Battle of New Orleans. prop. com. com. 5. Brenda is a new student in our class. prop. com. com. prop. 6. Jaime got a good grade on his paper about Albert Einstein. com. com. prop. 7. We left our bags at the station in Pittsburgh. prop. com. 8. In Philadelphia we visited many historical places. com. prop. prop. 9. Does this book on Egypt belong to Maria? com. prop. com. 10. May we have a picnic at Lincoln Park this weekend? Unit 2, Nouns 63 com. com. com. 11. I could see the fear in the eyes of the little dog. com. com. com. 12. My mother is a supervisor at the factory. com. com. prop. 13. The water in the pool at Shelby Park is nice and warm. com. prop. 14. Many boats sail on the Charles River. prop. com. 15. Superman is my hero. com. prop. 16. The pink and green skateboard belongs to Akimi. com. com. com. com. 17. The rain and snow kept the children inside for the day. prop. prop. 18. Have you read Alice in Wonderland by Lewis Carroll? prop. com. 19. Jack says this book is the funniest he has ever read. prop. com. com. 20. Gordo, my puppy, ate all the meat. com. com. com. com. 21. Put your guitar on the chair and your coat in the closet. prop. com. prop. 22. Broadway is a famous street in New York City. prop. prop. com. 23. We’re going to Texas and Louisiana to visit my cousins. prop. com. prop. 24. Uncle Antoine keeps his boat on Lake Pontchartrain. prop. com. 25. Ask Mr. Capozza if he knows where my mitt is. com. prop. 26. Last winter we skated on Walden Pond. prop. com. prop. prop. 27. Jo is a character in Little Women by Louisa May Alcott. com. prop. prop. 28. My father was born in Dublin, Ireland. com. com. com. 29. Put more sauce on this plate of spaghetti. com. com. prop. 30. The car got all dirty on the long drive from Omaha. com. com. com. 31. The apples for the pie came from our own trees. prop. com. prop. 32. Nance left the house before Louisa did. com. com. prop. 33. That building across the street is the Empire State Building. prop. prop. 34. I’ve seen the Atlantic, but I haven’t seen the Pacific. com. com. prop. 35. There are many schools and colleges in and around Boston. com. prop. 36. This bus will take you to Park Street. 64 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 9 Nouns: Singular and Plural A singular noun names one person, place, thing, or idea. A plural noun names more than one. Most plural nouns are formed by adding -s or -es to the singular form of the noun. To write the plural forms of some nouns, however, you need to know special rules. NOUNS ENDING WITH s, z, -zz, ch, sh, x TO FORM PLURAL Add -es. EXAMPLE church, churches o preceded by a vowel Add -s. patio, patios o preceded by a consonant Usually add -es. Sometimes add -s. echo, echoes piano, pianos y preceded by a vowel Add -s. monkey, monkeys y preceded by a consonant Usually change y to i and add -es. fly, flies f or fe Usually change f to v and add -es. Sometimes add -s. knife, knives Grammar Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill FORMING PLURAL NOUNS earmuff, earmuffs  Exercise 1 Write S above each singular noun. Write P above each plural noun. P P P My parents want us children to do the dishes. P S S 1. The paintings were in the old wing of the museum. P P 2. The donkeys ran through the fields. P S P 3. All the books in the library have special numbers. S S 4. Did you see the cat run down the alley? S S 5. The game Josh is playing is the hardest. S P 6. That sailor has several medals. P P 7. The calves stood calmly beside their mothers. P P 8. Scientists work on many serious problems. S P 9. This store sells supplies for school. P P 10. Do you have any autographs of famous singers? P S S 11. The cliffs of Dover in England are white. Unit 2, Nouns 65 S S 12. I wonder if the astronaut was afraid as he floated in space. S S 13. We shouted into the cave and heard an echo. P 14. There are not enough forks to go around. S S S 15. Jupiter is the largest planet in the solar system. S S P 16. The baby has outgrown his coat and mittens. P S 17. I have to go to two birthday parties this weekend. P S P S 18. Lions live on the plain, and tigers live in the jungle. S P 19. The car has four flat tires. S P P 20. Jamie has read several books of historical fiction.  Exercise 2 Complete each sentence by writing the correct form of the noun in parentheses. Use a dictionary if necessary. heroes Mom says that all the soldiers are [ 1. The little boy was carrying three [ 2. The squirrel is sitting on the [ 3. The torn screen allowed [ 4. Is it very sunny on the [ bunches roof ladies flies to come in. (fly) patio ? (patio) pianos 8. The yodeler’s cry rang through the [ 9. Yvonne has lived in several large [ valley cities 10. I just finished raking up that huge pile of [ 11. The campers dug [ trenches 12. I never saw so many [ photos 13. Did you boil enough [ potatoes bus . (piano) were ahead of us in line. (lady) 7. The submarine was sunk by the enemy’s [ 14. The [ of flowers. (bunch) of the house. (roof) 5. Ami and Cyndi played a duet on two [ 6. Three [ . (hero) torpedo . (torpedo) . (valley) . (city) leaves . (leaf) to keep water out of their tents. (trench) of one cat. (photo) for the salad? (potato) going downtown is usually crowded. (bus) 15. Maddie found three [ pennies 66 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 on the sidewalk. (penny) Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 10 Nouns: Collective Words that name a group of people or things, such as crowd and team, are called collective nouns. A collective noun can take either a singular or a plural verb. Make the verb singular when the group acts as a unit. Make it plural when each member of the group acts separately. The crowd was excited by the close game. The crowd were pushing each other to get through the gate. S The class is putting on a musical this year. P 1. The audience were shifting restlessly in their seats. S 2. All of a sudden the crowd rose to its feet. S 3. The construction crew works at night. S 4. The herd of cattle is grazing peacefully on the hillside. S 5. The jury is glad to take a break. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill S 6. Carla’s family is going to visit relatives in Mexico. P 7. The jury are carefully discussing the evidence. S 8. A scientific team is searching for a cure. S 9. The public is unhappy with the politicians. P 10. The group of students were talking and laughing. P 11. My family disagree with each other about the movie. S 12. The club I belong to does fund-raising for charity. P 13. The baseball team take their positions on the field. S 14. The committee has finally reached a decision. Unit 2, Nouns 67 Grammar  Exercise 1 Underline each collective noun. Above it write S if it is singular and P if it is plural. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ S 15. The swarm of bees was following the queen bee. P 16. My class are taking turns watering the plants. S 17. The band is playing at the dance. S 18. The class is about equally divided between girls and boys. S 20. The orchestra plays in the park on Sundays.  Exercise 2 Draw a line under the verb in parentheses that best completes the sentence. The committee (is, are) unanimous in its decision. 1. My family (is, are) spending the weekend at Grandma’s house. 2. The class (has, have) different ideas on how to decorate the gym. 3. The big crowd (was, were) surprisingly quiet. 4. Jessica’s family (is, are) taking vacations in different places. 5. The Spanish club (is, are) raising money for a trip to Mexico. 6. The group (has, have) followers from all over the world. 7. The team (is, are) running in all directions. 8. The audience (was, were) reading or chatting before the show started. 9. A flock of geese (is, are) flying overhead. 10. The public (is, are) very happy with the new mayor. 11. The office staff (is, are) having a picnic on Saturday. 12. Our team (is, are) ahead by one point. 13. The band of cowhands (is, are) herding the horses across the river. 14. The orchestra (was, were) all playing the wrong notes. 15. The staff (is, are) all members of different health clubs. 16. Only the best team (is, are) going to the playoffs. 17. Do you know if the senate (is, are) meeting today? 18. The crowd (is, are) on its feet. 68 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar S 19. The flock of pigeons flew to the top of the building. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 11 Nouns: Possessives A noun that shows ownership of things or qualities is a possessive noun. The lion’s mane is shaggy. All of the clowns’ costumes are bright and colorful. The children’s tickets to the circus are in my pocket. FORMING POSSESSIVE NOUNS Singular nouns ending in -s Plural nouns ending in -s TO FORM POSSESSIVE Add an apostrophe and -s (’s). Add an apostrophe and -s (’s). Add an apostrophe (’). Plural nouns not ending in -s Add an apostrophe and -s (’s). EXAMPLES The seal’s ball is red. Chris’s ticket got lost. The tigers’ trainer is brave. The people’s faces are happy. Grammar NOUNS Most singular nouns Remember that possessive nouns always contain apostrophes. Plural nouns do not. The acrobats have capes. Where are the acrobats’ capes?  Exercise 1 Underline each possessive noun. Above it write S if it is singular and P if it is plural. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill P The clowns’ red noses look like cherries. S 1. Do you think the human cannonball’s trick is dangerous? S 2. The ringmaster’s voice has to be very loud. P 3. The lions’ roars don’t seem to scare the trainer. P 4. Someone must carefully check the trapeze artists’ ropes. S 5. Please don’t eat all of your sister’s popcorn. S 6. The trainer is putting his head in the lion’s mouth! P 7. I dare you to count the zebras’ stripes. S 8. The rider stood on the horse’s back. Unit 2, Nouns 69 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ S 9. The audience’s applause rang through the arena. S 10. The trainer’s belief is that lions can be trained but not tamed. P 11. The big cats’ tempers can be very fierce. P 12. The baby elephants grabbed their mothers’ tails. S P 14. The woman’s costume is the same color as her poodles’ fur. P 15. The acrobats’ legs must be very strong.  Exercise 2 Complete each sentence by writing the possessive form of the word in parentheses. The worker braided the [ 1. The [ Ringling Brothers’ 2. The human [ 3. The [ 5. The [ clowns’ 6. The [ explosion’s antics delight everyone. (clowns) children’s noise is frightful. (explosion) 11. The circus [ acts dangerous? (performers) smiles lit up the arena. (children) animals’ 10. Look! That [ 12. The [ bravery is amazing. (trainer) performers’ 9. The circus [ coats are sleek and shiny. (animals) dog’s toenails are painted red. (dog) band’s tiger’s conductor raised her baton. (band) fangs are long and sharp. (tiger) 13. This is supposed to be the [ 14. The toddler pulled the [ 15. The [ act is next. (cannonball) fuse is about to be lit. (cannon) trainer’s 7. Are most [ mane. (horse) circus was one of the most famous. (Ringling Brothers) cannonball’s cannon’s 4. The lion [ 8. The [ horse’s performers’ world’s monkey’s biggest circus. (world) tail. (monkey) capes are made of silk. (performers) 70 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar S 13. The circus’s winter home is in Florida. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 2 Review  Exercise 1 Write prop. above each proper noun, com. above each common noun, and col. above each collective noun. 1. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Grammar 2. prop. prop. com. Jamie and Pat live in the same neighborhood. com. prop. Have you seen my copy of Jem’s Island? prop. prop. col. Sharon and Akira belong to the club. com. com. prop. The balloons sailed through the sky above Walker Stadium. col. com. Watch out for that swarm of bees. com. prop. The clothing at Frederico’s Department Store is very expensive. com. prop. com. All the middle schools in Newton have large libraries. col. com. Our family is trying to spend more time together. prop. com. The red Ford belongs to my sister. col. com. com. The crowd of runners is almost at the line. col. com. Do you think the audience liked the play? Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill  Exercise 2 Write S above each singular noun and P above each plural noun. Draw a line under each singular or plural noun that is also a possessive noun. S S That is Steve’s black truck. P S 1. Your shirts are in this drawer. S P S 2. Alma’s shoes are under the bed. P S 3. Look at the books in this library! S P 4. This town has two newspapers. S S P 5. Is this the librarian’s list of books? S P P 6. The team needs new bats and gloves. Unit 2, Nouns 71 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Cumulative Review: Units 1–2  Exercise 1 Write dec. beside each declarative sentence, int. beside each interrogative sentence, exc. beside each exclamatory sentence, and imp. beside each imperative sentence. That was a spectacular hit! imp. 1. Bring us our check, please. int. 2. Are you nervous about giving your speech? dec. 3. The live butterfly exhibit at the park is worth seeing. dec. 4. Fifteen skiers are competing in the downhill race. exc. 5. Help! I think I’m going to fall! int. 6. Will you give me a hand with my science project? imp. 7. Take the Main Street bus to Mulberry. dec. 8. I wanted the blue hat, but the green one will have to do. int. 9. May I borrow your tape player for the party? exc. 10. Congratulations, you take first place!  Exercise 2 Write S beside each simple sentence, C beside each compound sentence, and F beside each sentence fragment. F The road through the orchards and valleys. C 1. Mom will bake a cake, and Bill will frost it. S 2. The teacher and the principal are laughing. C 3. You can take a nap, or you can read a book. F 4. All that work. C 5. Fish have scales, and birds have feathers. C 6. Maizie will turn on the light, and you can unlock the door. S 7. The dog and the cat are sleeping on the porch. C 8. Alicia wrote the paper, and Jaime drew the pictures. S 9. I’m glad you are here. F 10. Mountains and mountains of ice cream. 72 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar exc. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 3 Write prop. above each proper noun and com. above each common noun. Draw a line under each possessive noun. prop. com. prop. prop. Neil plays soccer with David and Justin. prop. prop. prop. 1. Allen and Margaret live on Kenmore Street. com. com. 2. The butterflies’ wings are orange. com. com. com. 3. The hospital is on the other side of town. Grammar prop. com. 4. Mom wants to use the telephone. com. com. 5. I’ll meet you at the doctor’s office. prop. com. com. 6. Officer D’Amico is giving a talk on safety today. com. com. 7. It was too noisy to hear the singers’ voices. com. com. com. 8. The driver’s jacket is on the chair. com. com. 9. Can you see the cars’ headlights? prop. com. com. com. 10. Kerry’s aunt sent her a box of chocolates.  Exercise 4 Complete each sentence by writing the plural form of the noun in parentheses. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill The 72girls took medicine for their allergies. (girl) 1. I like everything in my salad except [ 2. Oil [ paints tomatoes dry more slowly than other paints. (paint) 3. Please get a book from the library about the [ 4. The music department has three grand [ 5. Their tool [ benches donkeys 7. She applied for a few [ jojobs classes pianos of people in early Rome. (life) . (piano) into the Grand Canyon. (donkey) last week. (job) are on your schedule? (class) 9. Part of her salary will go toward state [ 10. There aren’t enough [ lives were covered with wood shavings. (bench) 6. Jason and his sister rode [ 8. How many [ . (tomato) dictionaries taxes . (tax) to go around. (dictionary) Unit 2, Nouns 73 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 5 Draw a line under the verb in parentheses that best completes the sentence. A school of fish (swims, swim) past the shark. 1. The class (begins, begin) their book reports tomorrow. 2. The committee (argues, argue) among themselves. 3. Raphael’s family (lives, live) next to the school on Mound Street. 4. The audience (applauds, applaud) when the performance is over. 6. The jazz band (plays, play) in the park on Sundays. 7. The senate (reads, read) each bill out loud. 8. The stage crew (moves, move) the scenery off the stage. 9. The crowd (cheers, cheer) the team. 10. A gaggle of geese (visits, visit) our pond every winter.  Exercise 6 Complete each sentence by writing the possessive form of the word in parentheses. The [ cars’ engines were fast enough to win the race. (cars) 1. The crowd cheered the [ referee’s call. (referee) 2. He groaned when he realized he had backed into his [ 3. I found my dad’s tie in the [ men’s 4. Zachary delivers papers to all the [ 5. My [ sister’s 6. Mystery [ 7. Which [ 8. Mr. [ Jones’s 9. The [ cowhands’ car. (boss) department. (men) neighbors’ homes. (neighbors) team is in fourth place this year. (sister) writers’ child’s boss’s books usually keep the reader in suspense. (writers) toy is best for this age group? (child) watch has an alarm that wakes him for work. (Jones) horses were trained to herd cattle. (cowhands) 10. Who is the president of the [ women’s 74 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 club this year? (women) Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 5. Our team (has, have) different ideas on how to win the volleyball tournament. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 3: Verbs Lesson 12 Action Verbs and Direct Objects An action verb is a word that describes what someone or something does. An action verb names an action, although not always a physical action. Some action verbs describe mental action. Grammar Tyler swam faster than anyone else at camp. (The action verb swam describes a physical action.) Alicia calculated the score in her head. (The verb calculated describes a mental action.) Sometimes an action verb is followed by a direct object. A direct object receives the action of the verb. It answers the question what or whom? after an action verb. Kelsey’s soccer team won yesterday’s game. (The action verb, won, is followed by the direct object, game, which answers the question what?)  Exercise 1 Draw two lines under the action verb in each sentence. Yellowstone National Park attracts many visitors. 1. Yellowstone covers more than two million acres of land. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 2. Its boundaries reach into three states. 3. The park features thousands of hot springs. 4. Some hot springs shoot columns of water and steam into the air. 5. We call them geysers. 6. Yellowstone’s geysers attract visitors from all over the world. 7. Nearly two hundred geysers dot the park’s landscape. 8. Old Faithful, the largest, erupts almost hourly. 9. It shoots water more than one hundred feet into the air. 10. Enormous crowds gather beside it. 11. Yellowstone National Park contains many other attractions. 12. The Yellowstone River divides the park north to south. Unit 3, Verbs 75 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 13. It carves a canyon through the mountains. 14. In several places, the river falls from steep cliffs. 15. Visitors to Yellowstone observe a variety of wildlife. 16. Many species of wildflowers grow in the Rocky Mountains. 17. Moose roam the area. 18. Herds of bison graze in the park. 20. Yellowstone’s famous bears sometimes frighten campers.  Exercise 2 Draw two lines under the action verb in each sentence. If the action verb has a direct object, circle the direct object. The Grand Canyon attracts millions of visitors each year. 1. Millions more catch glimpses of the canyon though airplane windows. 2. Grand Canyon National Park contains the most spectacular sections of the gorge. 3. The park encompasses more than one million acres. 4. At visitor centers, people study maps of the park. 5. They learn interesting facts about the area’s geology. 6. An enormous sea once covered this part of North America. 7. The Colorado River carved the canyon over many years. 8. Many visitors hike the park’s trails. 9. Trails lead hikers down from the canyon’s rim and back up. 10. Some people ride mules instead of hiking. 11. Visitors notice fossils in the canyon walls. 12. Sandstone, limestone, and shale form multicolored layers. 13. Weather constantly changes the rock formations. 14. Wind and rain erode the soft rock. 15. Sometimes big chunks of rock fall. 16. Changing light constantly alters the canyon’s appearance. 76 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 19. Both grizzlies and black bears live in the park. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 13 Action Verbs and Indirect Objects An indirect object can appear only in a sentence that has a direct object. Just as a direct object answers the question whom? or what? after an action verb, an indirect object answers the question to whom? or for whom? An indirect object always comes before the direct object. James bought Corey a cold drink. (The indirect object Corey answers the question, James bought a cold drink for whom?) Grammar Naomi gives the class red pencils. (The indirect object class answers the question Naomi gives red pencils to whom?)  Exercise 1 Write DO in the blank if the italicized word is a direct object or IO if it is an indirect object. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill IO The doctor gave Maya a vision test. IO 1. My cousin Rita brought us fresh-picked vegetables. DO 2. Loud music gives my mother headaches. DO 3. Janelle baked her family double-chocolate brownies. IO 4. Louie’s sister made the team a pitcher of lemonade. IO 5. Ezra read us the newspaper from Mexico City. DO 6. Colleen showed her father her new gymnastics routine. IO 7. Camille loaned us her tent. DO 8. He offered my mother a ride to her office. IO 9. My sister gave the dog a dish of water. DO 10. The president gave me his autograph. IO 11. Carmen sewed her new niece a crib quilt. IO 12. My father prepared us a feast. IO 13. The middle school sent the shelter more than five hundred cans of food. DO 14. Oma gave Carl three dollars. DO 15. Mr. Alvarez told me the new teacher’s name. Unit 3, Verbs 77 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ IO 16. Carlos showed me his baseball card collection. DO 17. Peter played us three new songs. IO 18. Kristi made everyone a handcrafted gift. DO 19. My Uncle Randall gave me his old computer. DO 20. I will give Tyler some gum. The Wildcats baked their coach a birthday cake. 1. The tour guide gives each visitor a map. 2. My sister lent me her new magazine. 3. Oleg’s father bought him a leather jacket. 4. Ms. Kumin read the class the last chapter. 5. My grandmother mailed me seventeen postcards. 6. We cooked Carol dinner. 7. Clayton built his sisters a playhouse. 8. The class gave Officer Wallace its full attention. 9. Someone sent Kim a dozen roses. 10. The hotel offered its guests free breakfast. 11. I ordered my mother a silver necklace. 12. Julia told the children a funny story. 13. My mother ordered Uncle Rob a cup of coffee. 14. Chris paid his brother five dollars. 15. Louisa sings the baby a song. 16. I bought my friend some basketball cards. 17. She read Raul the directions. 18. Aaron left Gabriel a doughnut. 19. Charlie made his family lasagna. 20. Amy gave her sister three old books. 78 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar  Exercise 2 Circle each direct object. Underline each indirect object. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 14 Transitive and Intransitive Verbs An action verb that is followed by a direct object is called a transitive verb. An action verb that is not followed by a direct object is called an intransitive verb. Some verbs can be either transitive or intransitive, depending on the words that follow them. Remember that a direct object answers the question what? or whom? The polar bears eat slowly. Grammar The word slowly tells how the bears eat. It does not answer the question what? or whom? In this sentence, the action verb eat is intransitive because it is not followed by a direct object. The polar bears eat fish. The word fish answers the question what? In this sentence, the action verb eat is transitive because it is followed by the direct object fish.  Exercise 1 Draw two lines under the action verb in each sentence. Write T in the blank if the verb is transitive. Write I if the verb is intransitive. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill T Mitchell repaired the computer. I 1. The baby cried loudly. I 2. Marta finished early. T 3. We climbed three flights of stairs. I 4. Carly sings better than I do. T 5. My brother pedaled his bike down the sidewalk. I 6. The peanut butter cookies burned. T 7. My aunt called me yesterday. I 8. The pet store opened late. I 9. Peter’s goldfish eats in the morning. T 10. Jen sank the ball through the hoop. T 11. After school, Zach ate two apples. T 12. The alarm woke Ethan at seven. I 13. The bathtub overflowed. Unit 3, Verbs 79 I 14. Aisha practiced every day. T 15. The city closed our street during the construction. I 16. My neighbor’s dog barked all night. T 17. Tamara washed her mother’s car on Saturday. T 18. William found the doctor’s phone number. I 19. The upstairs phone rang. T 20. Ingrid packed her sister’s lunch. I 21. Heavy snow fell during the night. T 22. Ruby starts piano lessons tomorrow. T 23. We watched a video in class. I 24. Our elaborate plans failed. T 25. Jamie’s father grows prize-winning pumpkins. I 26. My grandfather snores loudly. I 27. Maureen and Sarah skated for two hours. T 28. I dropped my key. T 29. Gordon borrowed nine books from the library. T 30. The track team broke three records. I 31. Kaitlin scored in the second inning. T 32. Gilberto asked the librarian. I 33. She painted more carefully than ever. T 34. A kitten followed me home. I 35. The hall door slammed. I 36. The doctor’s office closes at five. T 37. A wave knocked Cameron off his feet. I 38. Andy and Jorge’s boat sailed swiftly across the pond. T 39. The band played only jazz. I 40. The class decorated for the fall festival. 80 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 15 Linking Verbs and Predicate Words A linking verb connects a sentence’s subject with a noun or an adjective in the predicate. The predicate word tells what a sentence’s subject is or is like. An avocado is a fruit. (The linking verb is connects the subject avocado with fruit.) Grammar In the sentence above, fruit is a predicate noun. It tells what the subject, avocado, is. Some sentences have a predicate adjective, an adjective that follows a linking verb and tells what the subject is like. This avocado is ripe. (Ripe is a predicate adjective. It tells what the subject avocado is like.) COMMON LINKING VERBS appear am, is, are, was, were become feel grow look seem taste  Exercise 1 Draw two lines under the verb in each sentence. Write AV in the blank if the verb is an action verb. Write LV if it is a linking verb. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill LV Dogs are popular pets. AV 1. Many dogs use their tails for communication. AV 2. A dog’s tail expresses playfulness or fear. LV 3. Some dogs’ tails are long and thin. AV 4. Other dogs have fluffy or curly tails. LV 5. Dogs are very good smellers. LV 6. Their noses are extremely sensitive. LV 7. Certain dogs actually become detectives. AV 8. They search with their noses. LV 9. A dog’s hearing is also very strong. AV 10. Dogs hear many things. AV 11. Dogs’ ears move in different directions. LV 12. Dogs seem sensitive to sounds. Unit 3, Verbs 81 AV 13. Most dogs have forty-two teeth. AV 14. Different types of teeth serve different purposes. LV 15. Some dogs are web-footed. AV 16. Webbed feet make dogs good swimmers. LV 17. Canine eyesight is different from human eyesight. LV 18. Small details look fuzzy to dogs. LV 19. Most colors appear gray to them. AV 20. In the dark, dogs see better than humans.  Exercise 2 Draw two lines under the linking verb in each sentence. Write PA in the blank if the verb is followed by a predicate adjective. Write PN if it is followed by a predicate noun. PN Snakes are very interesting animals. PA 1. Not all of them are poisonous. PN 2. Earth is home to more than two thousand species of snakes. PA 3. About a dozen snake species are rare. PN 4. One endangered snake is the indigo. PA 5. Indigos seem very friendly. PA 6. They are native to Florida and Georgia. PA 7. Some snakes grow extremely long. PA 8. A few become longer than thirty feet. PN 9. The South American anaconda is a large snake. PA 10. Some anacondas are thick. PN 11. Thread snakes are the smallest snakes. PA 12. Some of them appear tiny. PA 13. A snake’s scaly skin looks slippery. PA 14. Its skin is only temporary. PA 15. Some snakes are poisonous. PN 16. All snakes are carnivores. 82 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 16 Verb Tenses: Present, Past, and Future A verb’s tense tells when an action takes place. The present tense describes an action that happens regularly. We visit my grandmother on Sundays. It can also express a general truth. We visit many relatives. Grammar The past tense describes an action that has already taken place. The past tense is most often formed by adding -ed to the verb. We visited my aunt last weekend. The future tense describes an action that will take place in the future. The future tense is formed by adding the helping verb will (or shall) to the verb. We will visit my grandmother next Sunday.  Exercise 1 Draw two lines under the verb in each sentence. Write the tense in the blank: past, present, or future. present past Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill present future present past Jimmy loves to fish. 1. We traveled to Ontario last summer. 2. My father makes the best whole wheat rolls. 3. I will be there by six o’clock. 4. Mr. Glazer’s class recycles the most paper. 5. India shared her ideas for after-school activities. future 6. The karate class will begin promptly at three. future 7. My brother will paint the mural. past present future past future 8. No one unlocked the storage room. 9. We always plant pumpkins behind the garage. 10. The club will sell cookbooks. 11. George returned his library books on time. 12. Each student will contribute one poem to the book. Unit 3, Verbs 83 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Grammar present 13. The band practiced for weeks. 14. Amy watches her younger brother on weekends. past 15. We discussed the Brazilian rain forest. past 16. Carol walked ten blocks in the rain. present 17. André lives next door to Mr. Batten. future 18. Sharla’s mother will pick her up after practice. future 19. Indira will call for a taxi. present 20. Stephen waits for a ride. past present future 21. I locked my bike to the fence. 22. Louis helps me with my algebra. 23. The newspaper will list the score from last night’s game. past 24. Three girls studied together for the geography test. past 25. We hiked to the top of the ridge. future present future present future present past future present future past present 26. Clarence will audition for the spring play. 27. I usually wear jeans on Saturday. 28. We will order pizza for everyone in the group. 29. Ms. Tapp teaches social studies and history. 30. Our new yard will be smaller than our old one. 31. Barry listens to classical music. 32. Pat skated around the sink. 33. I will keep the key in my backpack. 34. Ezra washes the dishes on Wednesday. 35. They will hold the first meeting in the library. 36. I watched The Yearling last year. 37. The museum closes early on Sunday. past 38. Rami called each person on the list. future 39. Perry will use his sister’s computer. past 40. Together we cleaned the whole apartment in two hours. 84 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill past Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 17 Main Verbs: Principal Parts Verbs have four principal parts: the base form, the present participle, the past form, and the past participle. These principal parts are often combined with helping verbs to form verb phrases. The main verb is always the last verb in a verb phrase. Grammar Base Form: I learn at least one new song every week. Present Participle: I am learning how to play guitar. (The main verb, learning, is the last verb in the verb phrase.) Past Form: I learned two songs last week. Past Participle: I have learned fourteen songs so far. (The main verb, learned, is the last verb in the verb phrase.)  Exercise 1 Draw one line under the entire verb phrase. Draw two lines under the main verb. Her uncle was bringing the soft drinks. 1. Darnel is selling me his skateboard. 2. Kelsa has donated her old soccer ball. 3. Travis is playing a tape for the class. 4. I have written my grandmother several poems. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 5. The jeweler is repairing Allyson’s necklace. 6. People have walked in the flower bed. 7. Carin was learning the history of ballet. 8. NASA is postponing the shuttle mission. 9. Throughout history, people have valued gold. 10. Troy has flown in a 747. 11. We were hoping for a first-place trophy. 12. Craig’s grandmother is coming to the game tonight. 13. The dictionary is sitting on the windowsill. 14. Ms. Chang had opened the door for the children. 15. The bus driver was waiting for Kerwin. Unit 3, Verbs 85 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ pres. Mira’s family is camping this summer. past 1. They have planned their trip carefully. past 2. Mira’s mother has selected the destination. past 3. She has decided on an isolated island. pres. 4. Now everyone is preparing for the trip. past 5. Mira’s brother has formed a list of supplies. pres. 6. He is borrowing as many items as he can. pres. 7. Mira is reading books and magazines about wilderness camping. past 8. She had hoped for a different sort of vacation. pres. 9. She was dreaming of a swimming pool and a new bathing suit. past 10. She had imagined air-conditioned restaurants and hotel rooms. pres. 11. Now she is learning about fishing bait and camp stoves. past 12. Mira had wanted to send postcards to her friends. past 13. Her mother has reminded her that there is no post office. pres. 14. Mira is trying hard to be positive. past 15. She has decided to make the best of this trip.  Writing Link Write a short paragraph about a trip you have taken. Use at least one present participle and one past participle. Circle the main verbs. 86 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar  Exercise 2 Draw two lines under the main verb. Write past in the blank if it is a past participle. Write pres. if it is a present participle. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 18 Helping Verbs A helping verb is a verb that helps the main verb express an action or make a statement. Forms of the helping verb be are used with the present participle. PLURAL We are memorizing our lines. You are memorizing your lines. They are memorizing their lines. We were memorizing our lines. You were memorizing your lines. They were memorizing their lines. Grammar SINGULAR I am memorizing my lines. You are memorizing your lines. She is memorizing her lines. I was memorizing my lines. You were memorizing your lines. He was memorizing his lines. Forms of the helping verb have are used with the past participle of a main verb. SINGULAR I have visited Florida. You have visited Florida. He has visited Florida. I had visited Florida. You had visited Florida. She had visited Florida. PLURAL We have visited Florida. You have visited Florida. They have visited Florida. We had visited Florida. You had visited Florida. They had visited Florida.  Exercise 1 Underline the helping verb in each sentence. Lenore and her father are watching the basketball game. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 1. Carol has helped her brother with his homework. 2. The three friends were pedaling uphill slowly. 3. Steven had started a new project. 4. Lee is steering the orange canoe. 5. Both girls are riding red bicycles. 6. Lisa had removed her helmet. 7. Andrew was sliding into home plate. 8. No one had practiced. 9. She is hoping to set a new record. 10. Carlos was wearing a blue jacket. Unit 3, Verbs 87 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 11. Loren had tried to call three times. 12. He has waited all week for this moment. 13. Tova’s father is watching from the car. 14. The three of them were meeting for pizza. 15. Nadim has trained the puppy to sit. 16. Each player had hit the tennis ball twice. 18. Tom had cleaned all the windows before lunch. 19. We have seen this movie twice. 20. Anna has kept her opinion a secret.  Exercise 2 Draw one line under the helping verb and two lines under the main verb in each sentence. My great-aunt Marta is learning about herbs. 1. She has loved cooking for many years. 2. She has used herbs in her recipes. 3. She has grown parsley and chives on windowsills. 4. Now she is starting an herb garden. 5. Her garden is expanding slowly. 6. Every spring, she has added two or three plants. 7. Marta’s neighbor, Irene, was teaching her what to plant where. 8. Irene has shared many plants from her own garden. 9. Now Marta has planted a dozen or so different herbs. 10. Mint has appeared near the water faucet. 11. Garlic is growing by the fence. 12. Marta had arranged her garden by color. 13. Violet flowers are blooming right now. 14. Bees are hovering over the chives. 15. Lavender is filling the air with a sweet scent. 88 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 17. My mother is helping us with the new song. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 19 Verb Forms: Present Progressive and Past Progressive Verbs in the progressive form describe action that continues. The present progressive form of a verb describes an action that is continuing at the present time. The present progressive form consists of a helping verb (am, are, or is) plus the present participle of the main verb. PLURAL We are laughing. You are laughing. They are laughing. Grammar SINGULAR I am laughing. You are laughing. She, he, or it is laughing. The past progressive form of a verb describes an action that was continuing at an earlier time. The past progressive form consists of a helping verb (was or were) plus the present participle of the main verb. SINGULAR I was laughing. You were laughing. She, he, or it was laughing. PLURAL We were laughing. You were laughing. They were laughing. Notice that verbs in the progressive form always end in -ing. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill  Exercise 1 Fill in the blank with the progressive form of the verb in parentheses. Change present tense verbs to the present progressive form and past tense verbs to the past progressive form. is studying Mr. Ling’s class [ 1. The students [ 2. Now they [ 3. Jacob [ 5. Tamara [ 6. She [ were watching are looking is listening 4. Mr. Ling [ ] everyone to give a report. (requires) ] to talk about horses. (plans) ] a stable to do research. (visits) 7. The entire class [ 9. Ved [ ] to a recording of whale sounds. (listens) is planning is visiting ] a video about opossums. (watched) ] up facts about other animals. (look) is requiring 8. The librarian [ ] mammals. (studies) was working is helping is showing ] at the library today. (worked) ] Charlie find information. (helps) ] Molly where the books about mammals are. (shows) Unit 3, Verbs 89 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 10. Molly [ was hoping 11. Jacob’s parents [ 12. They [ are studying are coming 13. Mr. Ling [ ] to read about Labrador retrievers. (hoped) ] to talk to the class on Thursday. (come) was planning 14. Thursday night, he [ was changing was having 16. Mr. Ling [ is postponing 17. The class [ is adopting 18. Molly’s cousin Derek [ 19. Derek [ is moving 20. Everyone [ is helping ] to bring his rabbit on Friday. (planned) ] his plans, however. (changed) ] babies. (had) ] the visit until next week. (postpones) ] a guinea pig named Greta. (adopts) was donating ] it. (donated) ] to England next month. (moves) ] to prepare Greta’s new home. (helps)  Exercise 2 Draw two lines under the verb phrase. Write pres. prog. in the blank if the verb is in the present progressive form. Write past prog. if the verb is in the past progressive form. pres. prog. Peter’s swimming skills are improving. pres. prog. 1. Raul is listening to the game on the radio. past prog. 2. My mother was driving home in the storm. past prog. 3. The boys were waiting forty-five minutes. pres. prog. 4. I am reading a book about Houdini. past prog. 5. Tim was watching a cardinal. past prog. 6. The dishwasher was leaking all over the kitchen floor. pres. prog. 7. The Ecology Club is meeting on Tuesday. pres. prog. 8. She is eating dinner with us. past prog. 9. My bike tire was losing air. pres. prog. 10. You are looking at an aerial view. past prog. 11. The newspaper was blowing away. past prog. 12. The teachers were planning a field trip. 90 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 15. The rabbit [ ] veterinary medicine. (study) Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 20 Perfect Tenses: Present and Past The present perfect tense of a verb is used to describe an action that happened at an indefinite time in the past. It is also used to describe something that happened in the past and is still going on. The present perfect tense is formed by combining the helping verb have or has with the past participle of the main verb. Ms. Taylor has recycled glass jars for years. Grammar The past perfect tense of a verb describes an action that happened before another action or event in the past. The past perfect tense is formed by combining the helping verb had with the past participle of the main verb. Until she started collecting cans, Marella had recycled only newspapers.  Exercise 1 Complete each sentence by changing the verb in parentheses to the tense indicated. Darrell’s family [ 1. They [ stayed traveled ] to Washington, D.C., last summer. (past/travel) ] with his aunt in nearby Virginia. (past/stay) 2. Darrell and his father [ had visited ] some attractions on previous trips. (past perfect/visit) 3. His stepsister Emily [ had wanted ] to see the Air and Space Museum. (past Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill perfect/want) 4. Darrell [ has visited 5. Space travel [ 6. He [ agreed ] the Air and Space Museum twice. (present perfect/visit) fascinates ] Darrell’s father. (present/fascinate) ] to visit the museum with Emily. (past/agree) 7. Darrell and his stepmother [ had decided ] earlier to visit monuments. (past perfect/decide) 8. They [ had planned 9. Both of them [ ] to see the Washington Monument first. (past perfect/plan) have wanted ] to ride the elevator to the top. (present perfect/want) 10. Before they even reached the monument, rain [ had started ] to fall. (past perfect/start) Unit 3, Verbs 91 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 11. The rain [ lasted ] for only a few minutes, however. (past/last) 12. The sun reappeared before the two [ had purchased ] their tickets. (past perfect/purchase) 13. They [ had believed ] they would be able to see a great distance from the top, but the fog was too dense. (past perfect/believe) 14. By the time they [ had walked ] down all 898 steps, both of them needed a rest. 15. When Darrell is sightseeing, he always [ carries ] a bottle of drinking water in his backpack. (present/carry) had packed 16. That day, his stepmother [ 17. They [ looked ] a drink too. (past perfect/pack) ] for a shady spot. (past/look) 18. After their rest, Darrell’s stepmother [ had wanted ] to visit the Vietnam Veterans Memorial. (past perfect/want) 19. He [ looked 20. Darrell [ 21. They [ ] at his watch. (past/look) prefers had planned 22. Darrell [ believed 23. That morning, he [ 24. They [ ] walking if there is enough time. (present/prefer) ] to meet the others for lunch. (past perfect/plan) ] they had plenty of time. (past/believe) had asked had determined ] his father for directions. (past perfect/ask) ] that the Vietnam Veterans Memorial was not far from the Washington Monument. (past perfect/determine) 25. Darrell [ has studied ] the Vietnam War in school. (present perfect/study) 26. Families of veterans [ wanted ] a monument to honor Americans lost in the war. (past/want) 27. Darrell [ has read ] a book about the sculptor who designed the memorial. (present perfect/read) 28. Maya Lin [ had entered ] her design in a national competition. (past perfect/enter) 92 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar (past perfect/walk) Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 21 Irregular Verbs I Verbs that do not form their past and past participle by adding the ending -ed are called irregular verbs. With some irregular verbs, one vowel changes in the past form and past participle. PAST FORM began drank sang swam PAST PARTICIPLE begun drunk sung swum Grammar BASE FORM begin drink sing swim With other irregular verbs, the past form and the past participle are the same. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill BASE FORM bring buy catch feel lay leave make sit sleep teach think PAST FORM brought bought caught felt laid left made sat slept taught thought PAST PARTICIPLE brought bought caught felt laid left made sat slept taught thought  Exercise 1 Write in the blank the past form of the verb in parentheses. After school, Lisa [ 1. Jack [ 2. Martin [ 3. She [ slept won taught left in the green tent. (sleep) the essay contest. (win) me how to do a cartwheel. (teach) 4. Each cast member [ 5. We [ swam 6. The telephone [ 7. Thomas [ sold her books in the library. (leave) made a costume. (make) the length of the pool twice. (swim) rang while I was in the shower. (ring) his old skateboard. (sell) 8. After ten minutes, we [ caught up. (catch) Unit 3, Verbs 93 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 9. Paul [ lost 10. Carla [ felt 11. José [ his watch somewhere at school. (lose) ready for the math test. (feel) paid for two tickets. (pay) lent me two dollars. (lend) 13. She [ kept 14. Carl [ brought the yellow poster board. (bring) 15. Tara [ bought one book for each child. (buy) her rock collection on the top shelf. (keep) 16. The demonstration [ began at precisely two o’clock. (begin)  Exercise 2 Write in the blank the past participle of the verb in parentheses. Enzo’s team has [ won 1. My mother has [ 2. I have [ swum shrunk 3. Carmela has [ taught thought 6. Andrew has [ 7. She had [ 10. Zoe has [ me a new song. (teach) rung at all today. (ring) it would be sunny on Saturday. (think) lost felt three umbrellas this year. (lose) it was the best choice. (feel) 8. Kim’s father has [ 9. Gina had [ across the lake several times. (swim) my favorite sweater. (shrink) 4. This phone hasn’t [ 5. I had [ three games. (win) caught laid made a bigger trout. (catch) her clean clothes in the suitcase. (lay) sure that someone will be home. (make) 11. She believed the dog had [ slept 12. A new baseball season has [ 13. Nathan has [ sat 16. Jan has [ brought begun . (begin) in the back seat all day. (sit) 14. Courtney’s grandmother had [ 15. The screen door has [ all day. (sleep) swung kept all of her artwork. (keep) open three times today. (swing) us some delicious oatmeal raisin cookies. (bring) 94 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 12. My mother [ Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 22 Irregular Verbs II With some irregular verbs, the past form ends in -ew, and the past participle ends in -wn. PAST FORM blew drew flew grew knew PAST PARTICIPLE blown drawn flown grown known Grammar BASE FORM blow draw fly grow know With other irregular verbs, the base form, past form, and past participle are all the same. BASE FORM cut let PAST FORM cut let PAST PARTICIPLE cut let With others, the past form and the past participle do not follow any pattern. BASE FORM be do go wear PAST FORM was, were did went wore PAST PARTICIPLE been done gone worn Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill  Exercise 1 Write in the blank the past form of the irregular verb in parentheses. Ms. Chandra’s class [ 1. Aunt Karin [ 2. The wind [ 3. She [ my hair last night. (cut) blew down four trees. (blow) her hair in a braid. (wear) 4. My mother [ 6. Tom [ tore 8. My brother [ 9. I [ let cut me spend the night at Sandra’s house. (let) knew 7. Damon [ tomatoes. (grow) cut wore 5. Miriam [ grew all the answers. (know) up lettuce for the salad. (tear) was the first to eat all the berries he picked. (be) grew five inches last year. (grow) out only recent photos. (cut) Unit 3, Verbs 95 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 10. She [ let me borrow her necklace. (let) 11. All three of us [ went 12. Kareem’s mother [ 13. His baby sister [ 14. Melinda [ 15. I [ knew 20. He [ did my green dress to the wedding. (wear) blew up a balloon for the experiment. (blow) swimming on Saturday. (go) the same problem twice. (do) wore cut a page out of the book. (tear) the name of the main character. (know) went 19. Mikki [ to Los Angeles on business. (fly) a wool sweater over her blouse. (wear) his finger making lunch. (cut)  Exercise 2 Underline the word in parentheses that best completes each sentence. Charlie has (drew, drawn) a line down the middle of the driveway. 1. We have (blew, blown) out the candles. 2. I wish I had (did, done) that last year. 3. We (knew, known) most of the answers. 4. She has (drew, drawn) a name out of the hat. 5. David (wore, worn) his favorite sweatshirt twice this week. 6. Jim has (wore, worn) his new boots before. 7. Kelly has (tore, torn) open all her presents. 8. Katie had (drew, drawn) two other pictures. 9. She (did, done) a spectacular job. 10. Our class has (went, gone) to the art museum before. 11. She has (knew, known) my parents for a long time. 12. He had (threw, thrown) the boomerang across the park. 13. My father had (went, gone) grocery shopping on Thursday. 14. This plant has (grew, grown) an inch since yesterday. 96 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 18. He [ tore wore 16. Ms. Pritchard [ 17. Keith [ flew to the same doctor. (go) Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 23 Irregular Verbs III With some irregular verbs, the base form and the past participle are the same. BASE FORM become come run PAST FORM became came ran PAST PARTICIPLE become come run Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill BASE FORM bite break choose drive eat fall give ride rise see speak steal take write PAST FORM bit broke chose drove ate fell gave rode rose saw spoke stole took wrote Grammar With other irregular verbs, the past participle ends in -en. PAST PARTICIPLE bitten or bit broken chosen driven eaten fallen given ridden risen seen spoken stolen taken written  Exercise 1 Write in the blank the past participle of the irregular verb in parentheses. With the snow melting, mud has [ 1. Wayne had [ spoken 2. We had [ run 3. Ted had [ come a problem. (become) loud enough for everyone to hear. (speak) around the track twice. (run) 4. My uncle has [ home on the late bus. (come) become 5. My mother had [ 6. Keisha has [ become a vegetarian. (become) driven seen most of the way. (drive) a deer in her yard. (see) 7. The temperature has [ risen 8. At camp, Diana had [ ridden this afternoon. (rise) a horse for the first time. (ride) Unit 3, Verbs 97 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 9. Someone has [ broken the popcorn popper. (break) 10. Michelle has [ spoken to Mr. Dietz about the science fair. (speak) 11. We have [ eaten 12. Tom has [ chosen all the potato salad. (eat) the music for the program. (choose) 13. Most of the leaves have [ fallen 14. Hannah has [ a letter to her great-grandmother. (write) written 16. We had [ given bit or bitten him twice. (bite) the server our order half an hour before the food arrived. (give)  Exercise 2 Complete each sentence by changing the verb in parentheses to the form indicated. Smoke [ rose 1. The kitten [ from the chimney. (past/rise) grew faster than I expected. (past/grow) 2. Three inches of rain have [ 3. The whistle [ 4. We have [ 5. Maria [ blew 6. She has [ our classes for next semester. (past participle/choose) more work than anyone else. (past/do) done 7. The geese [ that every week. (past participle/do) flew away. (past/fly) 8. The Lightfoots have [ 9. I [ came 12. Phil [ grown chosen saw dinner. (past participle/eat) pumpkins to sell. (past participle/grow) a class president. (past participle/choose) a moon rock at the museum. (past/see) 13. The president [ 14. We have [ eaten ten minutes early. (past/come) 10. Abraham has [ 11. We have [ . (past participle/fall) at noon and six o’clock. (past/blow) chosen did fallen threw driven 15. In art class, we [ out the first ball. (past/throw) through two states today. (past participle/drive) drew 16. Perry and Daniel have [ pictures of dragons. (past/draw) become 98 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 excellent athletes. (past participle/become) Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 15. Marc’s new puppy has [ off my poinsettia. (fall) Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 24 More Practice with Verb Forms  Exercise 1 Write AV in the blank if the verb is an action verb or LV if it is a linking verb. Above each italicized word write DO for direct object, IO for indirect object, PN for predicate noun, or PA for predicate adjective. AV 1. AV 2. LV 3. LV 4. AV 5. AV 6. AV 7. LV 8. AV 9. LV 10. AV 11. AV 12. LV 13. AV 14. AV 15. AV 16. LV 17. AV 18. AV 19. LV 20. PN Balto was a sled dog in Alaska. IO He brought miners food and tools. DO In February 1925, he saved the town of Nome. PN Nome was a remote frontier town. PA Some people in Nome became very sick. DO They caught a disease called diphtheria. DO Nome had only one doctor. DO The doctor needed special medicine. PA The medicine was scarce. IO A hospital 800 miles away sent the doctor some medicine by train. PA The train soon became stuck in deep snow. DO Dog sleds carried the medicine the rest of the way. DO Balto led one of those teams. PA The February weather was brutal. DO A blizzard blew snow in the sled dogs’ eyes. DO Deep snowdrifts blocked the trail. DO The dogs crossed frozen rivers. PA PA They grew very tired and weak. DO Balto led his team for twenty continuous hours. DO The sick people received the medicine. PN Balto was a hero. Unit 3, Verbs Grammar Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill LV 99 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 2 Complete each sentence by changing the verb in parentheses to the form indicated. Newspapers everywhere [ paid tribute to Balto with parades. (past/pay) caught 2. Balto had [ participle/catch) the attention of people around the world. (past 3. A statue of Balto still [ (present/stand) Grammar stories about Balto. (past/print ) stands in New York City’s Central Park. 4. By 1927, however, many people had [ participle/forget) 5. A greedy man had [ 6. Balto had [ put grown very thin and frail. (past participle/grow) sold went 15. Balto [ collected gave much of the money to save Balto. (past him another parade. (past/give) drew 13. Then the people [ 14. They had [ alarmed. (past/become) to Cleveland, Ohio. (past/go) 11. The people there [ 12. The parade [ became Balto to them for two thousand dollars. (past/sell) 9. Schoolchildren had [ participle/collect) 10. Balto [ fifteen thousand people. (past/draw) took found lived Balto to a zoo. (past/take) him a safe place to live. (past participle/find ) out his days at the zoo. (past/live) 16. Thousands of people [ saw 17. The people [ good care of him. (past/take) 18. Balto [ grew 19. Today Balto [ 20. Balto’s story has [ about Balto. (past Balto in a traveling show. (past participle/put) 7. Some concerned people [ 8. The man [ forgotten took him there. (past/see) to be eleven years old. (past/grow) stands taught in a museum. (present/stand ) many people about bravery. (past participle/teach) 100 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 1. People [ printed Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 3 Review  Exercise 1 Draw two lines under each action verb. Circle each direct object. Write each indirect object in the blank. If there is no indirect object, write none. student us 1. Mareka read us an article about pesticides. 2. My mother marked the appointment on her calendar. Tory 3. Mr. Kalish paid Tory three dollars for washing his car. sister 4. Pat showed her sister the old silver necklace. father 5. Cora painted her father a picture of his dog. none 6. The students wrote a weekly newsletter. 7. My grandfather brought me an autographed baseball. friends 8. Carlos sent his friends two postcards each. family 9. Elizabeth baked her family a special dessert. none 10. We measure the plants every morning. none 11. Tannie’s family visited two museums on Saturday. friend 12. I made my friend a bracelet with turquoise beads. Mrs. Domingo 13. We bring Mrs. Domingo library books every week. stranger van grandmother Grammar none me Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mr. Rosenblum gave each student a poetry notebook. 14. I gave the stranger a suspicious look. 15. My brother gave the van a coat of wax. 16. Clyde brought his grandmother some daffodils. none 17. We always eat pizza on Saturday night. puppy 18. I threw the puppy a tennis ball. Unit 3, Verbs 101 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Cumulative Review: Units 1–3  Exercise 1 Draw one line under each simple subject and two lines under each simple predicate. Aunt Margie is cooking chicken parmigiana for dinner. 1. The cottage lies just beyond the river. 3. A new adventure movie opens at the local theater tonight. 4. Carlos and Tyler are learning the game of rugby. 5. The Fishers will vacation in Arizona this year. 6. Myra located Tanzania on a world map. 7. Some lemonade would taste wonderful right now. 8. Greta and her parents saw a production of Sunday in the Park with George. 9. Mark received a telescope for his birthday. 10. The wind blew Simone’s kite into a tree. 11. Manuella wanted a view of the Caribbean Sea. 12. The farmer sold his best milk cow to a friend. 13. One coat in the store window was purple. 14. Cheryl is making a guest list for the party. 15. Everyone held his or her breath during the aerialist’s daring jump. 16. The telephone company prints new directories every year. 17. Airplanes from Cleveland land three times each day. 18. These library shelves hold many books. 19. A pagoda is a type of tower with many levels. 20. Lenny is fishing for trout and bass. 21. Lydia plays silly songs on the piano. 22. Colorful leaves fall from every tree on the street. 102 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 2. My necklace is made of gold and silver. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 2 Write prop. above each proper noun (except possessives), col. above each collective noun, and poss. above each possessive noun. 1. 2. 3. 4. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. Grammar 5. poss. prop. Abbey’s jacket came from China. prop. poss. The Goldenrod Restaurant is featuring Sally’s pot roast. col. prop. Our team voted to give Coach Howard a plaque. prop. poss. Mrs. Clark sent Tina’s homework to her so that she wouldn’t fall behind. col. The famous singer thrilled the crowd with her soulful singing. poss. col. Gillian’s favorite game is chess, but our class prefers checkers. poss. prop. Damian’s father has been appointed ambassador to Haiti. prop. prop. The Lincoln Memorial is located in Washington, D.C. col. prop. My church group took a tour of Jerusalem last spring. prop. col. Judge Lucas waited for the jury to reach a verdict. prop. prop. Turn left at Taylor Avenue and look for Monroe Middle School on the right. col. The choir performed three selections at the festival. poss. Dr. Callahan’s first patient was early, so I did not have to wait long. col. My entire family enjoys the game of croquet. prop. prop. prop. Lorna and Meg have tickets to Cats. poss. The airplane’s seats were unusually comfortable. col. The student body elected to have a holiday party. poss. We knew we were in trouble when the car’s engine sputtered and stopped. prop. prop. The capital of California is Sacramento. poss. prop. Ivan’s grandparents, who are from Russia, are coming for a visit. col. The finance committee submitted its report to the president.  Exercise 3 Write the tense of each italicized verb in the blank: pres. (present), past, pres. prog. (present progressive), past prog. (past progressive), pres. perf. (present perfect), or past perf. (past perfect). past past The story involved an opera singer and her ambition to become a star. 1. My little sister climbed a tree and scraped her arm. Unit 3, Verbs 103 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ past perf. 2. The teachers had hoped for perfect attendance. pres. prog. 3. Two women are loading the moving van. pres. 4. Dylan wants to name the kittens after planets. pres. prog. 5. Her uncle is going to drive us home from the game. pres. perf. 6. The preschoolers have gone on a field trip to the fire station. past prog. 7. Because the temperature was dropping, the rain was freezing on the pres. prog. 8. Jim’s father is attending classes at the university. past perf. 9. Our pets had waited long enough to be fed. past prog. 10. Aunt Joan was painting her kitchen peach. past 11. Roberto made a birdfeeder for his mother’s yard. past perf. 12. The movie had begun five minutes late. pres. perf. 13. Both girls have sung solos in previous concerts. pres. prog. 14. Kylee is drinking an entire bottle of juice. pres. 15. Not everyone who enters the contest wins a prize. pres. perf. 16. Josh has paid for his uniform already. past perf. 17. The phone had rung four times before I could get to it. past 18. Marta’s directions led us to a dead-end street. pres. prog. 19. Aaron is making plans for the weekend. pres. 20. We keep the seedlings warm with lights. past 21. Kelly caught three fly balls in the first inning. past prog. 22. Mary was sleeping when the storm began. 104 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar sidewalks. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 4: Pronouns Lesson 25 Personal Pronouns Grammar A pronoun takes the place of a noun, a group of words acting as a noun, or another pronoun. A personal pronoun refers to a person or thing. A personal pronoun that is the subject of a sentence is a subject pronoun. Subject pronouns are I, you, he, she, it, we, you, and they. A personal pronoun that is the direct or indirect object of a verb is an object pronoun. Object pronouns are me, you, him, her, it, us, you, and them. He has a paper route. (The subject pronoun he is the subject of the sentence.) Paula asked him for help. (The object pronoun him is the object of the verb asked.)  Exercise 1 Circle each personal pronoun. I walk one mile to school every day. 1. Helen gave him a schedule of the club’s meetings. 2. After swimming for hours, he was very tired. 3. Have you seen them lately? Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 4. Gary is not sure if he wants to go to the museum with us. 5. We taught them the new computer game. 6. I will happily call you tomorrow morning. 7. They waited excitedly for the parade to reach them. 8. When the power went out, we lit candles and played charades. 9. He watched the sun as it sank in a blaze of orange and red. 10. We nervously watched the big, brown dog approach us. 11. She enjoyed reading The Secret Garden. 12. I watched a show about the great grizzly bear. 13. The trained dog calmly guided him to the bus stop. Unit 4, Pronouns 105 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 14. The eagle soared higher and higher until it disappeared behind a cloud.  Exercise 2 Replace each italicized word or group of words with a personal pronoun. Write the pronoun above the words. Write subj. in the blank if the pronoun is a subject and obj. if it is an object. us obj. Mrs. Yoshida drove Kay, Don, and me to the movie. She subj. 1. Consuela fishes almost every weekend. her obj. 2. Dad asked Mindy to the game. it obj. 3. Give the eraser to Meagan so she can erase the chalkboard. They subj. 4. Hiroshi and Ray had been playing chess for hours. It subj. 5. The sun always rises in the east. it obj. 6. Did you taste the kiwifruit? him obj. 7. Kenji told Jack a funny joke. She subj. 8. Cheryl proudly opened a bank account with money earned from baby-sitting. them obj. 9. Mom took Tom and Mitch with her. We subj. 10. Sumi and I sang the duet in perfect harmony. she subj. 11. With great care, Pam chose a gift for her best friend. He subj. 12. The little boy pushed the shopping cart for his grandmother. They subj. 13. The powerful horses thundered across the prairie. us obj. 14. Mrs. Cuevas quietly told Janie and me the sad news. them obj. 15. Have you seen Terry and Rachel?  Writing Link Write a few sentences about a make-believe awards program you would give for your friends or family. Use at least four pronouns besides the pronoun I. 106 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 15. After eating the cake, I told Mom that I really enjoyed it. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 26 Using Pronouns Correctly Use a subject pronoun as the subject of a sentence. Use an object pronoun as the object of a verb. Be sure to use a subject pronoun in a compound subject and an object pronoun in a compound object. Jamal and I fly model planes. (compound subject) Debra met Jamal and me in the park. (compound object) The last one in line was he. Grammar In formal writing and speaking, always use a subject pronoun after a linking verb. Yes, this is she.  Exercise 1 Underline the pronoun in parentheses that best completes each sentence. The baby-sitter and (I, me) watched the squirrels play in the yard. 1. Mom called (we, us) in for supper. 2. (He, Him) and Derek will get to school early. 3. Byron lent (I, me) this video. 4. Are (they, them) ever going to arrive? 5. Who is (he, him)? 6. Aunt Cara brought (she, her) for a visit. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 7. Roger and (I, me) rode our new bikes. 8. (We, Us) were late for our appointment. 9. Please tell (I, me) the answer? 10. Uncle Clyde told my sisters and (I, me) a story. 11. We took out the eggs and boiled (they, them) in water. 12. My mom drove Eloise and (she, her) to the concert. 13. The rain really soaked (he, him). 14. No one asked (I, me) about it. 15. (They, Them) mow lawns during summer vacation. 16. Todd bought (they, them) sodas. Unit 4, Pronouns 107 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 17. Evelyn and (she, her) never run out of things to talk about. 18. Julie, Jennifer, and (I, me) made toys for the kindergarten class. 19. Scott and Carl helped (we, us). 20. (They, them) took Emily to the zoo last Saturday.  Exercise 2 Write C in the blank if the pronoun in italics is correct. If it is incorrect, write the correct pronoun in the blank. Susan and him love that new album by the Trees. C 1. Karen and she took the bus. I 2. Bill and me saw the movie. C 3. Ahmed called Carol and me. he 4. Mom and him are in the room. she 5. The best artist is her. I 6. Marla and me saw the Renoir painting. C 7. Sally wrote Ted and me letters from camp. I 8. Wendy and me read about Chief Joseph. me him 9. Mom gave Akira and I a job for the afternoon. 10. Sharks interest Patti and he. C 11. The tallest student is he. I 12. Jim and me think that natural resources are important. C 13. Darla and we agreed about the picnic. we 14. Carl and us saw the ballet Swan Lake. them 15. The coach showed Nat and they a few tricks. us 16. Wayne invited we to the golf tournament. C 17. Charlotte and I sang a duet at the festival. me 18. Barbara bought Vicki and I souvenirs. him 19. Linda gave he a pumpkin from her garden. he 20. She and him fish in the pond behind their house. 108 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar he Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 27 Pronouns and Antecedents The word or group of words that a pronoun refers to is its antecedent. The pronoun must agree with its antecedent in number and gender. The girl in the blue dress is my sister. She is my sister. (Girl is the antecedent of the pronoun she). The students wear gym clothes on Friday. They have gym for one hour. (Students is the antecedent of the pronoun they.) The word Renaissance is a French word. [ It means rebirth. 1. The Middle Ages came before the Renaissance. [ They lasted from about A.D. 500 to A.D. 1500. 2. The Renaissance took place in Europe. [ It lasted from the fourteenth century to the sixteenth century. 3. Achievements in art and literature shaped the Renaissance. [ They made it a special time in history. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 4. Modern science also began during the Renaissance. [ It traces its beginnings to this time period. 5. The Renaissance started in Europe. [ It began with the study of the ancient history of Italy. 6. Many great thinkers shaped the Renaissance. [ They held different opinions about many different things. 7. Petrarch headed the study of Italy’s history. [ 8. Gifted artists lived during this time. [ They He was an Italian. were Raphael, Titian, Michelangelo, and Leonardo da Vinci. 9. People called “patrons” supported these artists. They gave [ them money and other things to pay for their work. Unit 4, Pronouns 109 Grammar  Exercise 1 Fill in the blank with the correct pronoun. Then circle the antecedent of the pronoun. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 10. The Sistine Chapel is in Rome. Michelangelo painted [ it . 11. Michelangelo painted the ceiling of the Sistine Chapel. He began painting [ it in 1508. 12. Pope Julius II gave Michelangelo the job of painting the chapel. Julius II supported [ him while he worked. 13. Music also flourished during the Renaissance. [ It developed a specific style. them .  Exercise 2 Write C in the blank if the italicized pronoun in the second sentence agrees with its antecedent in the first sentence. Circle the antecedent. If it does not agree with its antecedent, write the correct pronoun in the blank. C The Mona Lisa hangs in the Louvre in Paris. It is one of the best-known paintings in the world. C 1. Leonardo da Vinci painted the Mona Lisa. He is famous for achievements in both art and science. he 2. Born in 1452, da Vinci lived during a period of great artistic expression. Early in his career it was an art apprentice. It 3. Da Vinci met Michelangelo in Florence, Italy. He was a city where many artists lived. him 4. Da Vinci and Michelangelo worked together. Da Vinci taught her how to show movement in art. They 5. Da Vinci painted the Mona Lisa and The Last Supper. It are two of his most famous paintings. C 6. Da Vinci’s paintings hang in many museums. People come from faraway places to see them. C 7. Da Vinci created breathtaking paintings, and he also crafted great sculptures. They 8. Two notebooks written by da Vinci were found in 1965. Them revealed many of da Vinci’s plans and ideas. 110 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 14. Renaissance buildings were also unusual. Architects of today often imitate [ Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 28 Possessive Pronouns Possessive pronouns are another kind of personal pronoun. A possessive pronoun takes the place of a person or thing that owns or possesses something. It can come before the noun that is possessed or it can stand alone in a sentence. Dan’s father is a doctor. His father is a doctor. (His comes before the noun father.) USED BEFORE NOUNS Singular: my, your, her, his, its Plural: our, your, their Grammar The lunch bag on the table belongs to Donna. The lunch bag on the table is hers. (Hers stands alone.) USED ALONE mine, yours, hers, his, its ours, yours, theirs Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill  Exercise 1 Circle each possessive pronoun. Write in the blank SA for “stands alone” or BN for “before a noun.” SA The yellow skateboard is his. BN 1. Mia left her notebook on the bus. SA 2. Is this house key mine? SA 3. The colorful picture of the flowers is mine. BN 4. The proud parents brought home their new baby girl. BN 5. Will strummed his guitar and invited everyone to sing. SA 6. The red house on the corner is ours. BN 7. The computer quickly stores information in its huge memory. BN 8. These warm chocolate chip cookies melt in your mouth. BN 9. The cheetah lay in the tall grass, planning its attack. BN 10. Her hand shot up when the teacher asked for volunteers. SA 11. I didn’t get a cheeseburger, so I tasted hers. BN 12. Is your seat belt always fastened? SA 13. The fluffy, brown puppy is theirs. SA 14. Yours is the third seat in the first row. Unit 4, Pronouns 111 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ BN 15. My cousin from Nebraska is staying with us.  Exercise 2 Write the correct possessive pronoun above each italicized word or words. 1. 2. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. brothers and sisters. his 10. John dreams of flying high in the clouds in John’s own plane one day. hers 11. Chloe claimed that the purse was Chloe’s. theirs 12. The telescope is not mine. It is Billy’s, Tim’s, and Jane’s. our 13. My family looked everywhere for my family’s dog. his 14. The biggest fish caught that day was Juan’s. mine 15. This yellow parka looks similar to my parka.  Writing Link Write a few sentences describing your classroom and the things in it. Use as many possessive pronouns as possible. 112 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 3. Her Karen’s friend showed us her new game. its The hungry dog pushed the dog’s dish with its nose across the kitchen floor. its The bird flapped the bird’s long wings and flew away. her Dave gladly carried Shari’s backpack for her. her Tonya grabbed my notebook by mistake, and I took Tonya’s notebook. theirs The clever idea was Jim’s and Akira’s. His Greg’s sister is graceful and smart. mine Robert’s style of skating is different from my style of skating. Her My aunt’s smile is full of love and warmth. its The young chimpanzee spends many happy hours playing with the young chimpanzee’s Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 29 Indefinite Pronouns An indefinite pronoun refers to a person, place, or thing in a more general way than a personal pronoun does. If the indefinite pronoun is singular, it takes a singular verb. If it is plural, it takes a plural verb. Some indefinite pronouns—all, any, most, none, and some—may take either a singular or a plural verb, depending on the context of the sentence. Grammar Everybody knows the answer. Many know the answer. Some of the pie is gone. Some of the neighbors are gone. Singular Indefinite Pronouns: another, anybody, anyone, anything, each, either, everybody, everyone, everything, much, neither, nobody, no one, nothing, one, somebody, someone, something Plural Indefinite Pronouns: both, few, many, others, several  Exercise 1 Underline the word in parentheses that best completes each sentence. Everybody (has, have) a chance to win the contest. 1. Everyone (likes, like) the pizza in the cafeteria. 2. One of the answers (is, are) correct. 3. Everybody (crowds, crowd) around the stage. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 4. (Is, Are) anyone allowed to borrow books from the library? 5. No one (lives, live) in the middle of the desert. 6. All of the frightened sheep (tries, try) to run away from the snarling wolf. 7. Most of the neighbors (was, were) enjoying the cool summer breeze. 8. Either of the songs (seems, seem) perfect for the party. 9. Both of the girls (plays, play) soccer well. 10. Several of the club members (meets, meet) in the library each week. 11. Both of the movies (was, were) good. 12. Neither of the boys (is, are) able to ski. 13. Nothing (smells, smell) as good as Aunt Velda’s roast beef. 14. Much of the work (was, were) done by the time we joined the group. Unit 4, Pronouns 113 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 15. Each (has, have) its own water dish. 16. Few of the puppies (knows, know) how to fetch a ball. 17. (Is, Are) anything as good as a chocolate ice-cream cone on a hot day? 18. Everything (was, were) calm and quiet after the rainstorm. 19. No one (calls, call) after 11:00 P.M. 20. Anybody (is, are) welcome to write a poem for the contest. 22. The others (flies, fly) behind the lead goose. 23. (Has, Have) someone checked the answering machine for messages? 24. Each (chirps, chirp) happily when the mother returns to the nest. 25. Nobody (has, have) a better sense of humor than Jen. 26. Many (visits, visit) Mrs. Cruz in the hospital. 27. (Does, Do) any of the printers in the computer lab work? 28. (Is, Are) everyone allowed to go on the field trip tomorrow? 29. No one (lives, live) in the house next to ours. 30. All of us (tries, try) our best to get good grades. 31. Everyone (watches, watch) in awe as the space shuttle lifts off. 32. Many of the firefighters (is, are) willing to go into the burning building. 33. Much of the movie (remains, remain) to be watched. 34. Some of the stars (shines, shine) more brightly than others. 35. Several (has, have) tried to beat Amad at checkers, but few (has, have) succeeded. 36. Few (hits, hit) the ball over the ballpark fence. 37. Some of the popsicles (has, have) melted. 38. Most of the turkey (was, were) eaten. 39. Everybody in this choir (sings, sing) off-key. 40. Several of those teenagers (visits, visit) this nursing home. 114 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 21. Both (takes, take) dancing lessons. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 4 Review  Exercise 1 Fill in the blank with the pronoun that best completes each sentence. John F. Kennedy was the thirty-fifth president of the United States. [ the youngest president ever elected. 1. Anthropology is the study of humans and [ cultures. their 4. After Hannah and Roberto finished their homework, [ they belongs. 7. Carla waved to her mother in the crowd as [ teammates on the court. joined [ she of home. her 8. When my pencil broke, I asked the teacher if I could sharpen [ 9. When Kristen and I dug the garden, my mother gave [ 10. The test questions were not as difficult as [ Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 11. Sam was running late this morning, and [ they he us she it seeds to plant. missed his bus. it . has worn a helmet. 14. I finished my math homework quickly because my sister helped [ out the hard problems. 18. Ariel and [ I me figure could clean the garage ourselves. 16. Our school uniforms are much more comfortable than [ 17. Miss Darnell asked the students if [ . looked. 12. After searching for his wallet for an hour, Brian found [ we . hasn’t received them yet. me 15. Victor and I told mother that [ them went to the movie. 6. At the beach, I picked up a seashell that reminded [ 13. Ever since Kari had a bike accident, [ Grammar it 3. When the birds fluttered around the birdhouse, Jessie ran to feed [ she was beginnings, development, and 2. Mother told Ahmed to put away each toy in the place were [ 5. Valerie ordered three books, but [ He they they used to be. would mind helping Mr. Lenox. sometimes do our homework together. 19. As I was leaving, Mrs. Dillman gave [ me a big hug. 20. “Is this Marsha?” asked the voice on the phone. “Yes,” said Marsha, “this is [ she .” Unit 4, Pronouns 115 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Cumulative Review: Units 1–4 int. The schools closed because of the snowstorm. tr. 1. Renee bought a CD with her baby-sitting money. int. 2. My mother’s plane arrived late. tr. 3. Fish have gills instead of lungs. tr. 4. Crowds of people attended the concert. int. 5. My grandfather’s health improved slowly. int. 6. We sat on my porch for at least an hour. tr. 7. The Stevensons keep horses on their small farm. int. 8. Nigan and I walk to the practice field together. int. 9. The fireworks went off with a bang and a burst of color. tr. 10. Our neighbor rescued an injured bird. tr. 11. My sister and I play tennis with our dad. int. 12. Ariel writes to her pen pal every Saturday. tr. 13. The choir sang the song in perfect unison. tr. 14. Miguel corrected his mistakes before handing in his paper. int. 15. We jogged to school and back for our morning exercise.  Exercise 2 Write pers. for personal pronoun (subject or object), poss. for possessive, or ind. for indefinite above each pronoun. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. ind. Someone spilled juice on the table. pers. poss. Tell them about your favorite book. pers. poss. When the travelers arrived, they were weary from their journey. pers. poss. She will present her report to the class. poss. Is this flute yours? ind. No one thinks the quiz will be today. 116 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar  Exercise 1 Draw one line under each direct object and two lines under each verb. Write in the blank tr. if the verb is transitive or int. if it is intransitive. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Grammar poss. 6. The spelling bee participants carefully studied their long word lists. ind. 7. Somebody forgot to turn off the light. pers. 8. Although the girl is often sick, she is always cheerful. poss. 9. Allison said the idea for the project was hers. ind. 10. Is anyone responsible for taking attendance today? poss. 11. Rayna pulled her desk closer to Judy’s. ind. poss. 12. Few knew of her change in plans. poss. poss. 13. For their birthday, Sabra gave her twin daughters matching sweaters. pers. pers. ind. poss. poss. 14. We will tell you several of our objections to their program. ind. pers. pers. 15. Neither of us had heard of him before.  Exercise 3 Draw a line under the simple subject of the sentence. Draw two lines under the simple predicate. She called me at six o’clock this morning. 1. In three giant leaps, the cat crossed the busy highway. 2. I read that story, too! 3. Emily sang in the chorus. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 4. The bicycle chain rattled against the wheel. 5. The buses chugged noisily through the school parking lot. 6. Sally and he told us that silly joke again. 7. Henry painted a watercolor portrait of Camilla. 8. They laughed through the entire play. 9. This old movie makes my sister cry. 10. Have Ali and you written the postcards yet? 11. We laughed at the clowns. 12. The homework is still not done. 13. Will it never rain? 14. Kevin and the varsity team played really hard. Unit 4, Pronouns 117 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 4 Write the correct possessive pronouns above the words in italics. His Dad’s car is new. Her 1. Mary’s foul shot won the game. Its 2. The tree’s color is a beautiful red-gold. His 3. Ted’s book is missing. Our 4. Bill’s and my bikes both need new tires. Their 5. Monica and Alina’s project is finished. your 6. Renee, is this Renee’s notebook? her 7. This ring looks like Cathy’s ring. His 8. George Washington’s military skill and daring helped win America’s independence from Britain. our 9. Priscilla, where are your and my new jackets? yours 10. Trina, is this magazine Trina’s? Her 11. Queen Victoria’s long reign is known as the Victorian Age. theirs 12. Are these concert tickets Patti’s and Carla’s? ours 13. Those tennis rackets are Terri’s and mine! yours 14. Ricardo and Larry, I’m pretty sure these baseball cards are Ricardo’s and Larry’s. His 15. Baron Karl Friedrich Hieronymus von Münchhausen’s wild stories are unbelievable but very funny. their 16. Unfortunately, the books’ covers were torn during the move. Her 17. Tricia’s new home is in a lovely small town. its 18. The drama club’s members were excited about the spring play. theirs 19. This telescope is Pedro’s and Jeff’s. his 20. I love this spaghetti; may I eat my brother’s? 118 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 15. Can you find Lake Erie on the map? Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 5: Adjectives Lesson 30 Adjectives and Proper Adjectives A word that describes persons, places, or things is an adjective. An adjective usually answers one of three questions about the noun or pronoun it modifies. Please use the drawing paper. Wanda had three sisters. That seat is taken. Grammar What kind? How many? Which one? Usually the adjective comes just before the noun it modifies. However, when the noun is the subject followed by a linking verb, its adjective follows the linking verb as part of the predicate. These adjectives are called predicate adjectives. The puppy became frisky. A proper adjective is an adjective formed from a proper noun. Sometimes the proper adjective is the same word as the noun that forms it. At other times it has a special ending. All proper adjectives begin with a capital letter. the Wyoming foothills Chinese checkers  Exercise 1 Draw an arrow from each adjective in italics to the noun or pronoun it modifies. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill The first robots were built in the Middle Ages. 1. Some early robots can still be seen today. 2. In Venice, Italy, two human-sized robots dressed in medieval clothing strike the clock tower bell every hour. 3. In Germany, figures dance and play musical instruments under a church clock. 4. Although their movements are simple, they are entertaining. 5. These robots get their power from clock parts. 6. Today robots work on land, in outer space, or on the ocean floor. 7. Japanese scientists are creating a crablike robot to work underwater. Unit 5, Adjectives 119 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 8. This robot can take a great deal of underwater pressure. 9. The abilities of this robot are awesome. 10. Robots are important to space exploration. 11. American spacecraft landed robots on Mars in 1977. 12. These robots tested Martian soil and atmosphere. 14. The pictures showed rust-colored rocks and an orange sky. 15. The pictures were truly breathtaking.  Exercise 2 Underline each adjective. Robots with human shape are called “androids” or “humanoids.” 1. Many androids or humanoids are run by remote control. 2. True robots run on computer power. 3. Some robots perform household chores. 4. However, household robots are rare. 5. Household robots are also expensive. 6. Household robots could easily cost as much as new houses. 7. Future robots will answer doorbells, clear the dinner table, and keep the kitchen cupboard full. 8. Industrial robots are already quite common. 9. In automobile factories, robots paint cars. 10. On assembly lines, robots are run by computers. 11. Large companies often use these robots to deliver mail. 12. Industrial robots are usually strong. 13. They can use various tools. 14. In one Japanese factory, robots are building other robots. 15. One advantage of robots is that they never become tired. 120 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 13. The Soviet Union used robots in 1978 to take the first pictures of the surface of Venus. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 31 Articles and Demonstratives An article is a special kind of adjective. There are three articles, the words a, an, and the. The describes one specific item or items. The program was canceled because of the snowstorm. A and an refer to any one item of a group. Use a before words that begin with a consonant sound. Use an before words that begin with a vowel sound. Grammar A giraffe is an elegant animal. Demonstrative adjectives are used to point out something. The words this, that, these, and those are demonstrative adjectives. This and that are singular. These and those are plural. This and these refer to things that are close. That and those refer to things that are at a distance. Read this book. Take that train. He washed these apples. (close to the speaker) Those boys are on the other team. (at a distance from the speaker) Demonstratives often appear before the nouns they modify, but they can stand alone. When a demonstrative is used by itself, it is a demonstrative pronoun. Give this to your sister. I like those the best.  Exercise 1 Write in the blank the article that best completes each sentence. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Do you have [ 1. [ The a ticket for [ a 3. My dad keeps maps in [ The calculator. the car glove compartment. field hockey team has a match after school. 5. Sara hopes to get [ a bicycle for her birthday. 6. My father thinks ordering pizza is [ an 7. I read my little sister a story about [ a 8. [ An class play? moon is really bright tonight. 2. It is helpful to have [ 4. [ the excellent idea. unicorn. index of street names appears on most maps. 9. I will be attending [ a or the school on Maple Street. Unit 5, Adjectives 121 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 10. My mom wants to buy [ a sports car. 11. Please put your backpack on [ the kitchen table. 12. The Metropolitan Museum of Art is [ 13. [ The huge museum. closest parks are across town. 14. Jeff went shopping for [ 15. Many of my friends have [ a baseball mitt. an interest in astronomy.  Exercise 2 Draw a line under the demonstrative in parentheses that best completes each sentence. Write P in the blank if it is a pronoun or A if it is an adjective. P (That, These) is the biggest pumpkin I’ve ever seen! A 1. (This, Those) baby’s skin is as smooth as silk. A 2. Miriam told (those, that) same joke yesterday. A 3. (Those, That) elephants are sleeping in the shade of the tree. P 4. (This, These) takes two solid hours to complete. P 5. Is (those, this) your favorite song? A 6. (That, Those) icicles look like long, jagged teeth. P 7. (This, Those) is the worst I have seen! A 8. (This, These) ants are busy at work. P 9. (That, These) are the best days of our lives. A 10. I have climbed (those, that) tree a hundred times. A 11. The pilot calmly steered us through (that, these) big cloud. P 12. (This, Those) makes a high, piercing noise. A 13. Her eyes shining, the little girl pointed to (those, that) piece of candy. P 14. May I buy five of (that, those), please? A 15. (Those, That) students want to transfer to our school. P 16. (Those, That) sounds like an interesting movie. P 17. (This, These) is what we bought for Dad. P 18. Liam, take (this, these) and put it over there. 122 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar a Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 32 Adjectives That Compare Some kinds of adjectives compare two or more nouns or pronouns. The comparative form of an adjective compares two things or people. It is usually formed by adding -er to an adjective that has only one syllable. If an adjective has more than one syllable, the comparative is usually formed by adding the word more before the adjective. Grammar Pedro is older than his brother Carlos. The long coat is more expensive than the short one. The superlative form of an adjective compares more than two people or things. It is usually formed by adding -est to an adjective that has only one syllable. If the adjective has more than one syllable, the superlative is usually formed by adding most before the adjective. Pedro is the oldest of the three Castino children. The long coat is the most expensive of all the coats.  Exercise 1 Underline the adjective in parentheses that best completes each sentence. Brian is (taller, tallest) than his brother. 1. The park by the ocean is the (peacefulest, most peaceful) place I have ever been. 2. Jimmy Carter is a (more recent, recentest) president than John F. Kennedy. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 3. Granite is the (most hard, hardest) rock nature makes. 4. Mt. Shasta is the (higher, highest) mountain I have ever seen. 5. An airplane moves at (greater, more great) speed than a car. 6. The (most big, biggest) problem we have is reading the German book. 7. My brother thinks New York is the (most exciting, excitingest) city in the world. 8. Joseph was (later, more late) than Juan. 9. The English test was (more difficult, difficultest) than the math test. 10. Yellow is the (most light, lightest) color on Brenda’s painting. 11. We had the (thrillingest, most thrilling) time at the amusement park! 12. Apples have (most smooth, smoother) skin than cantaloupes. Unit 5, Adjectives 123 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 13. The bananas were the (more ripe, ripest) fruit in the store. 14. The (most short, shortest) path is the one through the parking lot. 15. The newspaper is (more current, currenter) than the magazine.  Exercise 2 Write in the blank the correct form of the adjective in parentheses. A sweater was the [ warmest 1. I think this is the [ ] thing she had to wear. (warm) nicest ] shirt I own. (nice) 3. Gasoline is [ most likely more explosive 4. Mount Everest is the [ ] than water. (explosive) highest ] mountain in the world. (high) 5. The salad bar lettuce seems [ 6. This is the [ greenest ] to happen. (likely) fresher ] today than yesterday. (fresh) ] forest I have ever seen! (green) 7. The flowers outside are much [ more fragrant ] than the ones in the vase. (fragrant) 8. We walked barefoot through the [ thickest 9. The kitten was [ ] than I remember. (adorable) more adorable 10. The shortstop has the [ 11. This song is far [ strongest more popular 12. The cushion was [ older 13. I think the lamb is the [ 14. Spider webs are among the [ 15. This grammar test is the [ ] grass imaginable. (thick) ] arm on the team. (strong) ] than the one they just played. (popular) ] than the chair. (old) gentlest ] of our farm animals. (gentle) most delicate hardest ] things in nature. (delicate) ] one so far. (hard)  Writing Link Write three sentences about your favorite story. Use adjectives to compare it with others you have read. 124 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 2. Of all the ideas, Emily’s was the [ Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 33 Special Adjectives That Compare The comparative and superlative forms of some adjectives are not formed in the regular way. Never add more or most before these adjectives. COMPARATIVE better worse more less SUPERLATIVE best worst most least Grammar ADJECTIVE good bad much, many little (amount)  Exercise 1 Write in the blank the correct form of the adjective in parentheses. There is [ less 1. My cold is [ corn than spinach in the pantry. (little) worse today than it was yesterday. (bad) 2. Many old books are very [ 3. Felicia had [ less 4. Nelson did the [ least amount of work possible. (little) 5. A computer costs far [ more 6. Baking bread has the [ best 8. That was the [ better worst 9. The score was far [ 10. There is [ little worse 14. While [ 15. Is it [ smell in the world. (good) one of the two. (good) than the last time we lost. (bad) help we can give her. (little) 12. All the apples in that bag were [ More money than a typewriter. (much) team we played all year. (bad) 11. The creamy chocolate pie is [ 13. [ . (good) money in her pocket than she thought. (little) 7. That movie was the [ Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill good better bad than the apple pie. (good) . (bad) glazed doughnuts were left than plain doughnuts. (many) most better 16. Our team has [ students preferred spring, a few preferred summer. (many) to coach softball than to play it? (good) better players than theirs. (good) Unit 5, Adjectives 125 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 17. Not [ much paint is left. (much) 18. Shana likes [ 19. We have had [ most movies she sees. (much) less snow than usual. (little) 20. The museum had [ more paintings by French artists than by German artists. (many) 21. The potato soup is very [ better . (good) at skiing than at football. (good) 23. Our team had the [ least number of players of any team in the tournament. (little) 24. Today’s weather was [ 25. The magician’s act was [ 26. There are [ 27. We waited a [ more little worse than yesterday’s. (bad) better than the comedian’s. (good) trees in Blendon Woods than in Houston Woods. (much) while and then went home. (little) 28. Which of the three plans will cause the [ 29. After the bike was painted, it looked [ 30. That was the [ worst least better trouble? (little) than ever. (good) movie I had ever seen. (bad)  Writing Link Write a short paragraph that describes your neighborhood or a favorite place. Include comparative and superlative forms of the adjectives good, bad, much, and little. 126 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 22. I am [ good Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 5 Review  Exercise 1 Draw one line under each article and two lines under each comparative or superlative adjective. Circle all other adjectives. That mouse scooted across the most slippery part of the floor. 1. The Victorian house is closer than the modern house. Grammar 2. The Constitution guarantees free speech. 3. There was a dark spot on the carpet. 4. The little dog barked at the letter carrier. 5. More people attended the concert this year than last year. 6. Here is the ripest pear I could find. 7. The slowest way to get there is by boat. 8. Thanksgiving is the busiest time of year for airports. 9. In the spring, red roses grow in the park. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 10. In 1994 we had the worst winter in five years. 11. The heavy box held a new sewing machine. 12. Please pass those delicious chocolates. 13. Aleta was the earliest arrival. 14. The old oak tree was taller than the house. 15. Rashad thinks Chinese food is better than Mexican food. 16. This bucket is full of soapy water. Unit 5, Adjectives 127 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Cumulative Review: Units 1– 5  Exercise 1 Draw one line under each simple subject. Draw two lines under each simple predicate. The clown brought a pony to the birthday party. 1. Mother rented a good movie for us. 3. Cody and Brian have a new game. 4. They ran to the park. 5. Over and over they threw and caught the ball. 6. Maria and Juan baked chocolate cookies this afternoon. 7. Harve built a small robot, and Kelly painted it for him. 8. His older sister took him to the store. 9. The Morgans and the Morenos are our new neighbors. 10. Jamie wants hot dogs, but Simon prefers hamburgers.  Exercise 2 Write in the blank the past tense for each verb. sit sat 1. run ran 2. go went smiled 3. smile 4. eat ate called 5. call 6. do did left 7. leave took 12. take 13. let let 14. write wrote 15. speak spoke 16. croak croaked 17. smell smelled 8. ask asked 18. fall 9. buy brought 19. squeak 10. watch watched 128 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 squawked 11. squawk fell 20. laugh squeaked laughed Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 2. The book is called The Lion King. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 3 Draw two lines under each verb or verb phrase. Write its tense in the blank: present, past, future, pres. prog. (present progressive), past prog. (past progressive), pres. perf. (present perfect), or past perf. (past perfect.) past prog. future past perf. present prog. past present past prog. 1. My dad and I will bake brownies tonight. 2. I had already heard the rumor. 3. The snow is falling in big flakes. 4. The editor of the school paper wrote an editorial. Grammar present perf. The principal was speaking to the student. 5. You have made my day! 6. Fiona enjoys computer games. 7. My sister was riding the exercise bike. past 8. Charles Schulz created the “Peanuts” comic strip. future 9. Our dog will stay in a kennel during our vacation. present prog. 10. Our class is studying endangered species. past perf. 11. Rebecca had hurried to the mall. past prog. 12. Everyone was cheering for the home team. present perf. past 13. Mrs. Santos has discovered the missing workbooks. 14. General Sherman commanded the Union army in the Civil Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill War. past perf. 15. The light had burned out in the kitchen.  Exercise 4 Replace the word or words in parentheses with an appropriate pronoun. She They (Glenda) practiced playing the piano every night. 1. (The squirrels) scampered up the tree. it 2. I have seen (the movie) five times. He 3. (Samuel) gets up every morning at 6:00. We 4. (Mark and I) played catch in the summer sun. his 5. My sister borrowed (Kyle’s) bike yesterday. you 6. Mrs. Simpson wants to call (you and your sister) about raking her leaves. Unit 5, Adjectives 129 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 7. We can’t find (Betty, Kai, and Marillu) anywhere. Our 8. (Levi’s and my) model airplane is red. her 9. We saw (your aunt) at the shopping mall. Its 10. (The fish’s) gills moved quickly in and out. they 11. Do you know if (the Gonzaleses) are coming? her 12. We all applauded Carlos and (Maria). she 13. Does (Julie) know her sweater is on backwards? it 14. My dad carried (the luggage) upstairs. us 15. Tricia lent (Jules and me) her library card.  Exercise 5 Draw one line under each regular adjective and two lines under each predicate adjective. Circle all proper adjectives. The Pennsylvania mountains seem large and rugged. 1. The big barn appears spacious and roomy. 2. The heavy sea thundered against the black basalt rock of the cliffs. 3. A cousin of mine owns a Belgian horse. 4. This new flavor of strawberry sherbet tastes delicious. 5. The outdated steamship became a popular attraction for tourists. 6. Did you see that Italian sports car in front of the old house? 7. I saw the science book on the antique table and the French grammar book on the kitchen counter. 8. Are those beach houses in greater danger from hurricanes than these tall hotels? 9. The English mystery movie interests me more than this Japanese cartoon. 10. June was the driest month on record. 11. The scarlet cardinal sounds happy on this sunny day. 12. The mighty battleship sits quietly at anchor these days, and many people visit it. 13. Glorious sunlight reflects warmly off the brick walls. 14. I like Irish setters; what dog breed do you like? 130 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar them Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 6: Adverbs Lesson 34 Adverbs Modifying Verbs An adverb modifies, or describes, a verb, an adjective, or another adverb. An adverb tells how, when, or where about the word it modifies. An adverb that modifies a verb may appear in different positions in a sentence. Grammar Chan happily plays ball. (The adverb happily tells how Chan plays ball.) Often the team travels on a bus. (The adverb often tells when the team travels.) My sister ran downstairs. (The adverb downstairs tells where my sister ran.) Most, but not all, words that end in -ly are adverbs. This type of adverb is usually formed by adding -ly to an adjective. Adjective: graceful Adverb: gracefully Some adverbs that do not end in -ly are soon, after, now, later, hard, not, fast, often, today, always, very, and here.  Exercise 1 Underline each adverb. Draw an arrow to the verb it modifies. The custom of wearing wigs has varied greatly over the centuries. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 1. For many centuries both men and women frequently wore wigs. 2. As time passed, wigs gradually became the mark of high fashion. 3. In many countries people grandly dressed their wigs with gold and jewels. 4. Queen Elizabeth I of England dearly loved clothes and jewelry. 5. She soon revived the style of wearing fancy wigs. 6. In France, Queen Marie Antoinette gracefully hid her hair loss with a wig. 7. All of her subjects eagerly followed her style. 8. In the New World many ministers preached energetically against wigs, while other ministers wore them proudly. Unit 6, Adverbs 131 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 9. Just before the American Revolution, colonists heavily powdered their high, puffy wigs. 10. In those days George Washington surely considered his wig high fashion. 11. People later stopped wearing wigs. 12. Wigs were obviously part of the old world. 13. The new Americans certainly wanted freedom in style as well as in government. 15. They soaked their hair heavily in oil to hold the powder.  Exercise 2 Complete each sentence by writing an appropriate adverb in the blank. Answers will vary. In many ancient lands people [ 1. People were [ often proudly grew long hair as a mark of honor. punished by having their hair cut. 2. When Julius Caesar conquered a new country, he [ usually forced the people to cut their hair. 3. Many people [ firmly believed that long hair increased strength. 4. The story of Samson and Delilah [ clearly illustrates how many people felt about hair. 5. On the other hand, the Greeks shaved their heads and [ respectfully offered the hair to the gods. 6. In return, they [ politely asked for great strength in battle. 7. Peoples like the Anglo-Saxons [ 8. They [ greatly happily dyed their hair in bright colors. admired hair dyed in bright green, blue, or orange. 9. Ancient Germans, on the other hand, [ often preferred hair dyed in bright red. 10. Instead of hair spray, they [ commonly in place. 132 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 used goat’s grease to make their hair stay Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 14. Even so, they powdered their hair and tied it tightly at the back of the neck. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 35 Adverbs Modifying Adjectives and Adverbs An adverb can also modify an adjective or another adverb. An adverb that modifies an adjective or another adverb tells how, when, or where about the word it modifies. An adverb that modifies an adjective or another adverb almost always appears immediately before the word it modifies. Grammar Kai is an unusually good skater. (The adverb unusually tells how about the adjective good.) Marta almost always sings. (The adverb almost tells when about the adverb always.) ADVERBS OFTEN USED TO MODIFY ADJECTIVES AND OTHER ADVERBS very so rather just too extremely nearly somewhat almost really barely totally quite partly unusually hardly  Exercise 1 Circle each adverb that modifies an adjective or an adverb. In the blank, write adj. if the adverb modifies an adjective. Write adv. if the adverb modifies another adverb. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill adj. I was barely awake when the phone rang. adj. 1. A very nice bowl of flowers arrived in the mail. adj. 2. We call my grandmother nearly every day. adj. 3. Pierre is the most popular player on the team. adv. 4. He almost always turns off the light. adj. 5. The floor was marked with totally black lines. adv. 6. We set the eggs on the counter very carefully. adj. 7. The circus clown had an unusually big, false nose. adv. 8. The elderly man walked rather slowly. adj. 9. My shirt is old and somewhat gray. adv. 10. My best friend, Tanya, sings quite sweetly. adj. 11. Bill spends so much time working that he has little time for other things. Unit 6, Adverbs 133 adj. 12. Suela’s idea was just right. adj. 13. We had a really good pizza last night. adj. 14. Mother is especially successful in her work. adv. 15. They were surprised when the car stopped so suddenly. adj. 16. Jody was really happy to see her cousins. adv. 17. We quite happily fed the ducks. adj. 18. We rode our nearly new bicycles to the park. adj. 19. Bill is extremely eager to race Joel on Saturday. adv. 20. Joel is smaller and faster and can very easily win the race. adj. 21. We all followed the ice cream truck, but Nora was barely able to keep up. adv. 22. Even though she is slow, she hardly ever falls. adj. 23. The unexpected visit from my aunt was too good to be true. adj. 24. Balance is extremely important when riding a bicycle. adv. 25. Pedro almost never eats popcorn in the evening.  Writing Link Write about one of your favorite things to do. Use adverbs to modify adjectives and other adverbs. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 134 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 36 Adverbs That Compare The comparative form of an adverb compares two actions. The superlative form of an adverb compares more than two actions. Adverbs that have only one syllable form the comparative by adding -er and form the superlative by adding -est. Adverbs that have more than one syllable or that end in -ly use the word more to form the comparative and the word most to form the superlative. Grammar Comparative: The little clown ran faster than the big one. The little clown ran more quickly than the big one. Superlative: The little clown ran the fastest of all of them. The little clown ran the most quickly of all of them. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill  Exercise 1 Write in the blank the missing form of the adverb. ADVERB COMPARATIVE SUPERLATIVE easily more easily most easily 1. fast faster fastest 2. firmly more firmly most firmly 3. rarely more rarely most rarely 4. simply more simply most simply 5. hard harder hardest 6. regularly more regularly most regularly 7. actively more actively most actively 8. long longer longest 9. soon sooner soonest 10. high higher highest 11. clearly more clearly most clearly 12. close closer closest 13. frequently more frequently most frequently 14. plainly more plainly most plainly 15. truly more truly most truly Unit 6, Adverbs 135 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 2 Underline the correct form of the adverb in parentheses. It took us (longer, longest) to get to the museum than to the park. 1. Mark ran the (faster, fastest) of all the boys. 2. Mika worked (more hard, harder) than Roger. 3. Maria speaks the (intelligentliest, most intelligently) of all the candidates. 4. He wins (more frequently, most frequently) than his brother. 6. We arrived (more soon, sooner) than we thought we would. 7. We play tennis (more often, oftener) now that the weather is warmer. 8. An eagle can fly (more high, higher) than a sparrow. 9. Some animals act (more mean, meaner) than they actually are. 10. Cole plays (more noisier, more noisily) on his electric guitar now that he has a new amplifier. 11. Fred sat (closer, closest) to the door than Shelly did. 12. Mary always eats (faster, fastest) than her brother does. 13. The owl can screech (louder, loudest) than any other bird I know. 14. Tad wrote his report (neatlier, more neatly) the second time. 15. She answered (sooner, soonest) of the ten people asked. 16. In sports, Ruth always tries (more hard, harder) than Susan. 17. The cheetah runs (more swiftly, most swiftly) than any other animal. 18. The gold medal winner skated the (more skillfully, most skillfully) of the ten contestants. 19. Mrs. Roth explained the problem (more clearly, most clearly) than Mrs. Groves did. 20. The prize will go to the ballplayer who attends practice (more regularly, most regularly). 136 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 5. Sarah is studying (more long, longer) than usual because she has a test tomorrow. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 37 Irregular Comparative Forms Some adverbs have irregular forms of the comparative and the superlative. IRREGULAR COMPARATIVE FORMS COMPARATIVE better worse less farther further SUPERLATIVE best worst least farthest furthest Grammar ADVERB well badly little (amount) far (distance) far (degree)  Exercise 1 Underline the correct form of the irregular adverb in parentheses. Robby fixed his stereo (better, best) the second time. 1. I was worried that I did (more badly, worse) on the test. 2. Emilio ate (less, least) quickly than Tom did. 3. Mario could see much (more far, farther) with his new glasses. 4. I don’t want to listen any (further, farther). 5. Ariel does (bestest, best) in school after a good night’s sleep. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 6. I hope they repair the bridge (better, best) this time than last time. 7. The metal fence is (badly, worst) rusted from all the rain. 8. I would like to contribute to my community (better, best) than I have in the past. 9. Pearl is (less, least) clever than her sister. 10. Raoul enjoys baby-sitting (better, best) than he enjoys mowing lawns. 11. Friday I played the (worse, worst) of anyone on the team. 12. Humming is the (less, least) annoying of all your habits. 13. Monarch butterflies migrate the (farther, farthest) of all the butterflies. 14. Always do your (better, best), and you will succeed in life. 15. Julius did (worse, worst) in the 500-meter dash than in the 100-meter dash. Unit 6, Adverbs 137 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 2 Complete the sentence by writing in the blank the correct form of the irregular adverb in parentheses. Vivian traveled [ less this year than last year. (little) 1. Last year on vacation we drove as [ 2. Kayla’s sister drew animals [ 3. I will think about it [ far as Mexico. (far) better further than she drew people. (well) before next week. (far) worst on opening night. (badly) farther 5. My dad can throw a football [ 6. In our pet contest, the frog jumped [ 7. Lisa performed [ better than I can. (far) farther than the grasshopper. (far) in today’s volleyball game than in yesterday’s. (well) least 8. This video game was the [ enjoyable of the three. (little) 9. Can you explain the problem [ further 10. The teacher and the students will [ ? (far) further refine the class goals. (far) 11. When choosing pretzels, popcorn, or potato chips, remember that potato chips are the [ least healthful of the three. (little) 12. Atlanta is the [ farthest 13. I like the country [ better 14. I like the ocean [ best south I have ever been. (far) than the city. (well) of all. (well) 15. Micah performed his violin solo the [ best 16. Martin enjoys swimming [ than I do. (little) 17. Juan does [ worse less he ever had. (well) in science than in English. (badly) 18. Do you think my big brother dances [ 19. The little girl can speak much [ worse better than I do? (badly) than she could six months ago. (well) 20. Of any time of day, Jenny sings [ worst 138 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 in the morning. (badly) Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 4. Of all the performances, our school play went [ Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 38 Telling Adjectives and Adverbs Apart I Some adjectives and adverbs are easy to identify within sentences. An adjective modifies a noun or pronoun. An adverb modifies a verb, adjective, or another adverb. When they follow a verb, however, they can be confusing. A predicate adjective follows a linking verb and an adverb follows an action verb. A leopard is fast. (Fast is a predicate adjective.) A leopard runs fast. (Fast is an adverb.) Which of the two movies did you like better? 1. The king was a just ruler. 2. I have just started this assignment. 3. Everyone worked hard on the projects for the science fair. 4. The toast had become hard and cold. 5. We have less homework than usual tonight. 6. I enjoyed the stage play less than the movie. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 7. Jess skates better than Tony. 8. This book seems better than that one. 9. Peggy can swim faster than Carol. 10. The jockey wanted a faster horse. 11. The explorers climbed a high mountain. 12. The plane flew high overhead. 13. Linda took a long drink of water. 14. How long have you waited here? 15. Come close, and I’ll tell you a secret. 16.The referee made a close call. Unit 6, Adverbs 139 Grammar  Exercise 1 Draw one line under each italicized word that is an adjective. Draw two lines under each italicized word that is an adverb. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 17. Only one person arrived late. 18. The Changs ate a late dinner. 19. This is the most popular restaurant in town. 20. Most people look forward to weekends.  Exercise 2 Underline the adjective or adverb in parentheses that best completes each sentence. 1. Juanita is a (great, greatly) chess player and a good sport. 2. Mom and Dad appeared (great, greatly) pleased with their anniversary gift. 3. Mitzi (near, nearly) collided with Tim in the doorway. 4. A (near, nearly) miss does not count in basketball. 5. Myra looked (sad, sadly) at her friend’s broken glasses. 6. The little puppy looked (sad, sadly) and lonely. 7. The rain came down (sudden, suddenly). 8. There was a (sudden, suddenly) shower this afternoon. 9. What is the (probable, probably) cause of the disease? 10. We have (probable, probably) waited too long. 11. It is (unusual, unusually) cold today. 12. A temperature of seventy seems (unusual, unusually) for February in Iowa. 13. It was an absolutely (perfect, perfectly) summer day. 14. Mr. Murphy told us a (perfect, perfectly) ridiculous joke! 15. Could you (possible, possibly) help me with this math problem? 16. Well, that is one (possible, possibly) solution to the problem. 17. The long white envelope looked quite (ordinary, ordinarily). 18. I would not (ordinary, ordinarily) read a book about computer technology. 19. Jake grew (gloomy, gloomily) toward the end of the day. 20. The picknickers watched the dark clouds (gloomy, gloomily). 140 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar Mr. Denton (usual, usually) arrives before seven o’clock. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 39 Telling Adjectives and Adverbs Apart II ADJECTIVES The choir sounds bad. The grapes are good. The roses are real. We are sure to win. Most people like music. Grammar Some adjectives and adverbs demand special attention because they can be confusing. Bad and good are adjectives. They are used after linking verbs. Badly and well are adverbs. They modify action verbs. When well is used after a linking verb to describe a person’s health, it is an adjective. Real and sure are adjectives. They describe nouns or pronouns. Really and surely are adverbs. Most is usually an adjective. When it is part of a superlative, it is an adverb. Almost is usually an adverb. When it is followed by an indefinite pronoun, it is an adjective. ADVERBS She sings badly. Grapes keep well. The roses are really pretty. We will surely win. The song is almost too loud.  Exercise 1 Underline the word in parentheses that best completes each sentence. Our cat is (real, really) fuzzy. 1. We will (sure, surely) beat the Lions tomorrow! 2. Does this milk taste (good, well) or is it sour? 3. We (most, almost) always have salad with dinner. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 4. The wrestler had a (sure, surely) hold on his opponent. 5. Alex didn’t feel (good, well), so he stayed home from school. 6. The boxer who landed the (most, almost) punches won the fight. 7. (Most, Almost) everyone in our class was excited about the basketball play-offs. 8. Bagels don’t fit (good, well) in our toaster. 9. Don and Maria had a (real, really) good time at the party. 10. I go to (most, almost) every football game. 11. My sister and I behave (good, well) when our grandparents visit. 12. We saw a (real, really) whale when we vacationed at Cape Cod! 13. Are you (sure, surely) you are right about the time of the movie? Unit 6, Adverbs 141 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 14. The CD sounds (good, well) on our new disc player. 15. (Most, Almost) plants need sun and water.  Exercise 2 Write in the blank the correct form of the word in italics. If the word is correct, write C in the blank. Sheila did good on her English grammar test. good 1. The baseball cap looked well on Neal’s head. really 2. The Mexican food was real spicy. C almost well 3. Jazz is surely popular in New Orleans! 4. Joel most never watches TV on school nights. 5. With the help of my calculator, I did good on my math homework. surely 6. We will sure go to the mall this weekend. Most 7. Almost politicians have degrees in either political science or law. C 8. The sound system in our school auditorium works badly. really 9. The soccer match was real exciting! well 10. Jasmine’s grandma knits very good. bad 11. Your messy room looks badly. good 12. The pepperoni pizza tastes well. sure 13. Mr. Valdez is surely about the results. C badly 14. Dolphins are really smart mammals. 15. The old car rattled bad.  Writing Link Write one or two sentences comparing your ability to do something this year with your ability to do it last year. 142 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar well Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 40 Avoiding Double Negatives Negative words express the idea of not or no. The adverb not often appears in the form of a contraction. is + not = isn’t was + not = wasn’t were + not = weren’t do + not = don’t did + not = didn’t can + not = can’t will + not = won’t have + not = haven’t could + not = couldn’t NEGATIVE never nothing AFFIRMATIVE ever, always something, anything NEGATIVE nobody nowhere Grammar Negative words are the opposite of affirmative words. Affirmative words show the idea of yes. Each negative will have several opposite affirmatives. AFFIRMATIVE somebody, anybody somewhere, anywhere Using two negatives in a sentence creates a double negative. Avoid using more than one negative in a sentence. Correct a double negative by using an affirmative word in place of one of the negative words. Incorrect: The teacher didn’t grade no papers. Correct: The teacher graded no papers. The teacher didn’t grade any papers.  Exercise 1 Underline the word in parentheses that best completes each sentence. We didn’t see (none, any). Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 1. My father doesn’t (never, ever) want to vacation in Florida. 2. Bill doesn’t think (nothing, anything) is as much fun as mountain climbing. 3. My mother says she isn’t (no, a) swimmer. 4. There weren’t (no, any) apples on the tree. 5. There isn’t (no, any) easy way to decide where to go. 6. Aaron wasn’t (never, ever) able to keep up with the older boys. 7. We didn’t see (nothing, anything) interesting at the flea market. 8. The book can’t be kept (no, any) longer. 9. My brother didn’t break (no, any) windows. 10. The band didn’t play (nowhere, anywhere) last week. Unit 6, Adverbs 143 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 11. Did you say you don’t (never, ever) make a mistake? 12. Marcy hasn’t (no, any) money for the book. 13. We looked for the treasure, but we didn’t find (nothing, anything). 14. The pirates didn’t intend for (no one, anyone) to find it. 15. Mr. Allen didn’t mean (nothing, anything) by his comment. 16. After the picnic there weren’t (no, any) potato chips left. 18. We won’t (never, ever) visit that theater again. 19. The police officer yelled, “Don’t (nobody, anybody) move!” 20. There wasn’t (no, any) popcorn for the movie.  Exercise 2 Write a negative in the blank for each of the following affirmative words. Use contractions when possible. ever never 1. will won’t 11. can 2. one none, no one 12. some none 13. could couldn’t 3. anywhere nowhere didn’t 4. did haven’t 5. have 6. should 7. any 8. is 9. do shouldn’t none isn’t wasn’t 15. someone 16. would never 144 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 no one wouldn’t 17. were weren’t 18. anything don’t 10. always 14. was can’t 19. has 20. does nothing hasn’t doesn’t Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 17. The broken glass wasn’t (no one’s, anyone’s) fault. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 6 Review  Exercise 1 Underline each adverb. Draw an arrow to the word it modifies. We practiced eagerly for two hours. 1. Rob kicked the ball well. Grammar 2. Marlo closed the door quickly. 3. The actors performed the play badly. 4. The music was really beautiful. 5. We arrived late to the movie. 6. The pool will open soon. 7. We always swim in the summer. 8. Alma cheerfully taught her little sister the game. 9. They walk to school nearly every day. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 10. Their mother regularly calls them at home.  Exercise 2 Complete each sentence with the correct comparative or superlative form of the adverb in parentheses. Our dog obeys [ better 1. The play will be held [ than he used to. (well) sooner than expected. (soon) 2. Of all the animals in the world, the cheetah runs [ 3. This writing can be read because you pressed [ 4. Of all the bikers, Ralph climbed the slope [ 5. Kendra plays checkers [ 6. My brother plays the guitar [ better worse fastest more firmly most easily . (fast) than before. (firmly) . (easily) than anyone else. (well) than he thinks. (badly) Unit 6, Adverbs 145 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Cumulative Review: Units 1–6  Exercise 1 For each complete sentence draw one line under each simple subject and two lines under each simple predicate. In each blank write S for simple sentence, C for compound sentence, or F for sentence fragment. Our dog chased the squirrel, and the squirrel chased the mouse. S 1. Our trip during spring break was a lovely cruise. S 2. The weather became cool and cloudy. C 3. We were unhappy with the stove, and we returned it to the store. F 4. Common errors by the teacher in art class. S 5. Most of the time we didn’t swim in the ocean water. S 6. Marcia and I went to the movie and walked to the mall. F 7. Celebrating her birthday. C 8. Pedro and Marta practiced their song, and they sang it for Mother and me. S 9. Akeem loved the trip to the desert in Arizona. F 10. For some groceries for our Thanksgiving dinner at Granddad’s house. S 11. Tomorrow Lance will come to the meeting. C 12. Rona ate before the movie, but her brother ate afterward. F 13. Angry at those rude and noisy people in the first few rows. S 14. Carl sang a solo in choir last week. S 15. As a child, Mark always seemed happy. F 16. Susana with her father to the game. C 17. The cheerleaders are planning the pep rally, but they need more help. S 18. The space shuttle carried our science experiment on its last flight. F 19. The contest during the last week of band practice. C 20. I am looking forward to a career in space, and my brother plans as career as a teacher. 146 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar C Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 2 Write in the blank the plural of each noun. pianos piano 1. team teams 11. donkey 2. sister sisters 12. puppy birthdays 3. birthday donkeys puppies bees 13. bee potatoes 14. boss bosses 5. visitor visitors 15. toy toys 6. church churches 16. fly flies 17. fox foxes dogs 7. dog 8. wish wishes 9. library libraries 10. market markets 18. dress dresses 19. bush bushes 20. lunch Grammar 4. potato lunches  Exercise 3 Write adj. in the blank if the word in italics is an adjective. Write adv. if it is an adverb. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill adj. What a lovely tulip! adj. 1. The baby has curly brown hair. adv. 2. At almost any moment, the phone may ring with the news. adj. 3. The school band will perform at the game. adj. 4. There was little truth to her statement. adj. 5. What is your favorite show on television? adv. 6. Grace carefully braided her hair. adv. 7. Aunt Beth has nearly twenty varieties of house plants. adv. 8. Keith moved rapidly through the grocery store. adv. 9. The reporter followed events closely. adj. 10. I like my new home very much. adv. 11. My father works hard for a living. adj. 12. The new student is very friendly. Unit 6, Adverbs 147 adv. 13. Please cut the cake quickly! adj. 14. The hardest part of redecorating my room was choosing the wallpaper. adv. 15. A kangaroo jumps higher than a rabbit. adv. 16. We almost always are involved in community service. adj. 17. My sister works long hours delivering newspapers. adv. 18. Abdul tiptoed sneakily through the house. adv. 19. I sometimes curl up on the couch for a nap. adj. 20. Juanita enjoys most kinds of music. adj. 21. My mom becomes very sleepy after nine o’clock. adv. 22. My family often goes to baseball games. adj. 23. The jet pilot had perfect vision. adv. 24. The plumber worked long and hard on the broken pipe. adj. 25. Josh looked handsome in his new suit. adj. 26. The backhoe dug a deep hole. adv. 27. A gray seagull soared effortlessly in the sunny sky. adj. 28. In a short while we’ll be ready to go. adv. 29. The flag fluttered wildly on its broken rope. adv. 30. I hurried downstairs. adj. 31. That is a hilarious story. adv. 32. Elizabeth cares deeply about her patients. adv. 33. This program ends soon. adj. 34. That antique chair is fragile. adv. 35. Please come here quickly. 148 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 7: Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections Lesson 41 Prepositions Grammar A preposition is a word that relates a noun or a pronoun to some other word in a sentence. Most prepositions are single words, but some are made up of two or three words. Prepositions made up of two or three words are called compound prepositions. Park the tractor behind the barn. Victor came to the meeting instead of Charles. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill WORDS COMMONLY USED AS PREPOSITIONS about above according to across across from after against ahead of along along with among apart from around as as well as aside from at because of before behind below beneath beside between beyond but (except) by (next to) despite down during except for from in in addition to in front of inside in spite of instead of into like (as) near next to of off on onto on top of out out of outside over past since than through throughout till (until) to toward under underneath until up upon with within without  Exercise 1 Draw a line under each preposition and compound preposition. Jeremiah, please stand by my desk. 1. Place the umbrella stand beside the door. 2. Lean a little to the left. 3. Mom, may I go skating with Suzi? 4. You can get extra supplies from the stationery store. Unit 7, Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections 149 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 5. Eileen and Miranda have been best friends since third grade. 6. The ground under the trees isn’t even wet. 7. We can do this work without any extra help. 8. The paprika is between the onion powder and the pepper. 9. I can stay only until eight o’clock. 10. I found my homework inside my social studies book. 12. Myra lives near Mr. Polumski, who is my English teacher. 13. The airplane flew above the storm. 14. Sprinkle the colored sugar on top of the frosting. 15. Meet me during lunch period. 16. I can meet you in front of the library at four o’clock. 17. Samantha and David ran down the street. 18. Alfie, my golden retriever, relaxes in the shade under the oak tree. 19. Juan shyly stood apart from the other new students. 20. We must be on the train by noon. 21. Jeremy sits third from the left among the other trumpet players. 22. Will you write about John Cabot instead of Abigail Adams? 23. According to Mr. Wolford, you performed beyond all expectations. 24. Everyone went outside the building because of the false alarm. 25. All of these papers except the green ones are for Salem Elementary. 26. Crawl through the tunnel, and climb onto the platform. 27. How did you get inside the house without your key? 28. Go into the stable and look for the saddle soap. 29. During my study time, I came upon this beautiful poem. 30. On top of the mountain the temperature often drops below zero. 31. Put this shovel against the wall and behind the lawn mower. 32. Above the sagging couch hung a broken lamp. 150 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 11. We ran five laps around the gym and then practiced shots. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 42 Prepositional Phrases A prepositional phrase is a group of words that begins with a preposition and ends with a noun or a pronoun called the object of the preposition. The Adirondack Mountains are in northern New York. (New York is the object of the preposition in.) I will mark the map for you. (You is the object of the preposition for.) People from countries around the world visit Yosemite each year. 1. Yosemite, in central California, is one of the best-known national parks. 2. It became a national park through the efforts of naturalist John Muir. 3. Yosemite National Park is known for its waterfalls, for its mountains and domes, and for its giant sequoia trees. 4. During the Ice Age, glaciers carved the Yosemite Valley. 5. Small side valleys, also formed by glaciers, have rivers at their bases. 6. These rivers spill over the sides of the mountains in spectacular waterfalls. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 7. At 2,435 feet, Yosemite Falls is the highest waterfall in North America. 8. The water in Yosemite Creek spills over the edge in three falls. 9. Two of Yosemite’s natural wonders are called El Capitán and Half Dome. 10. El Capitán is the world’s largest piece of exposed granite. 11. Half Dome is a piece of granite that looks like a gumdrop cut in half. 12. The Sierra Nevadas are one huge piece of granite. 13. The park contains three separate groves of giant sequoia trees. 14. Among these groves, the Mariposa Grove of Big Trees is the most famous. 15. The largest tree in the park, the Grizzly Giant, is 3,800 years old. 16. According to historians, the name Yosemite means “grizzly bear.” Unit 7, Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections 151 Grammar  Exercise 1 Draw a line under the prepositional phrase or phrases in each sentence. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 2 Draw one line under each preposition and two lines under its object. Naturalists like John Muir left messages for people. 1. John Muir was born in Dunbar, Scotland, in 1838. 2. He was a boy when his family moved to Wisconsin in 1849. 3. When he was a young man, he walked a thousand miles from the Ohio River to the Gulf Coast. 5. There he heard debates about the formation of the Yosemite Valley. 6. He was thirty years old when he first went to California in 1868. 7. Upon his arrival, John Muir fell in love with the land. 8. He devoted his life to the study of nature. 9. He believed erosion from glaciers caused the formation of the Yosemite Valley. 10. Muir did many studies of the Sierra Nevada Mountain Range. 11. In the 1890s, John Muir started the Sierra Club. 12. This club has been active in conservation efforts for a century. 13. John Muir was a friend of Theodore Roosevelt. 14. Teddy Roosevelt was president of the United States from 1901 to 1908. 15. In 1903 Roosevelt and Muir spent a night in Yosemite camping underneath the stars. 16. They listened to sounds of water tumbling down sheer cliffs. 17. After a campfire meal, they slept among the giant sequoias. 18. Muir wanted the valley preserved for all people. 19. Through the efforts of John Muir and with the support of Theodore Roosevelt, the valley became part of Yosemite National Park. 20. Roosevelt’s administration made great efforts toward conservation. 152 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 4. Muir studied geology at a university in Wisconsin. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 43 Pronouns After Prepositions When a pronoun is the object of a preposition, use an object pronoun, not a subject pronoun. I backpacked with my parents last summer. I backpacked with them last summer. Grammar Use an object pronoun when a preposition has a compound object consisting of a noun and a pronoun or two pronouns. Mike and Sal usually play tennis with José and her. Pronouns in compound subjects or compound objects can be confusing. When deciding what pronoun to use, read the sentence with only the pronoun. This eliminates extra words and can help you decide if you should use a subject pronoun or an object pronoun. Mike and Sal usually play tennis with her. The pronoun who is a subject pronoun, and the pronoun whom is an object pronoun. Who told you about the trip? From whom did you get the details? Notice that who is the subject of the first sentence and whom is the object of the preposition from in the second sentence. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill  Exercise 1 Write the appropriate personal pronoun above the word or words in italics. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. him We have to go by Mr. Mahoney to get out of the room. her Armand, stand next to Chico and Jenna. them Gordon and Sookie will play opposite Joe and Natasha. her Our teacher is on the second floor with Mrs. Lane. her Did you get the tickets from Aunt Beatrice? them Please give a paper to each of the students. them The banner will be held by Ling and Claudia. her Let’s make room for Alicia between Amy and Ana. him The serpent costume with the green scales is for Emilio. Unit 7, Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections 153 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ him 10. For the second picture, I want Diana standing in front of Micah and Kenneth. us 11. When the cheerleaders make a pyramid, Jenny is on top of me and everyone else. her 12. In tonight’s performance, Kitty Cain will perform instead of Julia Rice. him 13. You remind me a lot of a boy I used to know. them 14. We live on the sixth floor, above the Garcias. her 15. Is everyone here now except Sonia? him 16. Find a seat near Lydia and Ryan. him 17. Jimmy, stop wrestling with your brother. them 18. We will have to leave without Paul and Mrs. Macchio. her 19. For this song, Audrey stands beside Betty Jo and faces the audience. them 20. The fifth grade always sits in the bleachers below the sixth grade.  Exercise 2 Underline the pronoun in parentheses that best completes the sentence. First find Melissa, and Juan will be right next to (she, her). 1. I think that the Crowleys live across from (they, them). 2. According to (she, her), Monday’s practice is cancelled. 3. Rodolfo, who is a new student, sits across from my sister and (I, me). 4. Stacey, I want you to help me instead of (she, her). 5. Stand back to back, lean against (he, him), and then try to sit down. 6. From (who, whom) did you get this information? 7. Jorge, will you please go to the office along with Chad and (he, him)? 8. Everyone form a circle around Mrs. Rodrigez and (we, us). 9. (Who, Whom) else is going with (they, them)? 10. Hillary is in line behind (she, her). 11. Can we rearrange the furniture in Alice’s room without (she, her)? 12. (Who, Whom) wanted help from my tutor and (I, me)? 154 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar them 9. This award really belongs to all the students in the sixth grade. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 44 Prepositional Phrases as Adjectives and Adverbs Prepositional phrases serve as adjectives and adverbs. An adjective phrase is sometimes a prepositional phrase that describes a noun or a pronoun. Castles in Japan were built differently from European castles. (describes the noun castles) Those in Japan often included many courtyards. (describes the pronoun those) Grammar An adverb phrase is sometimes a prepositional phrase that describes a verb, another adverb, or an adjective. The first European castles were built of earth and timber. (describes the verb built) Later in history castles were built out of stone. (describes the adverb later) The chapel was important in a Christian castle. (describes the adjective important)  Exercise 1 Identify the phrase in italics by writing adj. in the blank for each adjective phrase or adv. for each adverb phrase. Circle the word or phrase it modifies. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill adv. Castles served as homes for lords and as strongholds. adv. 1. How did people live inside a medieval castle? adj. 2. The main room in a castle was the great hall. adv. 3. The great hall served as a bedroom, dining room, and office. adj. 4. Early halls had fireplaces in the middle of the room. adv. 5. Later, wall fireplaces were introduced, and the lord’s table was often near the fire. adv. 6. The main meal was eaten late in the morning. adj. 7. Servants with pitchers of water helped guests wash their hands before and after eating. adv. 8. Some tables had removable legs so the room could be used for many purposes. adj. 9. The lord’s table was often the only table with fixed legs. adj. 10. Removing the tables used for dining provided space for entertainment. Unit 7, Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections 155 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ adv. 11. Later in the evening straw mattresses were brought into the great hall for adv. 12. The floors of some castles were decorated with tiles. adv. 13. Medieval people rarely used carpets as floor coverings. adv. 14. Carpets were regarded as luxuries. adv. 15. Some carpets hung on the walls as tapestries. adv. 16. Castles built after the year 1200 often had extra rooms. adv. 17. The heat for cooking came from an open fire. adv. 18. To prevent fires, halls were built away from the kitchen. adv. 19. Often the kitchen was in the courtyard. adv. 20. Later the kitchen was connected to the great hall. adj. 21. Medieval people living in castles ate a variety of foods. adj. 22. They ate beef, mutton, and many kinds of wild birds. adv. 23. They served venison and other game after a hunt. adv. 24. They ate fish during Lent. adj. 25. Many castles had gardens with orchards. adj. 26. Northern orchards provided fruit like apples and pears. adj. 27. Trenchers were flat pieces of stale bread. adv. 28. Trenchers were used as plates. adj. 29. The stale bread soaked up the gravy from the meat. adv. 30. The trenchers could be given to the poor. adv. 31. Nobles were usually served by pages. adv. 32. Only rich people had chairs, so most people sat on benches. adv. 33. Hunting and hawking were enjoyed as entertainment. adv. 34. In addition, the knights participated in tournaments. adv. 35. People listened to musicians and storytellers. 156 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar sleeping. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 45 Telling Prepositions and Adverbs Apart Some words can be used as either prepositions or adverbs. For a word to be a preposition, it must be part of a prepositional phrase. A preposition never stands alone in a sentence. If the word has an object, it is probably a preposition. If the word is not followed closely by a noun or a pronoun that could be an object, it is probably an adverb. Grammar Anastasia is riding her bike around the neighborhood. (preposition) Anastasia is riding her bike around. (adverb) WORDS THAT CAN BE USED AS PREPOSITIONS OR ADVERBS about above around before behind below down in inside near off on out outside over through up  Exercise 1 Write adv. in the blank if the word in italics is an adverb and prep. if it is a preposition. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill adv. Everyone, please sit down. prep. 1. I will leave the package outside my front door. adv. 2. Kyla had a feeling that she had been here before. prep. 3. Can we hang this picture on the wall above my bed? adv. 4. Stay with the group. Don’t fall behind. adv. 5. The yacht’s entire crew just went below. prep. 6. Is Stephanie in third grade or fourth grade now? adv. 7. This book is so good that I can’t put it down. prep. 8. Valerie made a perfect swan dive off the ten-foot board. prep. 9. Let’s put the small box inside the larger box. adv. 10. Won’t you please come in and talk? adv. 11. Would the children like to come inside for a snack? adv. 12. I don’t see Amanda, but I’m sure she is near. adv. 13. We’ve put this off long enough. Unit 7, Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections 157 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ prep. 14. Mom locked her keys inside the car. adv. 15. Put your boots on so your feet stay dry. adv. 16. Take Lucky out for a walk. prep. 17. Do you think we can finish this before noon? adv. 19. We put the trash outside on Tuesday nights. adv. 20. I’m glad that this project is finally over. prep. 21. Go through the door, and turn left. adv. 22. The crowds wouldn’t let me through. adv. 23. Button up before you go outside. prep. 24. Most female adult gymnasts weigh about ninety-five pounds. prep. 25. Is it possible to fly around the world non-stop? prep. 26. Federico always has to be home before dinner. prep. 27. A piece of paper just fell behind the sofa. adv. 28. I’ll be around, so call if you need me. prep. 29. We can store these props in the space below the stage. adv. 30. It’s almost noon, so I’m sure she’s up. prep. 31. The Zaharis family lives down this street. prep. 32. Hang your coat on the rack near the back door. prep. 33. The book you want is on the third shelf. adv. 34. We will have recess outside today. prep. 35. Please go out the doors at the front of the gym. prep. 36. We went over the hill to the picnic area. adv. 37. Look above and below for the package. adv. 38. Everything is still up in the air. adv. 39. Carefully put the punch bowl down on this table. prep. 40. What do you think you will be doing in twenty years? 158 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar prep. 18. The rescuers climbed up the fire escape to the third floor. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 46 Conjunctions A conjunction is a word that joins single words or groups of words in a sentence. The most common conjunctions—and, but, and or—are called coordinating conjunctions. Coordinating conjunctions can be used to connect individual nouns, pronouns, verbs, adjectives, adverbs, prepositions, phrases, or clauses. Place a comma before the conjunction in a compound sentence. Grammar We scoured and scrubbed the kitchen sink. Simon is very relaxed or very lazy. I have recovered, but my sister is still sick. Correlative conjunctions are pairs of words used to connect words or phrases in a sentence. Correlative conjunctions include both . . . and, either . . . or, neither . . . nor, and not only . . . but also. Both Wanda and Emily are right-handed. Neither the coach nor Ms. Thomas is left-handed.  Exercise 1 Circle each coordinating conjunction. Underline the words it connects. I was thrilled and excited when I heard your news. 1. Maureen or Margaret could help you. 2. Give these packages to him and her. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 3. Broad Street runs east and west. 4. I really want to stay home, but my mom says I have to go. 5. The water was cool and clear. 6. Did you travel by plane or by car? 7. We drove over a bridge and through a tunnel. 8. William hemmed and hawed before he answered the question. 9. The flowers smell fresh and delicate. 10. We can write Mandy a letter tonight, or we can call her tomorrow. 11. Was Washington or Jefferson the first president? 12. The Rockies are in the West, and the Alleghenies are in the East. Unit 7, Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections 159 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 13. This package came for you and me. 14. Would you like milk or water? 15. Are you sure of your answer, or do you need some time to think?  Exercise 2 Underline each coordinating or correlative conjunction. Both Jackson and Austin are state capitals. 1. Either Danielle or Benjamin has the tickets. 3. Both Manet and Monet are famous painters. 4. Either a salad or soup comes with the meal. 5. Neither red nor blue is my favorite color. 6. Ms. Torrence or Mr. Rodriguez teaches that course. 7. My cocker spaniel and cat chase each other around the tree. 8. Both the taxi driver and the bus driver drive faster than they should. 9. Neither fruit nor vegetables contain much fat. 10. Either the toast or the pie in the oven is burning. 11. The north trail and south trail end at the foot of the mountain. 12. Neither the garter snake nor the black snake is poisonous. 13. Do you know if either Li or Mason eats meat? 14. If it rains, neither the softball team nor the tennis team practices. 15. An open door or window lets in fresh air. 16. Both my bicycle and my father’s car have a flat tire. 17. Can either girls or boys enter the contest? 18. Neither the drug store nor the grocery store sells notebooks. 19. Whenever you do that, Lynn and Morgan laugh. 20. Either a bacteria or a virus causes that disease. 160 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 2. My stepfather and mother walk two miles every day. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 47 Interjections An interjection is a word or group of words that expresses mild or strong feeling. COMMON INTERJECTIONS congratulations good grief great hey hi hooray phew oh oh, no oops ouch no ugh wow yes Grammar ah aha all right awesome bravo Since an interjection is not related to other words in the sentence, it is set off from the rest of the sentence by a comma or an exclamation point. Use an exclamation point after an interjection that stands alone, either before or after a sentence. Use a comma before or after an interjection that expresses a mild emotion to separate it from the rest of the sentence. Yes! I knew you could do it! You got front row seats! Great! Congratulations, you passed the test.  Exercise 1 Underline each interjection. No way! You go first. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 1. Bravo! You won! 2. Hi, I think we met at Jarrod’s party. 3. What! You said you were bringing the money! 4. Ah! That sun feels good. 5. Ouch! You stepped on my foot. 6. Yes, I understand you perfectly. 7. I didn’t take the last piece of cake. Really! 8. Well, it’s about time you got here! 9. No, I haven’t seen your sister. 10. Whoops! I didn’t realize the floor was so slippery. 11. Oh, no! I left my homework on the bus! Unit 7, Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections 161 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 12. I only have one token left, and I need two for the subway. Good grief! 13. My, how you’ve grown since the last time I saw you! 14. Whew, that sure was a close call! 15. Do I want to go with you to see our favorite movie again? Yes! 16. Phew! That truck just missed us. 17. Oh, well, better luck next time! 19. Aha! You didn’t think I’d be able to find you, did you? 20. Ahem, I believe you’re sitting in my seat.  Exercise 2 Add to each sentence an interjection that expresses the emotion in parentheses. Add appropriate punctuation. Answers may vary. [ Congratulations! You got the part. (compliment) 1. [ Oops! 2. [ No, ]]]]] that can’t be true. (denial) 3. [ Hey, ]]]]] that’s my dessert. (call attention to) 4. [ Hooray! 5. [ Ouch! That really hurts! (pain) 6. [ Ugh! All the snow has turned to slush. (disgust) 7. [ Good grief! I didn’t mean to make such a mess. (apology) The Eagles are winning at last. (excitement) We are already twenty minutes late. (impatience) 8. [ Yes! I’ll be glad to help you. (agreement) 9. [ Wow! Did you really win ten dollars? (surprise) 10. [ Hey! Watch out for the car! (call attention to) 11. [ Bravo! That was a great performance. (approval) 12. [ Phew! The bell rang just as I got to my desk. (relief) 13. [ Oops!, 14. [ Aha! I finally solved the puzzle. (satisfaction) 15. [ Oh, no! We were supposed to stop at the store first. (regret) ]] ] I dropped my glass on the floor! (surprise) 162 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 18. Rats! They sold the last team sweatshirt an hour ago. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Review  Exercise 1 Identify each word in italics by labeling it adv. (adverb), conj. (conjunction), inter. (interjection), or prep. (preposition). inter. prep. conj. Unbelievable! Ramón placed second in the first race and won this one. inter. prep. 1. Wow! I am so impressed with your natural talent. prep. conj. 2. I like most of this jewelry, but I can buy only one piece. prep. adv. 3. Have you read any stories by Jack London before? prep. conj. 4. It’s supposed to snow six inches on Friday, and I don’t have any boots. inter. prep. 5. Oh, are you still practicing for your recital? prep. prep. 6. The road to success is paved with hard work. conj. prep. 7. Does Ezra or Camilla have the key to the back door? prep. prep. 8. The storage shed is behind the garage, which is next to the house. prep. 9. Would you rather play a board game instead of cards? inter. prep. 10. Uh-oh, I’m not sure where I put the envelope with the money. prep. conj. prep. 11. I keep the soap under the sink, but all other cleansers belong in this cupboard. conj. conj. prep. 12. Neither Yosef nor Pauline recognized me in the costume. inter. adv. prep. 13. Phew! We made it inside before the storm. prep. prep. prep. 14. Mr. Golden lives in the house on the southeast corner of this block. prep. conj. prep. 15. Have you seen a jacket with zippers and snap fasteners in the store recently? inter. prep. conj. prep. 16. Oh, good! You’ve got the bag of prizes and the tickets for the games. prep. conj. adv. 17. Sandra felt weak during math class, and afterward she left for home. conj. adv. prep. 18. My uncle and my four cousins have been inside for three hours. prep. prep. prep. conj. 19. Towers like the one in this picture were used as watchtowers or storage areas. prep. conj. prep. 20. Look underneath the bed for my brown shoes and the box with my sweaters. Unit 7, Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections Grammar Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Unit 7 163 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Cumulative Review: Units 1–7  Exercise 1 Draw one line under the complete subject and two lines under the complete predicate. If the subject is understood, write you in the space provided. you Give me a chance! 1. The gate in our backyard has a lock but no key. 2. Does anyone in the audience have any questions? Grammar you 3. Roll up your sleeves. 4. You tell a good story! 5. The furniture in my bedroom came from my uncle’s house. you 6. Try again. 7. Has anyone been to Grand Teton National Park? you 8. Visit with Grandma sometime this week. 9. The evergreen tree bowed under the weight of the snow. 10. Everyoneebut Joe was on time for the meeting. 11. Not one more thing will fit in my closet. you 13. Sort these files alphabetically. you 14. Sharpen these pencils for me. 15. I won a great prize! 16. You must decide before five o’clock. 17. These instructions are confusing! 18. Can you show me that step one more time? you 19. Turn the stereo and the television off. 20. Can you believe it! you 21. Put the milk in the refrigerator right away. 22. Mark and Melissa made apple pie for tonight’s dessert. 23. My mother’s second cousin, April, is living with us now. 164 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 12. Am I speaking loudly enough? Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 24. Can you call my mom or dad for me? 25. Do you ever use the new software?  Exercise 2 Write in the blank the tense or form of the verb indicated in parentheses. Yesterday we [ walked enjoys ] her advanced dance classes. (enjoy, present) 2. Fred [ is cooking 3. Opa [ pointed ] dinner right now. (cook, present progressive) ] to Germany and Ghana on the map when she was told to find countries starting with the letter g. (point, past) has collected 4. Mrs. Morris [ 5. Elizabeth [ is jogging 6. Mr. Schaffer [ typed 7. This picture [ proves 8. I [ have talked 9. The Coles [ ] with Barry. (jog, present progressive) ] this report. (type, past) ] my point. (prove, present) ] to Susan several times already. (talk, present perfect) live ] on Mulberry Street near High Street. (live, present) 10. Mr. and Mrs. Thomas [ 11. Joshua [ has given 12. Shannon [ Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 13. [ Have 16. Dad [ 17. I [ 18. Who [ swim ] you [ have worn broke will bring gone ] in Saturday’s meet? (swim, future) ] seventh grade for ten years. (teach, past perfect) ] to Dallas before? (go, present perfect) ] my hair yesterday. (cut, past) ] that shirt only once. (wear, present perfect) ] this glass? (break, past) 19. Jeremy’s little brother [ 20. I [ ] for tomorrow’s test. (study, present progressive) had taught cut ] in the first row. (sit, past) ] a lot of time to this project. (give, present perfect) ] you [ 14. Mrs. Gunther [ 15. [ sat is studying Will ] dolls for years. (collect, present perfect) was crying ] . (cry, past progressive) ] flowers to my grandma next week. (bring, future) Unit 7, Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections 165 Grammar 1. Kisha [ ] through the park at dusk. (walk, past) Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 3 Identify the word in italics by labeling it adv. (adverb), conj. (conjunction), inter. (interjection), or prep. (preposition). inter. conj. prep. Oh, I left my books and my money in my locker. inter. prep. 1. Congratulations! You got the blue ribbon for creative arts. prep. conj. 2. Since my accident, I ski cross-country but not downhill. conj. prep. 4. Sylvio, can you find the Indian Ocean or the Bay of Bengal on this map? inter. prep. 5. Ouch, I didn’t know the edge of the table was so sharp. prep. conj. 6. I actually ran to school this morning, but I was still late. adv. prep. 7. He left his gloves on when he painted the mural on the wall. conj. prep. 8. I vacuumed the carpets but still have to clean behind the couch. prep. prep. 9. During the party the dog has to stay outside the house. conj. adv. 10. If you can’t reach my mom or dad, my aunt is probably around. conj. prep. prep. 11. You can find an almanac and a dictionary on the shelf in the den. inter. prep. 12. Oh, no! I cracked an egg, and the shell fell into the batter. prep. prep. prep. 13. In 1861 Lincoln offered command of the U.S. Army to Robert E. Lee. prep. prep. 14. Along with Jerry and Phil, I walked toward the opening of the cave. prep. conj. prep. 15. Put your book down, and listen to me. inter. prep. conj. 16. Wow! Sam says you are fluent in English, Spanish, and German. adv. prep. 17. Turn your lights out by ten o’clock. conj. conj. prep. adv. 18. Either close your door, or turn the volume on your stereo down. 166 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar prep. inter. 3. The basketball team has won its first game in two years. Hooray! Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 8: Subject-Verb Agreement Lesson 48 Making Subjects and Verbs Agree The subject and verb of a sentence must agree in number. A noun that is singular must have the singular form of the verb. A noun that is plural takes the plural form of the verb. Grammar A cat sleeps during the day. (singular noun cat, singular verb sleeps) Cats sleep during the day. (plural noun cats, plural verb sleep)  Exercise 1 Draw two lines under the verb in parentheses that agrees with the subject. Leroy (rides, ride) his bicycle to school every day. 1. Television (brings, bring) the world into our homes with pictures, or video, and sounds, or audio. 2. The electronic television imaging device (was, were) invented in the 1920s. 3. The first practical TV system (was demonstrated, were demonstrated) at the New York World’s Fair in 1939. 4. Early television sets (was, were) crude black and white models. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 5. Today, technical advancements (gives, give) us high-quality color pictures. 6. Also, most programs now (comes, come) with stereo sound. 7. Television programs (is based, are based) on movies, plays, books, original screenplays, and short stories. 8. The subjects (remains, remain) the same, yesterday and today. 9. I Love Lucy still (serves, serve) as the example for all family shows. 10. The Mickey Mouse Club (was, were) first broadcast to “Mouseketeers” throughout America in 1955. 11. Today, their grandchildren (watches, watch) a new program with the same name. 12. Both Mickey Mouse Club shows (has, have) music, games, information, and humor. Unit 8, Subject-Verb Agreement 167 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 13. The original Mickey Mouse Club (seems, seem) almost foreign to viewers of today’s show. 14. However, each show (presents, present) the popular styles of the day. 15. Until the 1960s, a city (was given, were given) only four or five TV channels. 16. Thirty years later, cable TV (brings, bring) many channels into your set. 17. Entire channels (focuses, focus) on one subject. 19. Television sets can (shows, show) more than just TV programs. 20. The “Information Superhighway” (combines, combine) computer data, programs, games, and communications.  Exercise 2 Underline the subject of each sentence. Then, choose the verb in parentheses that agrees with the subject and write it in the blank. Many individuals [ use 1. A television newscast [ television to view the news. (uses, use) relies on the efforts of many different persons. (relies, rely) 2. The on-air newscasters [ are a small part of a large, mostly unseen team. (is, are) 3. News programs [ 4. The producer [ begin decides with a producer. (begins, begin) which stories to cover. (decides, decide) 5. The assignment desk dispatcher [ sends reporters and video photographers to different parts of the city. (sends, send) 6. News photographers [ carry video cameras to tape whatever stories they cover. (carries, carry) 7. Back at the station, electronic news gathering (ENG) editors [ combine different videotapes and scenes to tell a story. (combines, combine) 8. Each news tape [ lasts 9. Live newscasts [ are 10. A typical studio [ has between twenty and ninety seconds. (lasts, last) broadcast from a studio. (is, are) about thirty powerful spotlights. (has, have) 168 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 18. Experts (predicts, predict) 500-channel cable systems in the next few years. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 49 Subject Pronouns and Verb Agreement Subject pronouns (I, you, he, she, it, we, they) must also agree with the verb. I walk. (First person, singular) You walk. (Second person, singular) He, she or it walks. (Third person, singular) We walk. (First person, plural) You walk. (Second person, plural) They walk. (Third person, plural) I am asleep. (main verb) She does good work. (main verb) You have three dollars. (main verb) I am walking. (helping verb) They do like their work. (helping verb) You have met our new teacher. (helping verb)  Exercise 1 Draw two lines under the verb in parentheses that agrees with the subject. I (hopes, hope) the movie isn’t sold out. 1. Before beginning to eat, they (thanks, thank) their hostess. 2. We always (has, have) to wait for Anne to arrive. 3. She (is, are) planning to read Little Women this summer. 4. On the top shelf you (finds, find) the basket of fruit. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 5. It (is, are) obvious that the picnic will have to be postponed. 6. He (lives, live) in a town called Woodsfield. 7. Walking up to the plate, I (prepares, prepare) to bat. 8. They (has, have) seen the new art exhibit. 9. We usually (packs, pack) our suitcases the day before we leave on a trip. 10. Since it is so late, he (is, are) coming with us. 11. Today you (seems, seem) even happier than usual. 12. Gretchen was going to organize a softball game, but now it (looks, look) like rain. 13. I (practices, practice) singing every day. 14. She (visits, visit) the neighbors twice a week. 15. He (says, say) the park is filled with flowers. Unit 8, Subject-Verb Agreement 169 Grammar The verbs have, do, and be can be main verbs or helping verbs. They must agree with the subject whether they are used as main verbs or helping verbs. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 16. We (is, are) waving to the boaters from the bridge. 17. When shopping for gifts, they (searches, search) for practical items. 18. You (paints, paint) beautifully, Irene. 19. I (has, have) enjoyed learning to play chess. 20. It (is, are) the prettiest garden we have ever seen! 21. They (likes, like) to go camping on weekends. 23. Beyond the horizon he (sees, see) the glow of a gorgeous sunset. 24. Singing joyously, we (marches, march) toward the stage. 25. You (has, have) heard Danny’s new composition, haven’t you? 26. It (startles, startle) me when the wind chimes sound unexpectedly. 27. We often (stays, stay) at Grandpa’s farm during the summer. 28. After running five miles, I (am, are) ready for a rest. 29. They (laughs, laugh) whenever they look at themselves in the carnival mirrors. 30. He (cooks, cook) delicious Italian meals. 31. This month we (is, are) learning how to polka. 32. Drew, you (picks, pick) the colors for the decorations. 33. He (waits, wait) in the airport restaurant, hoping his plane will arrive soon. 34. It (appears, appear) as if the understudy will have to go on tonight. 35. Smiling, I (greets, greet) the new member of the class.  Writing Link Write a short paragraph about your favorite team sport. Use at least two subject pronouns, and be sure each subject and verb agree. 170 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 22. She (is, are) thinking about buying Christina a new watch. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 50 Locating the Subject Sometimes a prepositional phrase comes between the subject and the verb. The verb must agree with the subject of the sentence and not with the object of the preposition. The rooms near the entrance have new windows. The air in the mountains contains little oxygen. Grammar In the first sentence, near the entrance is a prepositional phrase. The subject of the sentence is rooms, which is plural; therefore, the verb that agrees with it, have, is also plural. In the second sentence, in the mountains is a prepositional phrase. The singular verb contains agrees with air, which is a singular subject. You can check for subject-verb agreement by removing the prepositional phrase. The rooms have new windows. The air contains little oxygen. Some sentences begin with there or here. These words are never the subject of a sentence. Look for the subject after the verb. There are many palm trees in Florida. Here in the city is a large building. To make finding the subject easier, rearrange these sentences by placing the subject before the verb in the usual manner. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Many palm trees are there in Florida. A large building is here in the city.  Exercise 1 Draw one line under the subject. Draw two lines under the verb in parentheses that agrees with the subject. Each of the girls (has, have) her own locker. 1. The monkeys in the zoo (climbs, climb) trees all day long. 2. Students from all over the country (attends, attend) day camp every spring. 3. Cookies fresh from the oven (tastes, taste) delicious. 4. Drivers from the freight company (travels, travel) across the country. 5. A truckload of band uniforms (arrives, arrive) Saturday. 6. Millions of persons (listens, listen) to radio every day. 7. A sergeant from the police department (teaches, teach) bicycle safety at our school. Unit 8, Subject-Verb Agreement 171 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 8. Roots from the mesquite tree (extends, extend) far below the ground. 9. A ticket for front-row seats (costs, cost) too much. 10. The restaurant with the chairs and tables in front of it (serves, serve) authentic Hawaiian food. 11. Suitcases with an extra pouch (holds, hold) extra clothes. 12. The fireworks at the city park (begins, begin) at 9:30 P.M. 14. Teams in the City League (scores, score) more touchdowns than any other teams in the county. 15. Here (is, are) the book that belongs to Kim. 16. The president of the United States (lives, live) in the White House. 17. Hamburgers at this restaurant (comes, come) with tomatoes, lettuce, and cheese. 18. Trees near the top of the mountain (needs, need) more water. 19. The glue on postage stamps (contains, contain) flavoring to make it taste better. 20. The photographer from the school paper (wants, want) us to smile for the class picture. 21. All of the visitors to the museum (receives, receive) a souvenir. 22. The school year in this district (lasts, last) nine months and two weeks. 23. The lockers in this building (stands, stand) more than six feet high. 24. The core of Earth (contains, contain) molten iron. 25. There (is, are) reptile eggs in that leathery covering. 26. Each of the birds in the wetlands (wears, wear) an identification tag. 27. The leader of the circus clowns (works, work) in a bank during the week. 28. The organist in Rhonda’s church also (plays, play) at the baseball stadium. 29. The cider from Washington apples (has, have) a pleasant aroma. 30. Class pictures from the 1980s (hangs, hang) in the halls. 31. Light from the sun (reaches, reach) Earth in eight minutes. 32. The sound of the crickets (interrupts, interrupt) the quiet night. 172 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 13. Patterns from the Smith Clothing Catalog (requires, require) careful cutting. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 51 Agreement with Compound Subjects A compound subject is two or more subjects that have the same verb. When two or more subjects are joined by and, the verb is plural. William and Sandy live on the same block. Both trees and flowers require sunlight. Elaine and her brothers play in the band. Grammar Compound subjects can also be joined by or, either...or, and neither...nor. In these cases, the verb must agree with the subject that is closer to it. Dana or Maria knows the answer. Either Dana or his study partners know the answer. Neither the fifth-graders nor Dana knows the answer.  Exercise 1 Draw two lines under the verb in parentheses that agrees with the subject. Both Florida and Hawaii (has, have) beautiful beaches. 1. Neither shoes nor jackets (fits, fit) in these lockers. 2. Tomas and his brothers (runs, run) in the marathon every year. 3. Both the mayor and the governor (has, have) offices downtown. 4. Either cotton or wool (feels, feel) comfortable. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 5. Elephants and rhinos (lives, live) in the jungles of Africa. 6. Both the orchestra conductor and the musicians (studies, study) classical music for years. 7. Either newspapers or a magazine (contains, contain) advertisements. 8. Martha and Jean (walks, walk) to school when the weather is warm. 9. Neither snow nor ice (stays, stay) on the ground after the spring thaw. 10. Blisters and bruises may (appears, appear) on one’s hands after doing yardwork. 11. Heat or smoke by the door (warns, warn) of a fire on the other side. 12. Both badminton and tennis (uses, use) a net to divide the two halves of the court. 13. Bowlers and gymnasts (competes, compete) indoors. Unit 8, Subject-Verb Agreement 173 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 14. Neither skateboards nor roller skates (is permitted, are permitted) in the parking area. 15. In many cities, cars and bicycles (shares, share) the same road. 16. Both glass and plastic (holds, hold) water. 17. Neither the dancers nor the instructor (thinks, think) the stage is too slippery. 18. Palm trees and bushes (provides, provide) shade. 19. Dolphins and whales (belongs, belong) to the same order of mammals. 21. Orange juice or grapefruit juice (has, have) plenty of Vitamin C. 22. Carpenters and electricians (serves, serve) apprenticeships before starting their own businesses. 23. Either the ocean or the pool (is, are) a pleasant place to relax. 24. Electric bulbs and candles (creates, create) light. 25. African elephants and Indian elephants (has, have) different facial features. 26. Yarn and silk (is used, are used) for embroidery. 27. Both the arcade and the amusement park (closes, close) after Labor Day. 28. A map or a navigation chart (shows, show) where to find the coral reef. 29. Billboards and posters (advertises, advertise) new movies. 30. Neither wood nor bricks (keeps, keep) out all of the cold weather. 31. Both dogs and cats (enjoys, enjoy) running in the park. 32. Joel and Adam (plays, play) video games on weekends. 33. Neither boots nor galoshes (leaks, leak) in wet weather. 34. Gerbils and hamsters (runs, run) on stationary wheels. 35. A calculator or a computer (solves, solve) difficult math problems. 36. Kanisha and John (sings, sing) a duet in the school play. 37. A postcard or an entry form (is, are) acceptable. 38. A pitcher and a catcher (communicates, communicate) with hand signals. 39. Neither a mop nor a sponge (absorbs, absorb) all the water. 40. Water and oil (does, do) not mix. 174 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 20. Mrs. Trinh and Mr. Walton (teaches, teach) at City College in the summer. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 8 Review  Exercise 1 Draw two lines under the verb in parentheses that agrees with the subject. There by the building (is, are) a large tree. 1. The Amazon River basin (covers, cover) one-third of Brazil. 2. A cool breeze (chills, chill) the air on a hot summer day. Grammar 3. Sharks (roams, roam) the oceans looking for things to eat. 4. Yoshi (plays, play) the clarinet in the school band. 5. We (has seen, have seen) this movie before. 6. Ashley (prefers, prefer) French fries to potato chips. 7. Our teacher (goes, go) to the beach every summer. 8. Cartoons (has, have) many hand-drawn scenes. 9. Young children (imitates, imitate) the actions of their parents, sisters, and brothers. 10. Professional athletes (trains, train) for years to learn their sport. 11. A bugle (sounds, sound) similar to a trumpet. 12. Toni (wants, want) to play goalie next quarter. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 13. Birds (flies, fly) from one tree to another. 14. She (sings, sing) in the church choir. 15. Mushrooms (grows, grow) in damp, dark forests. 16. A canoe (holds, hold) one or two people. 17. My city (has, have) a large fireworks display every Fourth of July. 18. Cactus plants (retains, retain) water. 19. I (rides, ride) the number 8 bus to go to school. 20. The theater (shows, show) a new movie every two weeks. 21. The leaders of every country (talks, talk) to each other once a year. 22. A hike up the mountain (requires, require) plenty of strength. Unit 8, Subject-Verb Agreement 175 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Cumulative Review: Units 1–8  Exercise 1 Draw one line under each complete subject. Draw two lines under each complete predicate. The fish in the pond swam back and forth. 1. Everyone at the party had a great time. 3. Each contestant chose a category and answered a question. 4. A bubbling brook meandered through the mountains. 5. Christopher opened the mysterious box, but Lisa closed it quickly. 6. The rally ended with two stirring speeches and the singing of the national anthem. 7. An explosion came from the chemistry lab. 8. Sixteen teams will play in the annual tournament. 9. Cardinals and blue jays are common in this area. 10. The Tylers are moving to Chicago in February. 11. We will study black holes in science class today. 12. Some television programs seem educational as well as entertaining. 13. Our field hockey team won the championship last year, and they may win again this year. 14. Dad tells funny jokes at the dinner table. 15. You should try white-water rafting sometime. 16. Talia asked about the value of the gemstones. 17. The cooking instructor taught us a recipe for beef burgundy. 18. The recreation center has an indoor swimming pool. 19. Jackie is flying home for her grandma’s birthday. 20. Silence reigned throughout the large library. 176 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 2. This book has many interesting facts. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 2 Write the part of speech of the italicized word in the blank. Use these abbreviations: N (noun), V (verb), pro. (pronoun), adj. (adjective), adv. (adverb), prep. (preposition), conj. (conjunction), and int. (interjection). adj. V prep. N We have three maple trees in our backyard. 1. Todd raced to the corner store. 2. Pictures in the museum hang on special hooks. 3. Conservation of rare animals requires careful planning. 4. The pedals on a bicycle spin in both directions. adv. 5. Student athletes are constantly working, either in the classroom or on the Grammar prep. playing field. int. conj. 7. Alison and Sydney rode the roller coaster twice. pro. 8. He always brings his lunch in a brown paper sack. adj. 9. Mom bought a blue sweater to wear with her white skirt. adv. N pro. V conj. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 6. Wow! That band plays great music. 10. Carrie often stops at the music store after school. 11. Give your ticket to the usher. 12. Yesterday we tried the new Mexican restaurant. 13. Roberto really enjoyed his trip to the planetarium. 14. The letter contained valuable information, but Nora did not know what to do with it. int. 15. Well, I always thought he would come back to his hometown. adv. 16. Lucia was truly surprised at the reception she received. prep. 17. The ball of yarn rolled under the dining room table. adj. 18. The poem was long, but it was also quite beautiful. V 19. The firecracker exploded into a hundred twinkling lights. N 20. Jasmine adored the playful puppy in the pet shop window. Unit 8, Subject-Verb Agreement 177 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 3 Draw two lines under the verb in parentheses that agrees with the subject. The men in my family (has, have) red hair. 1. Members of the soccer team (wears, wear) special shoes for wet fields. 2. Squirrels in the park (gathers, gather) nuts for the winter. 3. The announcer on TV (says, say) it is going to rain this weekend. 4. A camel’s water supply (lasts, last) for many days. 6. Vacations by the beach (ends, end) too quickly. 7. The runners on sleds easily (glides, glide) over fresh snow. 8. Libraries and museums (adds, add) culture to a city. 9. Hot chocolate or soup (warms, warm) you up on a cold winter day. 10. Old trunks and treasure chests (hides, hide) many interesting things. 11. Oil and gas (forms, form) underground. 12. Both Democrats and Republicans (campaigns, campaign) for political offices. 13. Neither rivers nor streams (runs, run) uphill. 14. Factories and mills (manufactures, manufacture) products for people to buy. 15. Both frogs and toads (croaks, croak) in the swamps. 16. A bell or chimes (rings, ring) on the hour. 17. The space shuttle and satellites (orbits, orbit) Earth. 18. Neither Will nor his sisters (rides, ride) our school bus this year. 19. Sand and cactus plants (bakes, bake) in the desert sun. 20. Both butterflies and moths (goes, go) through several stages of development. 21. Either a coat or a parka (provides, provide) warmth in the winter. 22. Dolphins and tuna (swims, swim) in groups. 23. Either a rainbow or floods (follows, follow) a storm. 24. Both decorations and ornaments (brightens, brighten) up a room. 25. Statues and monuments (honors, honor) outstanding individuals. 178 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 5. The cans of paint (weighs, weigh) seven pounds each. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 9: Diagraming Sentences Lesson 52 Diagraming Simple Subjects and Simple Predicates Grammar To diagram a sentence, first draw a long horizontal line. Then draw a short vertical line that crosses the horizontal line. Write the simple subject to the left of the vertical line. Write the simple predicate to the right of the vertical line. When diagraming sentences, use capital letters as they appear in the sentence, but do not use punctuation. Dynamite explodes. Dynamite explodes Write only the simple subject and the simple predicate in this part of the diagram. Remember that the simple predicate can include a helping verb. The dynamite will explode on schedule. dynamite will explode Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill  Exercise 1 Diagram only the simple subject and the simple predicate of each sentence. 1. The store opens early on Saturday. 2. My aunt works as a chemist. Unit 9, Diagraming Sentences 179 3. A torch lit the way. 7. They named the collie pups Wynken, Blynken, and Nod. 4. The football team burst onto the field. 8. Tazu came to the library. 5. The Giraldis traveled through Italy last summer. 9. This movie is almost three hours long. 6. The heavy rainfall soaked the dry soil. 180 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 10. The sixth-grade girls won the volleyball tournament. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 53 Diagraming the Four Kinds of Sentences The simple subject and the simple predicate of four kinds of sentences are diagramed below. Notice that the location of the simple subject and the simple predicate in a sentence diagram is always the same, regardless of word order in the sentence. In an interrogative sentence the simple subject often comes between the two parts of a verb phrase. In an imperative sentence the simple subject is understood to be you. The house has central heat. house Grammar Declarative: has Interrogative: Does it have air conditioning? it Imperative: Does have Turn down the thermostat at ten o’clock. (you) Exclamatory: How warm it is in this room! it Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Turn is  Exercise 1 Diagram only the simple subject and the simple predicate. 1. Eli Whitney invented the cotton gin. 2. The ice cream will melt there. Unit 9, Diagraming Sentences 181 3. How much money do you need? 6. What a good movie that was! 4. Why did Sally call the emergency squad? 7. How odd this is! 5. What caused the stain on the living room rug? 8. Put the leftovers in the refrigerator. 182 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 54 Diagraming Direct and Indirect Objects and Predicate Words In a sentence diagram, the direct object is placed to the right of a vertical line after the action verb. Marissa threw the ball. Marissa threw ball Grammar Similarly, place the predicate noun to the right of the linking verb. Draw a slanted line to separate the verb from the predicate noun. Today’s special is blackened swordfish. special is swordfish Diagram a predicate adjective just as you would diagram a predicate noun. Edmund seems confused. Edmund seems confused In a diagram, the indirect object sits on a line below and to the right of the verb. Draw a slanted line to connect the indirect object to the verb. Marissa threw Jake the ball. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Marissa threw ball Jake  Exercise 1 Diagram the simple subject, simple predicate, direct or indirect object, and predicate noun or adjective. 1. The library needs volunteers. 2. Yoshitaka finished the pizza. Unit 9, Diagraming Sentences 183 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 6. Aunt Eleanor bought me tickets. 4. The sudden rain soaked the ground. 7. This watermelon tastes so sweet! 5. Please hand me that bowl. 8. Katherine read Alexandra a story. 184 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 3. Mom gave me a hug. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 55 Diagraming Adjectives and Adverbs An adjective modifies a noun or a pronoun. In a diagram write the adjective on a slanted line beneath the noun or the pronoun it modifies. Diagram possessive nouns and pronouns and the articles a, an, and the just as you would diagram other kinds of adjectives. The sturdy house withstood the violent storm. house withstood storm Grammar t en ol vi e th dy ur st e Th An adverb can modify a verb, an adjective, or another adverb. Notice how adverbs are diagramed. The extraordinarily loud noise woke us immediately. noise woke us Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill ily ar in rd ao tr ex ly te ia ed m im ud lo e Th  Exercise 1 Diagram each sentence. 1. The beautiful cherry blossoms attract many visitors. 2. The bright colors caught the infant’s attention. Unit 9, Diagraming Sentences 185 3. Anne slept late yesterday. 6. Do not give me so much spaghetti! 4. The wren chirped merrily. 7. Alfonso always works very carefully. 5. The long, curvy road suddenly disappeared. 8. This lesson confuses me somewhat. 186 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 56 Diagraming Prepositional Phrases All prepositional phrases, whether used as an adjective or as an adverb, are diagramed the same way. Used as an adjective: The boxes under the stairs are full. boxes are full Grammar r de un e Th stairs e th Used as an adverb: Hector put Hector put the boxes under the stairs. boxes e th r de un stairs e th Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill  Exercise 1 Diagram each sentence. 1. Toni’s letter from Italy arrived earlier. 3. My brother paints pictures of lions. 2. The garden under the grape arbor is Grandma’s favorite. 4. Put your coat on a hook by the back door. Unit 9, Diagraming Sentences 187 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 8. Mr. Larkspur’s surprise was the package outside the classroom door. 6. The brick house above the river’s delta was built in the last century. 9. The flags of all the participating countries fluttered in the breeze. 7. Can you come to my house after the game? 188 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 10. We built a platform for my bed above my other furniture. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 5. The shelves beneath the books hold family heirlooms. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 57 Diagraming Compound Sentence Parts When you diagram compound parts of a sentence, place the second part of the compound below the first. Compound Subject: Casaba and cantaloupe are melons. Casaba and are melons Compound Predicate: Grammar cantaloupe Fruit trees grow and blossom. grow and trees t ui Fr blossom Compound Sentence: Some fruits are sweet, but some have a tart taste. fruits are sweet e m So but some have taste Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill rt ta a  Exercise 1 Diagram each sentence. 1. Geanna or Rodolfo could do the artwork. 2. The library and the post office close at noon on Saturday. Unit 9, Diagraming Sentences 189 3. It rains often and hails seldom. 6. Irene and Hoshi raked the leaves, and Toshiko and Olivia carried them. 4. Peter pushed the door, but it was heavy. 7. Bright colors and unusual shapes will help these posters. 5. Dad vacuumed and dusted. 8. Sharps and flats can change the mood of the music. 190 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 9 Review  Exercise 1 Diagram each sentence. 4. The excited children scampered quickly into the decorated room. 2. Mrs. Peterson sent us six blankets for the refugees. 5. My brother plays a harmonica, and my sister sings. 3. Give Glenda the extra tickets. 6. Eugene and Edgar usually like the same things. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar 1. Do you know Mr. Sweeney? Unit 9, Diagraming Sentences 191 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Cumulative Review: Units 1–9  Exercise 1 Write S if the sentence is a simple sentence, C if it is compound, or frag. if it is a sentence fragment. Robins sing, and turkeys gobble. C 1. Cats meow, and dogs bark. C 2. Wind moves sailing ships, but a motor powers a speedboat. S 3. Jenny and Francine went to the Somerset County Fair together. frag. 4. The antique biplane on the wide cement runway. C 5. Miriam studies French every day, but Askalu studies Swahili only once in a while. S 6. My brand-new computer has a hard drive and a modem. frag. 7. Growing in the garden, down by the old broken birdbath. C 8. The grass needs mowing, and the garage needs painting. S 9. I forgot all about that big history test on Monday. frag. 10. The brand-new notebook and the dirty blue jacket. C 11. I shall seal this big envelope, and Darla will mail it for me. S 12. Those bananas are growing browner every day. S 13. My aunt Kanya still reads to me from her collection of storybooks. S 14. The gray clouds made the day dreary. S 15. Jeff saw his friends Tommy and Jamal in the park. C 16. Lightning flashes frighten me, but I like the sound of thunder. S 17. Why is the road crew working in front of our house again? S 18. In spite of its appearance, our old car runs pretty well. S 19. Do you remember the Smith family: Michael, Brandon, Sara, and Elizabeth? frag. 20. Bright red robin on the long, twisted tree branch. S 21. Your new ten-speed bicycle flies down the road so swiftly and smoothly! C 22. I smell that delicious apple pie, and I can almost taste it. frag. 23. Exciting stories about actual events and real heroes. 192 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar C Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ S 24. Cindy and Carla quite often practice their music after school. C 25. Glenn could come tomorrow, but he cannot make it today. S 26. The canary’s song is soothing. C 27. Mr. Raintree sings one part, and we follow with ours. frag. 28. A stormy sea and high winds, black sky and occasional lightning. pres. perf. past prog. 1. Ms. Johnson was giving a test in the next room. P 2. The hours creep by slowly on rainy afternoons. pres. prog. 3. I am drawing a picture for art class. past perf. 4. Sally had woven that scarf before her twelfth birthday. pres. perf. 5. Have you ever ridden a horse? past pres. perf. P past Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill The puppy has stolen one of Dad’s new blue slippers. pres. perf. P past P 6. I woke up at four in the morning. 7. The flowers have grown fast in this wet weather. 8. Your voice reminds me of someone else. 9. Conor threw the final strikeout pitch in our game against Central. 10. Who has seen my old green jacket? 11. I collect rocks, stamps, and old coins. 12. The fans stared at their favorite actor as he walked in. 13. Sharon sings in the choir. pres. perf. 14. That dog has bitten people before. pres. perf. 15. They have weathered many storms throughout their years together. pres. prog. 16. Are you leaving soon? past perf. 17. Paul had swept the room carefully. P pres. perf. 18. The maple trees provide shade on a hot day. 19. Mrs. Baughman has paid me for mowing her yard. Unit 9, Diagraming Sentences 193 Grammar  Exercise 2 Write P if the verb is in the present tense, pres. prog. if present progressive, pres. perf. if present perfect, past if past tense, past prog. if past progressive, and past perf. if past perfect. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ pres. prog. 20. I am holding the ladder steady. pres. perf. 21. The snow has come at last! P 22. The wind rattles the window panes. P 23. My bird feeder hangs on a limb outside my bedroom window. 24. The baron rose and stood by the window, dreaming of his princess. past perf. 25. The meat had not frozen properly. pres. prog. 26. I’m teaching my puppy to sit, roll over, and fetch. pres. perf. 27. That tree has stood there for hundreds of years. P 28. The little field mouse hides timidly under the tulip leaves.  Exercise 3 Write pro. if the italicized noun is a proper noun, com. if it is a common noun, or col. if it is a collective noun. For nouns that are both common and collective, wirte col. col. The group has decided not to pay for a new slide projector. col. 1. The family will buy this land for a new store. pro. 2. Mrs. Smith will teach our class next week. pro. 3. Dr. Johnson says a lot of funny things when I visit him. col. 4. When will the legislature vote on that bill? com. 5. The Carlson’s dog is always in our yard. pro. 6. Tom Sawyer is one of my favorite story characters. col. 7. The cheerleading squad will practice after school on Tuesday. com. 8. What’s the name of the actor who played the butler? pro. 9. President Abraham Lincoln is my favorite American leader. col. 10. According to Bob, our class will go on a field trip next week. com. 11. The alligator crossed the road right in front of us! com. 12. The giant battleship is now a war memorial for our state. col. 13. My brother’s army battalion will pass through our town today. com. 14. The clouds looked like white feathers on the underwing of the sky. com. 15. Although cricket is played with a ball and a bat, it is different from baseball. 194 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Grammar past Usage Glossary Usage 195 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 10: Usage Glossary Lesson 58 Usage: accept to a lot Words that are similar are sometimes misused. accept, except Accept means “to receive.” Except means “other than.” Linda accepted the award. Kim knew all of the answers except two. all ready, already All ready means “completely prepared.” Already means “by this time.” The Flints were all ready for their vacation. I already mowed the lawn. all together, altogether All together means “in a group.” Altogether means “completely.” Albert was altogether sure of the song’s title. Usage The puppies ran all together. a lot A lot means “very much.” It is always two words. Because a lot is unclear, it is better to use words such as often, many, or much. Mr. Alvarez called the hospital often. She showed much courage.  Exercise 1 Underline the word or words in parentheses that best complete each sentence. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mitsuyo did not (accept, except) money for weeding her grandmother’s garden. 1. Our clothes were (all together, altogether) ruined by the old washing machine. 2. My mother makes spaghetti for dinner (a lot, often). 3. (Accept, Except) for tying my shoes, I was (all ready, already) to go. 4. My aunts and uncles could not remember the last time they were (all together, altogether). 5. Emilio is (all ready, already) studying for the test. 6. It rains (a lot, often) in the summer. 7. Cody had (all ready, already) eaten breakfast by the time we woke up. 8. The marching band got (a lot of, very much) exercise. 9. Dana was (all together, altogether) surprised by the birthday party. Unit 10, Usage Glossary 197 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 10. (Accept, Except) for a few loyal fans, the stadium was empty. 11. The deer were (all ready, already) to protect their young. 12. Does the arcade (accept, except) tokens or coins? 13. By the time Mom arrived to pick us up, we had (all ready, already) left. 14. My friends and I go to (a lot of, many) movies. 15. The village was (all together, altogether) destroyed by the floods.  Exercise 2 Write in the blank the correct form of the word or words in italics. If the sentence is correct, write C in the blank. already When we arrived, the party had all ready begun. accept 1. The vending machine will not except dollar bills. already C accept 2. Our drama teacher asked if we would rather practice all together or alone. 3. The sun had all ready set when we left the picnic. 4. All together we earned fifteen dollars. 5. It was hard for the basketball team to except the defeat. all ready 6. Our backpacks full, Ted and I were already for the long hike. Except 7. Accept for the lima beans, my sister eagerly ate everything on her plate. all ready C except 8. Dinner was already when we got home. 9. My cousin was already walking by the time she was nine months old! 10. The camp was quiet accept for the chirping of crickets. altogether 11. We were all together stunned by the news. very much 12. We liked the new Russian exchange student a lot. C except all together 13. The frisky puppy was all ready for the walk. 14. We rode every roller coaster at the park accept one. 15. The CDs are piled altogether on the shelf in my closet. 198 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Usage C Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 59 Usage: beside to chose beside, besides Beside means “next to.” Besides means “in addition to.” The ducklings waddled beside their mother. Besides the goldfish, we have only one pet. among, between Use between for two people, things, or groups. Use among for three or more people, things, or groups. The pizza place is between the laundromat and the drugstore. A little boy was among those hurt in the accident. choose, chose Choose means to “to select.” Chose is the past tense of choose. Harriet didn’t know which drink to choose. Yesterday the kitten chose the ball of string to play with. Usage  Exercise 1 Underline the word in parentheses that best completes each sentence. (Beside, Besides) my coat, I wore gloves and a hat. 1. Because I couldn’t do both, I had to choose (among, between) piano and flute lessons. 2. Kesia (choose, chose) two challenging computer games to play. 3. The contest was (among, between) our two classes. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 4. Marty carefully (choose, chose) a book from the library. 5. The yellow bus parked (beside, besides) the football field. 6. A picture of my grandparents appeared (among, between) the photographs in the attic. 7. Last Saturday we (choose, chose) a shady spot for our picnic. 8. (Beside, Besides) Kim, who else will volunteer to pass out tests? 9. (Among, Between) the two cities was an old bridge. 10. Cheng-Yu is standing (beside, besides) the water fountain. 11. The little boy knew he had to (choose, chose) a balloon. 12. I will (choose, chose) a movie everyone will like. 13. (Beside, Besides) skating, I also like swimming. Unit 10, Usage Glossary 199 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 14. (Among, Between) the books at the library were several about the Civil War. 15. The chair (beside, besides) me was empty.  Exercise 2 Write in the blank the correct form of the word in italics. If the italicized word is correct, write C in the blank. C 1. To earn money for college is among the reasons my brother got a summer job. Among 2. Between all the flowers in the garden was a patch of weeds. chose 3. The squirrel choose a hiding place for its nuts. Besides C Usage The boy standing besides me in the picture is my cousin Tom. 4. Beside an entertaining elephant act, the circus also presented a funny clown show. 5. Meagan chose chocolate ice cream for dessert. beside 6. Tara left her glasses on the table besides the bed. choose 7. The magician told me to chose any card from the deck. C 8. Last night Tonya chose the runt of the litter as her new puppy. between 9. The exciting soccer game among the two schools ended in a tie. choose C among C 10. The whole family will chose a name for the kitten. 11. Dad took a picture of me standing beside the Liberty Bell. 12. A seashell was between the many souvenirs I brought home. 13. Because it was so hot yesterday, Akira and I chose to go swimming. Besides 14. Beside soccer, Michael also plays hockey. between 15. My book fell into the space among the couch and the wall.  Writing Link Choose one or two of the word pairs in this lesson. Write a humorous sentence that will help you remember how to use those words correctly. 200 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill beside Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 60 Usage: in to learn in, into In means “inside.” Into indicates an action toward the inside. The pie was baking in the oven. The batter hit the ball into the outfield. its, it’s Its is the possessive form of it. It’s is the contraction of it is. The cat licked its paws after eating. It’s a good idea to exercise. lay, lie Lay means “to place.” Lie means “to recline.” I always lay my jacket on the chair. The doctor told the patient to lie on the cot. learn, teach Learn means to “to gain knowledge.” Teach means “to give knowledge.” We learned a new Spanish word. Edward teaches his brother basketball plays. Usage  Exercise 1 Underline the word in parentheses that best completes each sentence. (Its, It’s) not often that we see a raccoon in our backyard. 1. Our cat likes to (lay, lie) on the windowsill and look outside. 2. Ellen slowly poured the milk (in, into) a glass. 3. The dog wagged (its, it’s) tail when I scratched its ears. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 4. Tomorrow our teacher will (learn, teach) us about the layers of Earth’s crust. 5. Miyoki is putting the cookie dough (in, into) the oven. 6. (Its, It’s) important to get a good education. 7. Because I’ve never used a printer before, I asked Mrs. Vega to (learn, teach) me how. 8. (Lay, Lie) your pencils down after finishing the quiz. 9. My mom keeps a big old trunk (in, into) our basement. 10. The cheetah was (laying, lying) in the cool grass. 11. Children can (learn, teach) to swim at a very young age. 12. The monkey scratched (its, it’s) stomach and screeched with pleasure. 13. Mark began to (lay, lie) the dishes on the counter. Unit 10, Usage Glossary 201 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 14. Cheryl dove (in, into) the water with a huge splash. 15. Do you think (its, it’s) harder to get up early when it is cold outside?  Exercise 2 Write in the blank the correct form of the word in italics. If the italicized word is correct, write C in the blank. teach C lay learn 1. Elliot tried to learn his baby parakeet to say “Hello.” 2. We raked the leaves and put them into big bags. 3. If you lie the marshmallow on a hot surface, it will melt. 4. Marsha wants to teach several French words before she goes to Quebec. in 5. The festival was held into the school’s gymnasium. lay 6. We know better than to lie wet towels on the floor. C Usage My mother drove the car in the garage. into C 7. Juan played chess with his friends in the living room. 8. I got goosebumps as we walked in the cold movie theater. 9. Florida has Tallahassee as its capital city. teach 10. Can you learn me to do that neat card trick? It’s 11. Its too late in the season to go bird watching. C 12. Laura is learning to play the piano. its 13. The watchdog bared it’s sharp, white teeth. lie 14. After the race we were ready to lay down and rest. C 15. Alfonso is sitting in the dentist’s waiting room.  Writing Link Write a brief paragraph describing your house or apartment. Include the words in, into, its, it’s, lay, and lie. 202 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill into Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 61 Usage: leave to sit leave, let Leave means “to go away.” Let means “to allow.” Don’t leave before saying good-bye. The guard won’t let them inside the fence. loose, lose Loose means “not firmly attached.” Lose means “to misplace” or “to fail to win.” Mike’s clothes were loose after he lost weight. Did you lose the video game? raise, rise Raise means “to cause to move up.” Rise means “to move upward.” The cat raises its head when the door opens. Dough rises slowly. set, sit Set means “to place” or “to put.” Sit means “to place oneself in a seated position.” Fido likes to set his chin on my knee. Jason was grateful to sit down. Usage  Exercise 1 Underline the word in parentheses that best completes each sentence. The team could not afford to (loose, lose) another game. 1. Ricardo will (set, sit) the oars inside the canoe. 2. Dad will (leave, let) me help him paint the fence in our backyard. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 3. I always (raise, rise) the blinds in my room, rain or shine. 4. My little sister’s front tooth is (loose, lose). 5. The curtain in the auditorium squeaks when it (raises, rises). 6. Our group sometimes (sets, sits) in the library for long periods of time. 7. My sister (leaves, lets) me interview her for my school project. 8. Warm air always (raises, rises). 9. The (loose, lose) shutters flapped in the breeze. 10. If we (leave, let) by six, we can make it to the early movie. 11. Jill will (sit, set) her books down so that she can help Angel with her crutches. 12. The candidate will (raise, rise) many issues if she is elected. 13. If your shoestrings are too (loose, lose), you could fall and get hurt. Unit 10, Usage Glossary 203 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 14. Will your parents (leave, let) you camp out in the backyard? 15. (Sit, Set) a bowl of milk on the floor for the kitten. 16. Luis was careful not to (loose, lose) his lunch money. 17. We were often reminded to (sit, set) up straight. 18. Dad had to (leave, let) work early to pick us up. 19. The fog seemed to (raise, rise) off the ground. 20. As we hike we are careful to watch for (loose, lose) rocks.  Exercise 2 Write in the blank the correct form of the word in italics. If the italicized word is correct, write C in the blank. Usage C Hot-air balloons raise from the ground. 1. Mom will let me watch TV if my homework is done. raise 2. We rise the flag every morning. sits 3. My dad always sets at the head of the table. C 4. Paul is careful not to lose his door key. let 5. I often leave my brother ride my bike. loose rise C lose set 6. Our dog sometimes gets lose. 7. The cake we baked never seemed to raise. 8. Can we leave the party early? 9. Do you think we will loose the gymnastics meet? 10. I helped my brother sit the table. leave 11. Please let your bike in the bike rack. C 12. Zach always seems to lose his radio. let 13. Will you leave me ride your skateboard? C 14. The chain on her bike is always loose. rise 15. The day we went fishing we saw the sun raise. C 16. My dad has to leave by seven to go to work. sit 17. I always set on a beanbag chair when I read. C 18. The mechanics had to raise the car to see under it. 204 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill rise Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 62 Usage: than to whose than, then Than introduces the second part of a comparison. Then means “at that time” or “after that.” A viola is larger than a violin. Let’s eat dinner, and then we’ll play tennis. their, they’re Their is the possessive form of they. They’re is the contraction of they are. They put on their uniforms. They’re playing basketball tonight. to, too, two To means “in the direction of.” Too means “also” or “to an excessive degree.” Two is the number after one. We go to the bank. May I go, too? Jo drank two glasses of juice. The soup is too hot. Who’s going to the movie? Usage who’s, whose Who’s is the contraction of who is. Whose is the possessive form of who. Whose tickets are these?  Exercise 1 Underline the word in parentheses that best completes each sentence. Australia is the only country that is a continent (to, too). 1. Australia is smaller (than, then) any of the other continents. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 2. It is bordered by (too, two) oceans, the Indian Ocean and the Pacific Ocean. 3. Australia is made up of five mainland states, one island state, and (too, two) territories. 4. Captain James Cook, (whose, who’s) voyages led him (to, too) Australia, claimed it for Great Britain in 1770. 5. Australians were influenced by the English in (they’re, their) language and customs. 6. If you go to Australia, (than, then) you must drive on the left side of the road! 7. Animals native (to, too) Australia include kangaroos, platypuses, koalas, and wallabies. 8. For Australians, wheat is one of (their, they’re) main crops. 9. Mining is an important economic activity, (two, too). 10. Australia has a different type of government (than, then) the United States. 11. It is a commonwealth (whose, who’s) legislative body is a parliament. Unit 10, Usage Glossary 205 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 12. Canberra, Australia’s capital, is smaller (than, then) most state capitals. 13. Sydney, which is home (to, too) the Sydney Opera House, is the largest and oldest city. 14. The interior of the country, called the outback, is where people have (they’re, their) cattle and sheep farms. 15. There are few paved roads for these farm families, so (their, they’re) quite isolated.  Exercise 2 Write in the blank the correct form of the word in italics. If the italicized word is correct, write C in the blank. Usage they’re An Aborigine is a person whose native to Australia. 1. Today, however, their only a small portion of the Australian population. to 2. Before the Europeans came too Australia, the Aborigines made up a large part of Australia’s population. C 3. Nearly five hundred different groups, speaking many different languages, existed then. C 4. The Aborigines were nomads whose migratory way of life allowed them to have few belongings. two 5. They existed by doing to things—hunting and gathering. too 6. Religion was a large part of their culture, to. Their They’re 7. They’re belief was that humans were a part of nature. 8. Their part of a society based on a kinship system. C 9. Their artistic productions included ritual objects, cave paintings, and engravings. C 10. Drama, dance, and poetry played an important role in their culture, too. Then whose than They’re C 11. Than, after Europeans arrived about 1788, Aboriginal societies diminished. 12. Those who’s societies continued were unable to maintain their cultures. 13. Australian Aborigines are now more a part of modern Australia then they used to be. 14. Their entitled to the same rights as other Australian citizens. 15. They’re people whose identity and heritage are important to them. 206 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill who’s Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 10 Review  Exercise 1 Underline the word in parentheses that best completes each sentence. I reminded Leah not to (leave, let) without saying good-bye. 1. The plane moved (in, into) the hangar for repairs. 2. Swimmers had to choose (among, between) morning or afternoon practices. 3. (Beside, Besides) being fun, tennis is also good exercise. 4. Darryl (choose, chose) the striped scarf instead of the plain one. 5. After school I sometimes (lay, lie) down and take a nap. 6. Alejandra wants to (learn, teach) kindergarten someday. 7. We (all ready, already) had plans when Aunt Karen called. Usage 8. Tammy is almost ready to (accept, except) the responsibility of baby-sitting. 9. We were (all together, altogether) exhausted after a day at the science museum. 10. (Its, It’s) not unusual to find harmless snakes in the woods. 11. Taking the subway is quicker (than, then) taking the bus. 12. Randy (leaves, lets) me borrow his new CD. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 13. (Whose, Who’s) umbrella was left on the bus? 14. (Raise, Rise) your hand if you’re interested in going on the field trip. 15. Candy always (sets, sits) with us at lunch. 16. The youth groups are holding (their, they’re) annual picnic. 17. Ana is (to, too) sick to want to go to the movie. 18. (Whose, Who’s) in charge of taking attendance? 19. Our neighbors have a bicycle made for (too, two). 20. He will attend college and (than, then) go on to medical school. Unit 10, Usage Glossary 207 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Cumulative Review: Units 1–10  Exercise 1 Draw a vertical line between each subject and predicate. Draw one line under each simple subject and two lines under each simple predicate. The marching band will play at the parade. 1. Corinne sings in the choir at church. 2. The crying child was calmed by his mother. 3. The ice cream melted in the sun. 4. The pizza parlor becomes busy every Friday night. 5. Our math teacher rarely gives us homework. 6. All of the sixth graders are going on a field trip. 8. Tracy forgot her lunch today. 9. Most meteor showers come from the debris of comets. 10. Mark Twain was the pen name of the author Samuel Clemens. 11. Mark, Isaiah, Shana, and Micah met Mr. Lee on their way to the new mall. 12. The ocean water tasted salty. 13. The families in our neighborhood save and recycle their cans and newspapers. 14. The salad with the artichoke hearts tasted delicious. 15. The black stallion ran away and jumped over the fence. 16. Our team did well in the game on Saturday. 17. Bala is my sister’s science tutor. 18. The student committee voted for a car wash on Saturday. 19. The soccer team won its third game in a row. 20. My uncle’s job a car and a uniform. 208 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Usage 7. Several inches of snow fell overnight. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 2 Draw two lines under each verb or verb phrase. In the blank write the tense or form of the verb: present, past, future, pres. prog. (present progressive), past prog. (past progressive), present perfect, or past perfect. future past past perfect present past prog. present perfect 1. Yumiko arrived after dinner. 2. By the age of five, Jen had learned many songs on the piano. 3. We visit my grandfather once a week. 4. The members of the orchestra were tuning their instruments. 5. I have already finished my homework. pres. prog. 6. My aunt is flying in from Kansas tonight. past perfect 7. Chuck had been a Boy Scout for two years. past prog. future pres. prog. past present perfect past perfect past prog. 8. The frog was jumping from rock to rock. 9. I will have a paper route next year. Usage present Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Kelly will go to the museum with her sister. 10. Terry auditions for all the school plays. 11. Where is Wendy playing tennis? 12. Kevin sprained his ankle during the basketball game. 13. I have never bowled before. 14. The cat had eaten its dinner early. 15. The gymnasts were practicing their dismounts.  Exercise 3 Fill in the blank with the correct pronoun. Then circle the antecedent of the pronoun. Brenda could use some help with her homework. [ She is falling behind. 1. The Shermans visited last summer. [ They 2. We read that book in English. [ is an interesting one. It 3. José was involved in many sports. [ 4. The track coach broke his leg, so [ have five children. He he had to find time to finish his essay. will be out for a month. 5. Brian and Takeo played tennis. Jill and I watched [ 6. Judy put her glasses in her backpack because [ she them . didn’t want to lose them. Unit 10, Usage Glossary 209 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 7. The chipmunk buried the nuts. It would need [ 8. Mi Ling lost her pen, so I gave [ 9. The dogs were barking, and [ her in the winter. mine. they woke me up. 10. The monkeys at the zoo were very playful. [ 11. Moisha and I solved the mystery. [ them We They entertained us for an hour. were proud of ourselves. 12. Mrs. Lopez went to aerobics class every Sunday. It helped [ her 13. We took the recipes out of the box and organized [ . them 14. My mom and I finished shopping, and then the bus took [ 15. Rafael had a sore throat, so his dad took [ him us stay healthy. home. to the doctor. I was very glad I could fix the old bicycle. 1. My family finally bought a new minivan. 2. Julie described Boston as a beautiful city. 3. Benito already has a positive attitude. 4. Liz works extremely hard to get good grades. 5. A large rock partially covered the entrance to the cave. 6. Museums typically display rare paintings. 7. We walked quickly toward the warm campfire. 8. The red car stopped abruptly in front of the house. 9. The unique gift completely surprised Olivia. 10. Kevin carefully carved the wood into a small horse. 11. The open gate thumped loudly against the post. 12. Would the red cover look better than the blue one? 13. The band concert ended with a fast march. 14. Priscilla ran fast to catch the early bus. 15. The autumn leaves fell early this year. 210 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Usage  Exercise 4 Underline each adjective and circle each adverb. Ignore the articles a, an, and the. Mechanics Mechanics 211 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 11: Capitalization Lesson 63 Capitalizing Sentences, Quotations, and Salutations I To capitalize means to begin a word with a capital letter. Capitalize the first word of every sentence. This assignment is due early next week. The first word of a direct quotation is capitalized if the quotation is a complete sentence. Mrs. Crawford said, “Start with the dictionary.” Sometimes other words interrupt a direct quotation. Do not capitalize the beginning of the second part of an interrupted quotation unless the second part begins a new sentence. “Start with the dictionary,” said Mrs. Crawford, “where you can find a lot of useful facts.” “Start with the dictionary,” said Mrs. Crawford. “You can find a wealth of useful facts in the dictionary.” Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill “do you know,” asked Mrs. Crawford, “anybody in history named Webster?” C 1. “Daniel Webster,” answered Mark, “lived a long time ago.” 2. “yes, he did,” responded the teacher. “do you know another Webster?” 3. “I do,” ventured Tasha. “did he write Webster’s Dictionary?” 4. the other students did not add anything to the discussion. 5. everyone knew a project was waiting to be assigned. 6. “who wants to research dictionaries?” thought Arnoldo. “i certainly don’t.” C 7. Noah, however, thought that words were interesting to study. C 8. “I want everyone to look in an encyclopedia,” said Mrs. Crawford. 9. she suggested topics such as “dictionary,” “lexicographer,” and “Noah Webster.” Unit 11, Capitalization 213 Mechanics  Exercise 1 Draw three lines under each lowercase letter that should be capitalized. Write C in the blank if the sentence is correct. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 10. “hey,” thought Noah, “maybe Noah Webster invented the English language. that’s where I’m going to start.” 11. “then,” Mrs. Crawford added, “write five sentences.” 12. “give them to me on Friday,” the teacher said. “on Monday we will share our information.” C 13. Noah decided to start right away. 14. first Noah looked in the encyclopedia under “Noah Webster.” C 15. He didn’t see anything about Noah Webster’s inventing the English language. 16. however, the article noted that Noah Webster was an American lexicographer. C 17. “‘Lexicographer’ is one of the suggested topics,” Noah said to himself. C 18. “I don’t know what that word means,” said Noah out loud, “but I’m going to find out.” C 19. “Then I will know what’s so important about Noah Webster,” he continued. C 20. Noah looked for the word lexicographer in the dictionary. 21. “well, what do you know?” whistled Noah. “a lexicographer writes dictionaries!” 22. Noah read some interesting articles about Noah Webster. 23. he was eager to share information in class on Monday. C 24. Noah also wanted to hear what the other students had learned. 25. on Monday the teacher asked for volunteers. 26. Kofi reported, “he was born in Connecticut in 1758.” 27. “he fought with Washington in the Revolutionary War,” added Jeff. C 28. Marianne added that he wrote a spelling book and a dictionary. C 29. “Webster’s Dictionary was the first American dictionary,” contributed Noah. 30. he further explained, “Webster put new words in his dictionary, and he changed the spelling and pronunciation of others.” 31. “webster wanted his book to be a dictionary of American English.” 32. “the really important thing that Noah Webster did,” Noah said, “was to help make American English its own language.” 214 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mechanics C Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 64 Capitalizing Sentences, Quotations, and Salutations II Remember to capitalize the first word of a sentence and the first word of a direct quotation that is a complete sentence. “My pen pal,” said Mark, “lives in Germany.” “How long have you been writing to him?” asked Thad. “Does he have a friend?” Do not capitalize the first word of an indirect quotation. An indirect quotation does not appear in quotation marks and does not give a person’s exact words. Thad said that he had been writing to Karl for a year. Capitalize the first word in the salutation of a letter. Capitalize the title and the name of the person you are addressing. Capitalize the first word in the closing of a letter. Dear President Lincoln, Yours very truly,  Exercise 1 Draw three lines under each lowercase letter that should be capitalized. Draw a slash (/ ) through each capital letter that should be lowercase. Write C if the item is correct. Marty said That he appreciated our help. Mechanics 1. dear Mrs. lamont, Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 2. Harriet said that You would help me with my report. C 3. “Did Juan finish raking your leaves yesterday?” asked Mrs. Perez. 4. “yes,” said Mr. Sakamoto, “And he did a fine job.” 5. Your Friend, 6. Sara Jane said She liked the movie we saw. 7. Jeff wants to know If You will go with him. 8. Zorah shouted, “watch out below!” 9. Who said, “give me Liberty or give me death”? 10. Dear senator Smith, C 11. Sincerely yours, 12. did you ask your mother If I could stay overnight? Unit 11, Capitalization 215 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 13. The principal told us To do our best. 14. dear aunt Jo and Uncle bill, C 15. Bess told me her grandmother never learned to drive. 16. Respectfully Yours, 17. “have you seen the new science teacher, Beth?” asked Randy. 18. “I met her this morning,” replied Beth. “she seems very smart.” 19. someone told me She used to teach at a university. C 20. Dear friends and relatives, 21. Did you suggest that I Give up my paper route? 22. no one knows Those children have never seen a real cow. 23. “have you decided what to get Mom for her birthday?” asked Meg. 24. “she might like an embroidered sweater,” suggested Drew, “Or maybe a wallet.” C 25. Yours affectionately, 26. I had never heard That Sandra was a champion marbles player. 28. Has anyone mentioned that There will be a test in math tomorrow? 29. she said You would help her study. 30. with love and gratitude,  Writing Link Write a paragraph about your favorite summer activity. Capitalize sentences correctly. 216 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mechanics 27. Dear Grandma and grandpa Wilson, Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 65 Capitalizing Names and Titles of Persons I Capitalize names of people and initials that stand for names. Bonnie Morris Carl M. Lustek P. J. Carter Capitalize the names and abbreviations of academic degrees and professional titles that follow a person’s name. Capitalize Jr. and Sr. Raul Espinoza, Bachelor of Science Kate Strong, Registered Dietitian Nelson Davies, D.D.S. Lester Linston Sr. Capitalize words that show family relationships when used as titles but not when they follow an article or a possessive noun or pronoun. Uncle Frankie Diane’s grandmother my sister an aunt Always capitalize the pronoun I. Are you really interested in what I think?  Exercise 1 Draw three lines under each lowercase letter that should be capitalized. Draw a slash (/) through each capital letter that should be lowercase. Place a check (✔) before each sentence with correct capitalization. Mechanics For years Kaya has taken piano lessons from Mrs. carter. 1. My interest in names comes naturally; my Father’s name is Jonathon Apple. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 2. Most people can hardly believe that mom’s name is Carmel. ✔ 3. They are really amazed when they hear that my name is Candy. 4. I never bother telling them about grandma and grandpa MacIntosh! ✔ 5. I think it’s interesting, too, that sometimes a person’s name matches his or her job. 6. For example, we bought my glasses from Arthur Sites, o.d. 7. My Uncle’s knee surgery was performed by Inez Bonecutter, M.D. 8. I know it’s hard to believe, but I’ve seen a sign for James McCracken, doctor of chiropractic. 9. My favorite, though, is William R. Crooks, sheriff of Fayette County, Ohio. Unit 11, Capitalization 217 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ ✔ 10. Sometimes a perfectly ordinary name becomes special when you see the last name first. ✔ 11. For example, Susan Jolly is listed in the phone book as Jolly Susan! 12. Through using the phone book, i’ve uncovered many great names. ✔ 13. Henry Reeder holds a doctorate in literature. ✔ 14. Jackie Ford Jr. owns a car dealership. 15. Sometimes i see an interesting last name and wonder where it comes from. ✔ 16. I guessed the origin of the last name Pretty had to do with appearance. 17. According to the New Dictionary of American Family Names, the name pretty is an English name that means “the crafty, cunning man.” 18. The dictionary also revealed that the name mondello comes from the Italian for “the little, cute, clean man.” ✔ 19. Frid comes from the Swedish word for “peace.” 20. From the Polish language comes the name sobota, “one who always does 21. Surely you can see by now why i collect names. ✔ 22. If you’d like to collect names, too, let other people know that you are a collector. 23. Aunts, Uncles, and other family members often are willing to help out. 24. My Cousin Lisa told me about a classmate whose name is Bea Cool. 25. grandpa’s name, godfrey, is German for “God’s peace.”  Writing Link Write five sentences about someone in the news. Include his or her title if you can. Use proper capitalization in each sentence. 218 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mechanics something on Saturday.” Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 66 Capitalizing Names and Titles of Persons II A general rule to follow is to capitalize proper nouns but not common nouns. Frederick Douglas writer Capitalize a title when it comes before a person’s name or when it is used in direct address but not a title that follows a person’s name. Mayor Jean Dean Capt. John Gray Mr. Ralph Rivera The reporter asked, “Mr. President, when is your next meeting?” Bill Clinton was elected president in 1992.  Exercise 1 Draw three lines under each lowercase letter that should be capitalized. Kosey will eat lunch with capt. williams and then meet the mayor. 1. Mrs. kimi hayashi recommends dr. jack grady. 2. Louisa may alcott wrote the book Little Women. 3. The dentist’s sign advertised “mara klein, d.d.s.” 4. Jamal interviewed commissioner brown yesterday. Mechanics 5. England’s reigning queen is elizabeth II. 6. Josie, have you ever met lieutenant martinez? Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 7. Mayor harold jones and capt. bernadette henley met this morning. 8. What does the “s” in “harry s truman” stand for? 9. Are peggy, meg, and maggie all nicknames for margaret? 10. Address the letter to dr. alejandra castillo. 11. Why does the program refer to dr. cruz as rey cruz, m.d.? 12. Which president is known as f.d.r.? 13. Charlie, chuck, and chas are all nicknames for charles. 14. When did eric the red and the Vikings sail from Norway? 15. Grandma, aunt stephanie, and uncle floyd will stay for a week. 16. My uncle, hector salazar, is running for mayor this year. Unit 11, Capitalization 219 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 17. Is it king henry VIII of England who was married to six queens? 18. Please tell mrs. gustafson that mr. swensen is here. 19. Was winston churchill the prime minister of England in 1944? 20. Her full legal name is rebecca jane katherine stevenson.  Exercise 2 Draw three lines under each lowercase letter that should be capitalized. Draw a slash (/ ) through each capital letter that should be lowercase. Write C in the blank if the sentence is correct. How long is your grandmother staying with mrs. grossman? 1. Will mr. bowman consider running for mayor next year? 2. Please send this report to both the Teacher and the Principal. C 3. Perhaps you will meet the senator today. 4. The Police Officer’s name is Amanda Rogers. C 5. A woman is the lieutenant governor of our state. 6. This is lieutenant governor bernardo mansa. C 7. Next summer I will visit my aunt in Mexico. Mechanics 8. Show these pictures of major sullivan to Grandma Rose. 9. First my dad took me to see dr. norton, who is an Internist. 11. It’s been more than two years since I’ve seen uncle Roberto. 12. Abraham lincoln was the sixteenth President of the United States. 13. Was Andrew Johnson or Andrew Jackson Vice President under Lincoln? 14. Maria’s Aunt spoke to my class about safety. 15. Did you locate the information, captain? 16. Mr. mayor, will you be in your office this afternoon? C 17. For my social studies report, I have to interview the mayor and one of his assistants. 18. Harriet Snelling is our family Doctor. 220 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 10. This lawyer advertises himself as morey walsh, j.d. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 67 Capitalizing Names of Places I Capitalize the names of cities, counties, states, countries, continents, geographical features such as mountains and rivers, and sections of a country. Mount Vernon Ethiopia the Grand Canyon Bay of Bengal Mount Everest Westchester County Africa Bering Strait Cape of Good Hope the Northwest New Jersey Indian Ocean Olentangy River Ohio River Valley New England Capitalize the names of streets and highways as well as the names of specific buildings, bridges, and monuments. Royal Forest Boulevard World Trade Towers Avenue of the Americas Golden Gate Bridge Pulaski Skyway Lincoln Memorial Do not capitalize words like city, state, mountain, river, street, and bridge if they are not part of a specific name. On our trip we drove through ten states and five major cities, but we did not see any mountains. Turn left at the next street, and take the bridge over the river. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Names like illinois and arizona remind us of our country’s beginnings. 1. Many place names in the united states are spelled in a way that made sense to someone from france or england or spain. 2. The mississippi river is named from a word meaning “great river.” 3. Explorers in the southwest asked the Pimas what they called the area. 4. The Pimas used the word arishoonak; that name later became arizona. 5. One group in the south cleared thickets to make room for food. 6. The group gave their name to the state of alabama; the word for which this state was named means “thicket clearers.” 7. The word mesikami became the word for the state of michigan and lake michigan. Unit 11, Capitalization 221 Mechanics  Exercise 1 Draw three lines under each lowercase letter that should be capitalized. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 8. The Sioux word for friends was translated into the names for north dakota and south dakota. 9. The Iroquois called one River oheo, which means “beautiful.” 10. Do you recognize this word as the name of Ohio and the Ohio river valley? 11. The Ute people gave their name to one of the western states, utah.  Exercise 2 Draw three lines under each lowercase letter that should be capitalized. Draw a slash (/ ) through each capital letter that should be lowercase. Do you know why the city of baltimore is in the State of Maryland? 1. We can learn some history by investigating the names of our Cities and streets, Mountains and rivers. 2. Ask yourself why there is a crockett st. in san antonio, texas. 3. Why is a lake in Northern New York called lake champlain? 4. Why is the city of pontiac in michigan while joliet is in illinois? 5. The hudson river is in New York. 7. Is there a story behind williamsburg, virginia? 8. In what city is the empire state building? 9. Where do you think the benjamin franklin bridge is? 10. Why do many names in the southwest come from spain? 11. Sometimes the name of a City, such as jamestown, tells us when it was named. 12. jamestown was founded in 1607 when James Stuart was king of england. 13. Who ruled england when charleston and williamsburg were named? 14. Names such as pittsburgh and pennsylvania refer to important people. 15. William Penn founded pennsylvania; pittsburgh was named for William Pitt. 16. Even names of Streets can tell us about a City’s early history. 17. Many cities have a street named main street or broad street. 18. These Streets were probably the major Street or the broadest Street in town. 222 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mechanics 6. Then why is there a hudson bay in northern Canada? Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 68 Capitalizing Names of Places II Capitalize compass points when they refer to a specific section of the country but not when they indicate direction. Do not capitalize adjectives formed from words showing direction. the West Coast the Southeast north of Atlanta southern exposure Capitalize the names of specific places but not the articles and prepositions that are part of geographical names. Tucson, Arizona the West Indies the United States of America  Exercise 1 Draw three lines under each lowercase letter that should be capitalized. Draw a slash (/ ) through each capital letter that should be lowercase. Write C in the blank if the sentence is correct. We live South of indianapolis, Indiana. 1. You will find lake Erie to the North of Ohio. 2. Look for the northeast in Maine, New Hampshire, and Vermont. 3. I would like to see The Missouri river someday. Mechanics 4. We traveled through santa fe, New Mexico, last August. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill C 5. My house sits to the east of Main Street. 6. The Grand canyon has many wonderful views for the tourist to marvel at. 7. Did you hear about the earthquake in The San Fernando valley? 8. The Northwestern part of my State is fairly flat. C 9. Samantha lives northwest of Carson City, Nevada. 10. We went fishing in The Columbia River last year. 11. Southwestern Kansas is not much different geographically than Southeastern Kansas, I’d say. C 12. My friends live on the broad coastal plain of northern Germany. 13. The country of Colombia lies to the South of Panama. 14. That Northerly breeze cools off everything in the valley. Unit 11, Capitalization 223 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 15. Search for the great Salt lake within the boundaries of the state of Utah. 16. I would like to travel to the south Pacific one day. 17. Travel west from Ohio, and you will find indiana. 18. The Atlas mountains rise on the Western edge of the Sahara. 19. My grandfather came from Hunan Province, located in the Southeastern area of central China. 20. The famous train known as the Orient Express ran Eastward from Paris to Istanbul, turkey. 21. Aunt Sally was born in duluth, Minnesota. 22. My uncle has a house on cape Cod, which I would like to visit one day. C 23. What states make up the American Midwest? 24. My great-great-grandmother came through the Cumberland gap, located in Northeastern Tennessee. 25. We traveled North from London, england, to Edinburgh, scotland, in one day. 27. The state of south Australia has a Capital named Adelaide. C 28. Sri Lanka is a large island to the south of India. 29. The famous town of timbuktu developed beside a river in Western Africa. 30. Ancient galatia is now part of North Central Turkey.  Writing Link Write three sentences about the land features in your community. Include names of buildings, streets, or geographical features. 224 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mechanics 26. My friend Rosanna is from montevideo, the capital of uruguay. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 69 Capitalizing Other Proper Nouns and Adjectives I Capitalize proper nouns and adjectives but not common nouns and adjectives. Mark Klees a punctuation mark New York City a city in New York Capitalize the names of clubs, organizations, businesses, institutions, and political parties. Capitalize brand names but not the nouns following them. the Rotary Club Girl Scouts of America Imperial Products, Inc. Rockefeller Foundation the Republican party Spinoff yarn Capitalize the names of important historical events and periods of time. Capitalize the names of days of the week, months of the year, and holidays, but not the names of the seasons. the Civil War Saturday the Ice Age August summer the Fourth of July  Exercise 1 Draw three lines under each lowercase letter that should be capitalized. We will start the book on monday. 1. Tony joined the boy scouts last september. Mechanics 2. President Kennedy founded the peace corps in the 1960s. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 3. What do you think of anna’s art work as a name for my store? 4. Hashim goes to franklin middle school; Lenny goes to Reeseville high. 5. Will you be a democrat or a republican when you are old enough to vote? 6. We buy only summer’s bounty frozen vegetables. 7. Teddy Roosevelt led the Rough Riders in the spanish american war. 8. Did the bronze age come before or after the iron age? 9. I would like to see her by thursday. 10. I think of memorial day, labor day, and the fourth of july as summer holidays. 11. My brother joined the united states navy last may. 12. The tasty company makes pretty good snacks. Unit 11, Capitalization 225 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 13. My father works for sunny products corporation. 14. Mom registered our dog with the American kennel club. 15. My brother applied to two colleges, kenyon college and miami university. 16. Our Aunt Nellie belongs to the local chapter of the green thumbs garden club. 17. People living in the stone age made beautiful things from a variety of rocks. 18. The war of 1812 occurred between 1812 and 1815. 19. England has two major political parties, the conservative party and the labor party. 20. We learned about the middle ages in a history class. 21. My favorite time of the year is fall. 22. Robert E. Lee commanded the army of northern virginia in the Civil War. 23. The handy help company repaired the damaged portions of our roof. 25. The revolutionary war involved many famous soldiers and statesmen. 26. Are new movies first shown on tuesday or on wednesday?  Exercise 2 Draw three lines under each lowercase letter that should be capitalized. Draw a slash (/ ) through each capital letter that should be lowercase. Write C in the blank if the sentence is correct. Maybe we will visit you in april instead of march. 1. Have you ever heard of a Club called The knights Of columbus? C 2. Ichiko is writing a paper on the Mexican-American War. 3. Bob’s new Store, party machine, sells trinkets for democrats and republicans. 4. My first School was north broadway preschool. 5. Our Spring Vacation starts on friday, march 27. 6. The Fashion show featured designs from bangles and beads boutique. 7. We speak spanish at home and english Everywhere else. 8. Joni and I bought Hats from mexico at sombrero sam’s. 9. The scientific method was developed during the age of reason. 10. My birthday falls in the spring on april 19. 226 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mechanics 28. I love winter in january, with its snow, deep blue sky, and silent nights. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 70 Capitalizing Other Proper Nouns and Adjectives II Capitalize the first word, the last word, and all important words in titles. Charlotte’s Web “Old King Cole” National Geographic Romeo and Juliet Gone with the Wind the New York Times “The Ransom of Red Chief” Sesame Street Chapter 7 Capitalize the names of ethnic groups, nationalities, and languages as well as proper adjectives formed from these names. Mexican Americans speaking Portuguese the Slavic countries Italian food  Exercise 1 Draw three lines under each lowercase letter that should be capitalized. Draw a slash (/ ) through each capital letter that should be lowercase. Write C in the blank if the sentence is correct. The Cookbook Kids can cook aims to teach kindergartners basic cooking skills. 1. We will finish reading the book little women on Tuesday. 2. I would like to hang a copy of the declaration of independence on my Mechanics Bedroom wall. 3. Did you read the magazine ranger rick when you were younger? Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 4. We have a Test on chapter 3 and chapter 4 tomorrow. 5. Jeremy told me about a Magazine called cobblestones. C 6. My great-grandfather worked on the famous newspaper New York World. 7. My mom really liked the Movie fiddler on the roof. 8. My Name is russian, but my mother is french. 9. Kata really can’t decide which she likes better, mexican food or italian food. 10. I am learning the german language, but Otto is learning japanese. 11. Cousin Carlos writes for a spanish language newspaper. 12. The book wind in the willows is one of my favorites. 13. Did you know that the World’s oldest restaurant is a chinese one? C 14. The ancient Hittites lived between the Greeks and the Persians. Unit 11, Capitalization 227 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 15. We get a Newspaper called the miami herald delivered to our door. C 16. An Inuit poem known as “Eskimo Chant” vividly tells about the change of seasons. 17. My Family loves watching the sound of music. 18. My favorite humorous poem is “casey at the bat.” 19. The scottish author Sir Walter Scott wrote the novel ivanhoe. 20. Director Kenneth Branagh made shakespeare’s play much ado about nothing into a beautiful Movie. 21. My Favorite Book is Gulliver’s travels. 22. I am sure that you’ve Read the tale of peter rabbit. C 23. If only I could learn to speak the Greek language. C 24. My dad has seen the movie The Maltese Falcon fifteen times. 25. Joel Chandler Harris wrote the Book nights with uncle remus. 26. I’ve studied chapter 10 very Thoroughly. 27. A belgian horse has many useful duties as a Farm workhorse. 28. She worked hard to solve the Hungarian puzzle. 29. Aunt Elizabeth will teach me to Speak a little swedish. C 30. The magazine Zillions is one of my favorites.  Writing Link Make a list of several titles of books, movies, and TV shows that you like. Check that you have capitalized words correctly. 228 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mechanics C Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 11 Review  Exercise 1 Draw three lines under each lowercase letter that should be capitalized. our girl scout meetings are the first monday of each month. 1. joel and meg are going to visit their cousins during their spring vacation. 2. “just give it a try,” encouraged joe. “i think you’ll like it.” 3. “use sunscreen,” aunt bea insisted, “to protect your skin.” 4. mrs. wehinger suggested that i get a tutor to help me with english. 5. the museum of american folk art is featuring native american art. 6. roald dahl wrote the poem “aunt sponge and aunt spiker.” 7. saris are the traditional indian dress for women. 8. great-grandma gray came from norway in 1900 and settled in north Carolina. 9. i met hilda when i visited my aunt in kokomo last summer. 10. i’ve already read the bridge to terabithia six times. 11. mom lived in wauwatosa, wisconsin, before i was born. Mechanics 12. the matterhorn is a famous mountain in western europe. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 13. northern alaska’s climate is different from southern alaska’s climate. 14. alabama and florida are southern states. 15. ohio and indiana are in the midwest. 16. you’ll see signs for the new jersey turnpike just west of the bridge. 17. you can see the empire state building from the george washington bridge. 18. abraham lincoln delivered the gettysburg address at the dedication of a cemetery. 19. school starts on the last monday in august. 20. in the united states thanksgiving day is the fourth thursday in november. Unit 11, Capitalization 229 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Cumulative Review: Units 1–11  Exercise 1 Identify the type of sentence by writing in the blank dec. for declarative, int. for interrogative, imp. for imperative, or exc. for exclamatory. The Civil War began in 1861. dec. 1. Emile broke his arm last week. int. 2. Have you read any good books lately? imp. 3. Turn off the television. exc. 4. What a terrific job you did! dec. 5. Chapter 5 begins on page 46. exc. 6. What fun we had last Sunday! int. 7. Can I play on this team? imp. 8. Try to finish by Saturday morning. dec. 9. The basketball season opens in early December. int. 10. When will you know the details? exc. 11. What good weather we had for our picnic! imp. 12. Come to my house right after school tomorrow. int. 13. Do you know how to keep score for volleyball? int. 14. Is there any news from Rachel? dec. 15. Lauren sang a solo in the spring concert. imp. 16. Answer the questions at the end of the chapter. imp. 17. Turn left at the stop light. exc. 18. How easy it is to make a baby smile! dec. 19. The flood waters disappeared rapidly. exc. 20. How tired you look! dec. 21. Jane shared her friendship bread with us. int. 22. Is there some way to turn this radio off? imp. 23. Don’t forget Mara’s birthday is tomorrow. exc. 24. We’re finished! 230 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mechanics dec. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 2 Identify each word in italics. Write above the word prep. for preposition, conj. for conjunction, and inter. for interjection. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. conj. prep. 9. I can’t remember whether I wore my heavy coat or my light coat to school. inter. prep. 10. Wow! You won the race without any effort! prep. prep. prep. 11. The box of costumes is in the closet underneath the stairs. prep. prep. prep. 12. My parents will meet with Mr. Kenworth in the library at seven. prep. prep. 13. Throw the ball into the basket three times in a row. inter. prep. prep. 14. Oh no! I forgot about the test on Tuesday. prep. prep. 15. Our plans changed again after my talk with Jamal. prep. prep. conj. 16. Go past the gas station on the corner, and then turn left. prep. conj. prep. 17. Choose a topic for your report, or you will not finish on time. conj. prep. prep. 18. My grandma and grandpa went to Europe for three months last year. conj. prep. 19. John Adams and his son, John Quincy Adams, were both presidents of the United States. inter. prep. 20. Shucks! I left my homework on the kitchen table again. inter. prep. 21. Plop! The ball landed in the toddler’s lap. prep. conj. prep. 22. Drink a mixture of hot tea and honey for your sore throat. conj. 23. Step lively, and look alert! prep. 24. Stuart always whistles the theme song from that old TV show. Unit 11, Capitalization 231 Mechanics Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 8. prep. Plants turn toward the sun. prep. Hagos threw the ball from the foul line. inter. Ouch! My head hurts. conj. Zina can sing and dance. inter. Congratulations! I knew you could do it. conj. I really want to go with you, but I can’t. prep. Keep your eye on the ball. conj. prep. Emily saw Shawnda and Denise before school. inter. prep. Help! My shoe is stuck in the mud. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 3 Draw three lines under each lowercase letter that should be capitalized. the rainbow bridge spans the niagara river. 1. abraham lincoln was president of the united states during the civil war. 2. to get to arlington, cross ross bridge and turn north onto route 16. 3. the official start of spring is march 21. 4. chapter 7 of the book charlotte’s web by e. b. white is called “bad news.” 5. part of the border between new york and new jersey is the hudson river. 6. the ridge of the rocky mountains forms the north american great divide. 7. cleveland is in cuyahoga county, which borders lake erie. 8. “take a deep breath,” said officer ling, “and then tell me what happened.” 9. every thursday i read articles from two magazines, newsweek and reader’s digest, to mr. boyd. 10. the jefferson memorial is by the potomac river in washington, d.c. 11. i have to memorize the gettysburg address for the veterans day assembly. 12. “we have nothing to fear,” said f.d.r., “but fear itself.” 14. sandra said the empire state building is on fifth avenue at 34th street. 15. my uncle’s name is emmitt ian clark jr., but we call him uncle mitty. 16. “i am interested in howard university,” stated edgar. “what do you know about it?” 17. can you tell me how to get to hayden planetarium, officer? 18. in new york city, little italy is just a block north of chinatown. 19. i was very young when i first saw the movie 101 dalmatians. 20. the song “memory” is from andrew lloyd webber’s play cats. 21. Wayne named his boat water baby. 22. Those african violets need watering. 23. “You may have won first prize in the lump of loot sweepstakes,” the electronic voice broadcast throughout the mall. 24. The Peasant Girl’s Dream by George MacDonald is set in the scottish highlands. 232 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mechanics 13. the five great lakes are in the northern midwest. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 12: Punctuation Lesson 71 Using the Period and Other End Marks Use a period at the end of a declarative sentence. Marvelous inventions make our lives easier. Use a period at the end of an imperative sentence. Please hand me that wrench. Use a question mark at the end of an interrogative sentence. Where would the world be without inventors? Use an exclamation point at the end of an exclamatory sentence or an interjection. What a great idea that is! Fantastic! Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill int. Mechanics  Exercise 1 Write dec. in the blank if the sentence is declarative, imp. if it is imperative, int. if it is interrogative, and exc. if it is exclamatory. Add the correct end mark to each sentence. Do you know who invented suspenders? dec. 1. I believe it was Mark Twain. exc. 2. Wow, that was a great idea! int. 3. Does that information surprise you? dec. 4. Without Howe’s sewing machine, people would have to sew by hand. dec. 5. I’m sure clothing would cost more. int. 6. How did people keep their ears warm before earmuffs were invented? imp. 7. Thank Chester Greenwood for making the first earmuffs. int. 8. Where would we be without the safety pin? dec. 9. That was the bright idea of Walter Hunt. int. 10. What did Robert Goddard invent? dec. 11. He developed the first rocket engine. Unit 12, Punctuation 233 dec. 12. I used Sarah Boone’s invention this morning. int. 13. Didn’t she design the first ironing board? int. 14. What is your favorite invention? dec. 15. I couldn’t get along without a library card. dec. 16. Philo Farnsworth invented television in 1930. int. 17. Do you think Farnsworth would like The Simpsons? dec. 18. The first popular comic strip, Hogan’s Alley, appeared in 1895. dec. 19. The first zippers replaced buttons on high-button shoes. int. 20. Did it take a long time to button those shoes? dec. 21. Sometimes it took as long as fifteen minutes. exc. 22. Whew, that’s a long time! dec. 23. Long ago, people bathed with a mixture of ashes and water. dec. 24. Then they applied oil or grease. dec. 25. Finally they rinsed with clean water. imp. 26. Try it sometime to see if it works. exc. 27. My goodness, what a strange way to get clean! dec. 28. Actually, the chemicals in ashes and grease are similar to those in modern soap. dec. 29. Early people probably got themselves quite clean. imp. 30. Compare that method with the one we use today. imp. 31. Think of William Addis the next time you brush your teeth. dec. 32. The history of the toothbrush is very interesting. dec. 33. William Addis invented the toothbrush in 1770. dec. 34. He bored a hole in a small piece of bone and glued in some bristles. exc. 35. What a clever man Addis was! dec. 36. If it weren’t for him, we’d still be cleaning our teeth with rags. dec. 37. Someday somebody might invent a machine that turns off gravity. exc. 38. Hey, that would be fun! 234 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mechanics Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 72 Using Commas I Commas make sentences easier to understand because they signal a pause or a separation between sentence parts. Use commas to separate three or more items in a series. No one knows whether Bigfoot is a man, a myth, or a monster. Use a comma to show a pause after an introductory word. No, Bigfoot has never been captured. Use a comma after two or more prepositional phrases at the beginning of a sentence. Despite years of searching, no one has gotten close to Bigfoot. Use commas to set off words that interrupt the flow of thought in a sentence. That doesn’t mean, however, that people will stop trying. Use commas to set off names used in direct address. Bethany, what would you do if you saw Bigfoot? Mechanics  Exercise 1 Add commas where needed. Write C if the sentence is correct. Bigfoot has thick fur, wide shoulders, and huge feet. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 1. Most people, naturally, would love to see Bigfoot. C 2. James, do you think you’d be afraid? 3. No, Dr. Rico, I’d shake his hand. C 4. Some people, of course, think that Bigfoot is just a man dressed in an ape suit. C 5. People in the Himalayas tell stories of a creature called yeti. C 6. Yes, the yeti is similar to Bigfoot. 7. “Wild men” have also been seen in Nepal, China, and Australia. C 8. The beast is called a yowie in Australia. 9. Most strange creatures, fortunately, are seen in unsettled areas. C 10. No one, I think, has sighted a Bigfoot on a subway train. Unit 12, Punctuation 235 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 11. Have you ever heard of the Loch Ness monster,Juan? 12. Loch Ness, of course, is in Scotland. 13. On a map of Scotland, you’ll see that Loch Ness is huge. C 14. It is also, some people feel, deep enough to hide a monster. 15. Beth, Lauro,and Heather wrote a report on Loch Ness. 16. They decided, I believe, that the creature doesn’t exist. C 17. However, no one believed rumors about the Komodo dragon, either. 18. On a remote island in Indonesia, many Komodo dragons were found. 19. Modern scientists, it seems, are searching Loch Ness. C 20. The truth about the creature is hard to pin down, however. 21. As a matter of fact,some people think that a prehistoric animal survives in Loch Ness. 22. The beast, it appears, looks like the plesiosaur. 23. The plesiosaur,if you’ll remember,was a water reptile whose limbs looked like 24. Could it be, Juan, that this ancient animal is not really extinct? 25. In the movies and on television,prehistoric animals are often seen. C 26. In 1938 a coelacanth was caught off the South African coast. 27. This fish, it was thought,had been extinct for 70 million years. C 28. Do you conclude, Dr. Rico, that other prehistoric animals may yet be found? C 29. Yes, I believe that the world holds many surprises. 30. Besides, there are many unexplored areas of the world. 31. Believe it or not,scientists frequently find new species of life. C 32. In the Amazon, I read somewhere, there is a bird whose chicks have claws on their wings. 33. Well, a prehistoric bird also had claws on its wings. 34. Nevertheless, this does not mean that anyone will find a dinosaur. 236 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mechanics paddles. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 73 Using Commas II Use a comma before and, or, and but when they join simple sentences. Felicia constructed the model, and Paul painted it. Daniel wants to go to the movies, but he has to do his homework. You can come with us, or you can stay home and read. Use a comma after the salutation of a friendly letter and after the closing of both a friendly letter and a business letter. Dear Beth, With love, Sincerely, Use a comma to prevent misreading. Instead of three, four o’clock is a better time.  Exercise 1 Add commas where needed in the following letter. Dear Alicia, I wanted to write to you yesterday,but I didn’t have time. We’re finally on our class trip, and it’s a lot of fun. Since 1990 three classes have gone to New York. Instead of New When we got here, some of us rested,but most of us went for a walk. I read for a while, Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill and Antonia took a nap. Between three and four o’clock, five of us went to the aquarium. It was a holiday, so many children were there. The aquarium shop was great, and I bought a couple of souvenirs. I almost bought a poster,but I got a book instead. It would be a nice present for Andi,or I could give it to Juan. Antonia bought two sharks’ teeth, and she also bought a seashell. Now it’s suppertime, and we’re getting ready to go out. I just combed my hair, but I haven’t brushed my teeth yet. I plan to wear slacks,and Antonia wants to wear a dress. She’s hoping for seafood,but I’d rather have pizza. Afterward we might see a movie, or we could walk around town. Unit 12, Punctuation 237 Mechanics York,Boston was our choice. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ If you talk to Jess, Antonia says to tell her hello. I’ll call you when I get home, and maybe we can get together. Love, Kimmie  Exercise 2 Add commas where needed. Write C in the blank before each correct sentence. Some people like lima beans, but Jim can’t stand them. 1. Hakeem weeded the garden,and his mom picked the vegetables. C 2. The lightning hit the barn, but it didn’t catch fire. 3. Is it raining, or did you just wash your hair? 4. I’ve been to Kansas, but I’ve never seen Oklahoma. C 5. The cat is napping on the chair, and the dog is sleeping under the bed. C 6. Felipe’s first language is Spanish, and André speaks French. 7. Ana’s favorite subject is geography, but she’s better at math. C 8. We wanted to buy that tape, but the store was sold out. 9. Instead of twelve, six players got new uniforms. C 11. Can you babysit tonight, or do you already have plans? 12. You bring the bat and ball, and Joe will bring the mitt. C 13. The violin was scratchy, but the trumpet sounded sweet and clear. 14. Do you have relatives in Mexico,or is your whole family here? 15. One twin was dressed in purple, and the other wore pink. C 16. Does Jaime want juice with supper, or would he rather have milk? 17. Janelle came in first, four seconds ahead of Sonya. 18. Heather was a scarecrow at the costume party,and Jill was a movie star. 19. Ali was invited to dinner,but he didn’t feel well. C 20. Do you know how to do this problem, or shall I help you? 21. That looks like a kangaroo, but I think it’s a wombat. C 22. The clown tripped on her shoelace, and the children laughed loudly. 238 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mechanics 10. I’d talk louder, but I’m afraid I’d wake the baby. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 74 Using Commas III In dates, use commas after the day of the month and the year. Do not use a comma if only the month and the year are given. Shama arrived in this country on July 6, 1989, with her family. She became a citizen in January 1996. Use commas before and after the name of a state or country when it is used with the name of a city. Do not use a comma after the state if the state name is followed by a zip code. She used to live in Chicago, Illinois, but now she lives in Detroit, Michigan. His address is 296 S. Pacific Avenue, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15211. Use a comma or a pair of commas to set off an abbreviated title (except Jr. and Sr.) or a degree following a person’s name. Lou Szupinski, Ph.D., wrote the book about fossils.  Exercise 1 Add commas where needed. Write C if the sentence is correct. Send your questions on health to Dr. Chris Boyd, M.D. 1. His address is 1402 Michigan Boulevard, Chicago, Illinois 60606. Mechanics C Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 2. We had a huge blizzard on February 18,1989. C 3. Our largest blizzard before that was in January 1953. C 4. Pat Hoyt, D.V.M., is the veterinarian. C 5. The Pittsburgh Press is at 34 Boulevard of the Allies, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15230. C 6. On graduation day my sister will be Alma Lopez, B.A. 7. We crossed the bridge into Brooklyn,New York. C 8. The lawyer talking to the judge is Marion Ling, J.D. C 9. Francisco was born in Guanajuato, Mexico. 10. The Sistine Chapel is in Vatican City, Italy. 11. Portland, Maine, is the home of the Portland Sea Dogs. C 12. Abraham Lincoln was born in February 1809. Unit 12, Punctuation 239 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ C 13. New Bedford, Massachusetts, was famous for whaling. C 14. El Morro castle is in San Juan, Puerto Rico. C 15. On March 23, 1904, her grandfather was born in Moscow, Russia. 16. The sweater was made in Belfast, Ireland. C 17. The Titanic struck an iceberg on April 14, 1912. C 18. The priest who said mass was Terry O’Brien, S.J. 19. The president delivered his speech in Washington,D.C. C 20. Paul Revere made his famous ride in April 1775. 21. Write to the Weather Channel at 2840 Mt. Wilkinson Parkway, Atlanta,Georgia 30339. 22. On December 8, 1941, the United States entered World War II. C 23. Chuck was born on January 26, 1984. 24. October 13, 1994, was an important day in her life. 25. The Prado, a famous art museum, is in Madrid,Spain. 26. My parents were married on June 12, 1980. 27. Did you read about that big earthquake in Mexico City,Mexico? 28. August 14, 1989, was the last time the circus came to our town. C 29. The Library of Congress is in Washington, D.C. 30. The Harvard University Library is in Cambridge, Massachusetts. C 31. Write to the National Baseball Hall of Fame at Post Office Box 590, Cooperstown, NY 13326. 32. She lived in Los Gatos, California, before she moved here. C 33. We ate at El Churrasco, a fine restaurant in Cordoba, Spain. C 34. The cave paintings in Lascaux, France, date to the last Ice Age. 35. The Basketball Association is at 645 Fifth Avenue, New York,New York. C 36. Palm Springs, California, was once called Agua Caliente. 37. Davy Crockett fought at the Alamo in San Antonio, Texas. C 38. The Valley of the Tombs of the Kings is near Luxor, Egypt. 240 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mechanics C Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 75 Using Commas IV Use a comma or a pair of commas to set off a direct quotation. Brer Rabbit said, “I am the smartest animal on this earth.” “There’s not a creature in this woods,” he went on, “who can outsmart me.”  Exercise 1 Add commas where needed to the sentences below. “My favorite story,” said LaToya, “is called ‘The Moon in the Mill Pond.’” 1. “One night Brer Rabbit and Brer Terrapin were talking by the fire,” LaToya said. 2. “A terrapin is like a turtle,” she explained. 3. She went on,“They heard a sound in the woods behind them.” 4. “Brer Rabbit,” she said,“knew that Brer Fox and Brer Bear were sneaking up on them.” 5. She explained,“Those two wanted to catch Brer Rabbit and Brer Terrapin and eat them for dinner.” 6. “Brer Rabbit,” she said, “winked at Brer Terrapin and started fussing with the fire.” 8. “Just then,” she said,“Brer Fox and Brer Bear walked out of the woods.” Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 9. “Brer Rabbit welcomed them to the feast,” she said. 10. LaToya went on,“Brer Fox and Brer Bear asked what the feast was.” 11. “Brer Rabbit,” she explained,“said that the feast was at the mill pond.” 12. “He told them,” she said,“that the pond held a fine mess of fish.” 13. “Brer Rabbit said that all they had to do was reach out their paws and grab the fish from the water,” LaToya went on. 14. “Well,” LaToya continued,“they all walked down to the mill pond.” Unit 12, Punctuation 241 Mechanics 7. She continued,“He started talking about how hot the fire had to be to cook up their feast.” Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 15. “When they got there,” she said,“Brer Rabbit saw that the full moon was shining on the water. He got an idea.” 16. “Brer Rabbit acted as if he had just seen something awful,” LaToya said. 17. “He told Brer Fox and Brer Bear that the moon had fallen into the mill pond,” she went on. 18. “He was going to have to get the moon out of the mill pond because it was scaring the fish away,” she said. 19. “Brer Rabbit ran to get a net to scoop the moon out of the mill pond,” LaToya continued. 20. She said,“While he was gone, Brer Terrapin told Brer Fox that there was a pot of gold in the mill pond, right where the moon was.” 21. “Finally, Brer Rabbit got back with the net,” she said. 22. “Brer Fox and Brer Bear grabbed it from him,” she said excitedly. 23. “They jumped into the mill pond and dragged the net around,” she said. 24. LaToya said,“Brer Rabbit kept telling them to go out further.” 25. “Finally,” she said,“they fell into a big hole and got tangled in the net.” 27. “They were happy that they outsmarted Brer Fox and Brer Bear,” she explained. 28. “And they were especially happy that they hadn’t been eaten,” she ended. 29. “Do you think,” asked Ben,“that there really was gold in the mill pond?” 30. “No,” answered LaToya. “That was just a trick.” 31. “It was a smart trick,” laughed Ben. 32. “Sometimes small animals have to be extra smart,” pointed out Jerome. 33. “Otherwise,” he said,“they’d get caught by the bigger ones.” 34. “Brer Rabbit was clever,” said Sal, “and so was Brer Terrapin.” 35. “I wonder what other adventures they had,” said Ben. 36. Sal said,“Here’s one about how Brer Terrapin beats Brer Rabbit in a race.” 242 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mechanics 26. “Brer Rabbit and Brer Terrapin laughed and laughed,” LaToya said. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 76 Commas in Review  Exercise 1 Add commas where needed. Write C if the item is correct. At school we learn to read, write, and do math. 1. Excuse me, Mr. Ogura, did you drop this book? 2. In case of fire, go out through the rear door. C 3. Josie, did you hear what I said? C 4. Susan graduated from college in June 1996. C 5. Bring some old magazines or newspapers to class. 6. In baseball you have to throw, hit, and catch the ball. 7. Jason, have you eaten lunch yet? C 8. Gorillas are large, but they are very shy. 9. The Titanic sank, and hundreds of lives were lost. 10. For the test we had to do problems 3, 6, and 9. Mechanics 11. Like Bill, Andy tried out for the lead in the play. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill C 12. Inside the cage a small, fluffy animal was eating seeds. 13. On the first Saturday in June,the pool will open. 14. The box held three marbles, a button, and a ticket stub. 15. Bill’s dog, Ana discovered, had found the missing sock. C 16. As a matter of fact, I was about to do my homework. C 17. Robert, may I use the computer after you? C 18. My red shirt was wrinkled, but I wore it anyway. 19. Along the highway into town,you will pass several horse farms. 20. Instead of nine, ten o’clock is when the children went to bed. C 21. On the beach Ali and Jessica were building a sand castle. C 22. Just inside the door her faithful cat was waiting. Unit 12, Punctuation 243 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ C 23. For supper we had mashed potatoes, peas, and chicken. 24. For the first time in my life,I actually won something! 25. Please turn down the radio,Kim. 26. Dear Aunt Millie, 27. I’m not sure, however, that I am willing to help you with your math homework. C 28. Nadine, are you going to the grocery store? 29. Besides the United States, Canada exports a lot of wheat. C 30. The address is 803 Church Street, Honesdale, Pennsylvania 18431. C 31. Al didn’t go on the class trip, and he wishes he had. 32. Robert Capozza, Ph.D., wrote this book on fossils. 33. His doctor is Denita Thurgood,M.D. 34. Throughout the world,war devastates many lives. C 35. “Well done, my lad,” said the captain. 36. Tim cried out,“I wish I had never run away to sea!” C 37. “There’s a cyclone coming, Em,” said Uncle Henry. Mechanics 38. December 4, 1982, was the date on the yellowed newspaper. 39. “Sit down,Clyde,and put your feet up,” said Hari. 41. “The cat,” Alicia said,“is scratching the furniture.” C 42. Uncle Josh asked, “Is it hot enough for you?” 43. “Fellow citizens,” said Abraham Lincoln,“we cannot escape history.” 44. Are you reading about Naples,Maine, or Naples,Italy? C 45. Look in the December 1992 issue of National Geographic. 244 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 40. Anita shouted,“Call the fire department!” Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 77 Semicolons and Colons Use a semicolon to join parts of a compound sentence when a conjunction such as and, but, or or is not used. Belinda likes oatmeal for breakfast; I prefer cream of wheat. Use a colon to introduce a list of items that ends a sentence. Use words such as these, the following, and as follows to introduce lists. English words that come from Spanish include the following: ranch, corral, and stampede. Do not use a colon immediately after a verb or a preposition. Jaime likes to read, play basketball, and dance. Use a colon to separate the hour and the minute. School begins at 8:15 on the dot. Use a colon after the salutation of a business letter. Dear Professor D’Amico: To whom it may concern: Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill C Devin is my brother; he’s my best friend, too. C 1. At the grocery store Mom bought milk, fruit, and cereal. : 2. Meet me at the corner at 1230. C 3. Pete loves flowers; roses are his favorite. 4. The forecast called for rain; it snowed instead. 5. The green shoes are pretty;the red ones are more comfortable. C 6. She may get a parrot; she may not. 7. For the class trip you’ll need the following: raincoat, boots, pencil, paper or pen, and lunch. C 8. Earth is the third planet from the sun; Mars is the fourth. 9. We had chicken last night;tonight we’ll have fish. Unit 12, Punctuation 245 Mechanics  Exercise 1 Add semicolons and colons where needed. Write C if a sentence or phrase is correct. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ C 10. Robert Frost wrote poems; L. Frank Baum wrote books. 11. The last episode was great; the next will be even better. C 12. Say “thank you” in Spanish as follows: “Gracias.” 13. The following dogs received honorable mention: Spot, Blaze, Nathan, and Maggie. C 14. Be here by 7:10 so we’ll have plenty of time. 15. The spelling test will focus on these words:spectacles, decimal, shrill, and fantastic. C 16. Dear Dr. Washington: C 17. This store is sold out of batteries; we’ll have to look elsewhere. 18. Ladybugs are helpful insects; so are bees. C 20. Lionel is a good writer; he draws well, too. C 21. Put a stamp in the upper right corner; put your return address in the upper left. C 22. These students please report to the office: Sally, Geno, and Basil. C 23. The movie only costs $2.25; you gave him $2.50. 24. My mom’s not home; please call back later. C 25. The cat has green eyes; the dog’s are brown. C 26. Cuba is a warm country; Canada is colder. 27. For drinks we have the following:milk, juice, water, and soda. C 28. The baby eats mashed potatoes, carrots, and bananas. 29. This is a picture of my mom; my dad is standing behind her. C 30. One of the twins has short hair; the other twin’s hair is long. C 31. Read this book about pirates; it’s the best I’ve come across. 32. This fruit juice is delicious; you should try it. C 33. I can’t reach the top shelf; it’s too high. 34. The wastebasket is full; please empty it. 246 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mechanics 19. The show starts at 7:30; we should try to get there earlier. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 78 Quotation Marks Use quotation marks before and after a direct quotation. “How very strange this is!” cried Alice. Use quotation marks before and after each part of an interrupted quotation. “With those broken shutters,” said Carter, “this place looks deserted.” Use a comma or commas to separate a phrase such as she said from the quotation itself. Place the comma outside opening quotation marks but inside closing quotation marks. The White Rabbit said, “Oh, dear! Oh, dear! I shall be too late!” “It was much more pleasant at home,” thought Sarah. Place a period inside closing quotation marks. Clarisse said, “I read a good book last weekend.” Place a question mark or an exclamation mark inside the quotation marks when it is part of the quotation. “What exactly did you see?” asked Detective Keeler. Mechanics Place a question mark or an exclamation mark outside the quotation marks when it is part of the entire sentence but not part of the quotation. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Did you hear him shout “Carumba!”?  Exercise 1 Add quotation marks and other punctuation marks as needed. “This book,” said Toni, “is the best I have ever read.” ” “ 1. What a great car! exclaimed Ricardo. “ 2. Robin asked the lady, Would you like to sit down?” “ 3. Did Ms. Mercado say, Read the first three chapters”? ” “ “ 4. No, thank you, said Tomás , I don’t want any more mashed potatoes.” “ 5. Colleen said,, May I use the phone when you’re finished with it?” “ 6. Juan said,, Chris is two inches taller than Pete.” “ 7. Fidel said to Ahmed,, Could you lend me a pencil?” Unit 12, Punctuation 247 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ “ 8. Mom asked, Who wants to go to the store with me?” “ 9. Tom yelled, The boat is sinking!” “ 10. I think he said, No talking during a fire drill.” “ ” 11. Three strikes and you’re out,, said the umpire. “ ” “ 12. Does anyone here,, asked Michele, know how to spell embarrass?” “ 13. Did you hear him yell, You’re out”? “ 14. Dad asked, Would you rather have hamburgers or chicken for supper?” “ ” “ 15. That, said Penny, is the silliest joke I’ve ever heard.” “ ” “ 16. After you log on to the computer, said Aiko, choose a game from the menu.” ” “ “ 17. Uh-oh, said Jill, we’re out of cat food.” “ ” 18. Here’s the two dollars I owe you, said Diego. ” “ “ 19. My cat, said Jack, weighs eighteen pounds.” “ ” 20. That’s a mighty big cat, said Beth. “ 21. Carl asked, Is English your favorite subject?” ” “ 23. I’m going to be an astronaut, Jane said proudly. “ ” “ 24. President Abraham Lincoln, my dad told me, liked to tell funny stories.” ” “ “ 25. I have to go, Derek said. There’s a call waiting.” “ 26. Terri shouted, Let’s get out of here!” “ 27. Karne called and said, When are you coming?” “ ” 28. A penny saved is a penny earned, Ben Franklin said.  Writing Link Write about a conversation you have had with a friend or a family member. Use quotation marks and other punctuation as needed. 248 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mechanics “ ” “ 22. The ancient Greeks, Mr. Hassan said, were famous for their cleverness.” Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 79 Quotation Marks and Italics Use italics (underlining) to identify the title of a book, play, film, television series, magazine, newspaper, or name of a ship, train, or plane. The Wind in the Willows (book) Home Improvement (television series) Use quotation marks for the title of a short story, essay, poem, song, magazine or newspaper article, or book chapter. The poem “Jabberwocky” is in the chapter entitled “Looking-Glass House.”  Exercise 1 Read each title. Add quotation marks or underline for italics. Mysterious Tales of the New England Coast (book) 1. Old Yeller (film) 2. Old Yeller (book) 3. The Sword in the Stone (book) “ 4. Caring for Your Pet”(magazine article) Mechanics “ 5. Jingle Bells”(song) 6. Pittsburgh Post-Gazette (newspaper) Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 7. Cricket (magazine) 8. The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn (book) “ 9. Mamma Sewing”(essay) “ 10. The Tale of the Tiger’s Paintbrush”(short story) “ 11. The Great Eclipse”(magazine article) “ 12. Love Song for a Jellyfish”(poem) 13. Jump! The Adventures of Brer Rabbit (book) 14. Mayflower (ship) 15. Time (magazine) 16. The Longest Journey (film) Unit 12, Punctuation 249 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ “ 17. Hurt No Living Thing”(poem) 18. Grandpa and the Statue (play) “ 19. The Doctor of Literature”(book chapter) “ 20. America, the Beautiful”(song) 21. Portland Press Herald (newspaper) “ 22. The Cowardly Lion”(book chapter) “ 23. The Weaving Contest”(short story) “ 24. Old McDonald Had a Farm”(song) “ 25. A Cellar and an Attic”(poem) 26. Titanic (ship) 27. The Silver Chair (book) 28. The Thief of Baghdad (film) 29. Highlights for Children (magazine) “ 30. Langston Terrace”(essay) 32. The Dick Van Dyke Show (television series) 33. The Last Battle (book) 34. Miss Louisa and the Outlaws (play) “ 35. The Fun They Had”(short story)  Writing Link Write five sentences about your two favorite books and their most interesting chapters. 250 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mechanics “ 31. Money”(book chapter) Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 80 Apostrophes Use an apostrophe and an s (‘s) to form the possessive of a singular noun. boy + ’s = boy’s horse + ’s = horse’s Use an apostrophe and an s (‘s) to form the possessive of a plural noun that does not end in s. children + ’s = children’s sheep + ’s = sheep’s Use an apostrophe alone to form the possessive of a plural noun that ends in s. monkeys + ’ = monkeys’ libraries + ’ = libraries’ Do not use an apostrophe in a possessive pronoun. His dad baked the cake. Ours made the cookies. Use an apostrophe to replace letters that have been omitted in a contraction. there is = there’s cannot = can’t  Exercise 1 Add apostrophes where needed. Write C if the sentence is correct. C Mechanics Blackbeard’s name is an infamous one in history. 1. His real name was Edward Teach. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill ’ 2. Blackbeard commanded the Queen Annes Revenge. ’ 3. Blackbeards cruelty was legendary. ’ 4. His men s hearts were filled with fear of their captain. C 5. Theirs was a hard and dangerous life. C 6. Many books have been written about Blackbeard and other pirates. ’ 7. Some pirates treasures have never been found. C 8. Each pirate crew’s code was to share treasure equally. ’ 9. It s not true that many pirates had to walk the plank. C 10. What’s more likely is that many were marooned on islands. ’ 11. Sometimes women put on men s clothing and ran away to sea. Unit 12, Punctuation 251 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ C 12. Robert Louis Stevenson’s book about pirates is called Treasure Island. ’ 13. Although a movie was made of the book, it can t compare to the book. ’ 14. It tells the tale of the pirates attempts to recover a treasure. ’ 15. In the book, a sea captain s belongings include a treasure map. C 16. The map leads Captain Smollet and the members of his crew to Treasure Island. ’ 17. The name of the ship s cook is Long John Silver. C 18. Silver’s plan is to seize the treasure first. ’ 19. He s foiled by Ben Gunn, who was marooned on the island three years earlier by Silver and his band of pirates. ’ 20. Scotland s most famous pirate was William Kidd. ’ 21. Captain Kidd s death by hanging was a warning to other pirates. C 22. The pirate Grace O’Malley’s name is famous in Ireland. ’ 23. She s known for her love of the sea. ’ 24. One of China s most famous pirates was Koxinga. Mechanics ’ 25. Koxinga s father had been a pirate, too. ’ 26. His father s death at the hands of the Manchus made Koxinga angry. C 28. The English pirate John Rackam’s wife was the pirate Anne Bonny.  Writing Link Write five sentences about a visit to the beach. What would you like to see and do? Use apostrophes where needed. 252 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill ’ 27. He fought many battles against the Imperial Navy s ships. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 81 Hyphens Use a hyphen to show the division of a word at the end of a line. Always divide a word between syllables. The Big Dipper is probably the most familiar of all the constellations. Use a hyphen in compound numbers from twenty-one through ninety-nine. Use a hyphen or hyphens in certain compound nouns. Check a dictionary. father-in-law sisters-in-law  Exercise 1 Add hyphens where needed. Write C if the sentence needs no changes. C C He peeled twenty-three apples for the pies. 1. I have thirty-five dollars to spend. 2. Drew’s great-grandmother knows a lot of interesting stories. 3. Gregorio’s dad turns thirty-five tomorrow. 4. Jack Benny always said he was thirty-nine. Mechanics C 5. This company produces fifty-seven kinds of soup. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 6. The latitude of Chicago is forty-two degrees. 7. The mother of my sister’s husband is my sister’s mother-in-law. C 8. Did you climb all ninety-one steps? 9. The produce store has twenty-seven kinds of vegetables. 10. The piano has eighty-eight keys. C 11. Jeanna has exactly seventy-three cents in her pocket. 12. The speed limit on the highway is fifty-five miles an hour. 13. The woman over there is my sister-in-law. C 14. She lives in Boonetown; he lives thirty-three miles away. 15. There are thirty-eight desks in the room. 16. She’s never been more than seventy-five miles from home. Unit 12, Punctuation 253 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ C 17. A slice of bread has only forty-two calories. C 18. There must be at least eighty-five cows in the field. C 19. Can I buy a good radio for twenty-five dollars? 20. The bottle has forty-one vitamin pills in it. C 21. The alphabet has twenty-six letters. 22. Alfonso counted sixty-eight jelly beans in the basket. 23. The temperature is thirty-four degrees. 24. There are one hundred and forty-two steps between my house and yours. 25. The pie in the nursery rhyme had twenty-four blackbirds in it. 26. Her birthday is the thirty-first of March. 27. Four score and seven is the same as eighty-seven. 28. Not too many years ago there were only forty-eight states. 29. The cheese sandwich costs eighty-five cents.  Writing Link Write three or four sentences of a plot for a book that stretches over several generations. Give the character’s relationships and ages. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mechanics 30. Are there enough books for twenty-eight students? 254 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 82 Abbreviations I Use the abbreviations Mr., Mrs., Ms., and Dr. before a person’s name. Abbreviate Junior (Jr.) and Senior (Sr.) after a person’s name. Abbreviate professional or academic degrees that follow a person’s name. Ida Ames, Ph.D. (doctor of philosophy) Sid Poff, M.F.A. (master of fine arts) Use all capital letters and no periods for abbreviations that are pronounced letter by letter or as words. Exceptions are U.S. and Washington, D.C. which do use periods. FBI (Federal Bureau of Investigation) ROM (read-only memory) PSAT (Preliminary Scholastic Aptitude Test) Use the abbreviations A.M. (ante meridiem, “before noon”) and P.M. (post meridiem, “after noon”) for exact times. For dates use B.C. (before Christ) and, sometimes, A.D. (anno Domini, “in the year of the Lord,” after Christ.) 10:25 A.M. 4:30 P.M. 300 B.C. A.D. 50 Abbreviate calendar items (days of the week, months of the year) only when they appear in charts and lists. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mon. Feb. Tues. Mar. Wed. Apr. Thurs. Aug. Fri. Sept. Sat. Oct. Nov. Dec. Mechanics Sun. Jan.  Exercise 1 Complete each sentence with the abbreviation of the word or words in parentheses. Write C if no abbreviation should be used. Samuel Smith [ 1. [ Mr. Jr. is the principal’s name. (Junior) Alfredo will give you the information you need. (Mister) 2. This piece of pottery dates back to 500 [ 3. [ Mr. 5. The tool dates from about [ Fri. . (before Christ) O’Malley is here to pick up his daughter. (Mister) 4. Belinda is usually home at 6:15 [ 6. [ B.C. ,[ Sat. A.D. , and [ P.M. every day. (post meridiem) 618. (after Christ) Sun. are abbreviations for days of the week. (Friday, Saturday, Sunday) 7. Alma Romero will be here at 3:00 [ P.M. to take over. (after noon) Unit 12, Punctuation 255 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 8. Alicia and Cheryl have birthdays in [ C 9. This article was written by Brad Frank of [ 10. The date on the letter was [ 11. [ Dr. C or Oct. . (February) UPI . (United Press International) 28, 1996. (October) Benito prescribed medicine for Sarah’s sore throat. (Doctor) 12. My hat carries the insignia of [ NASA . (National Aeronautics and Space Administration) 13. Marla Todd, [ Ph.D , is how my mom’s name is written on her business cards. (doctor of philosophy) 14. In 44 [ B.C. Julius Caesar was assassinated. (before Christ) 15. Promptly at 7:10 [ A.M. the bus arrives. (ante meridiem)  Exercise 2 Write the abbreviation for each italicized word or phrase. 2. Wednesday Mr. 15. Public Broadcasting Service Wed. PBS Dr. 3. Doctor DiFillipo A .M . Mechanics 4. 8:00 ante meridiem 5. December 16. Barry Castwell, Master of Social Work Dec. 6. 952 after Christ 17. Thursday A.D. FDA NATO 19. Tuesday P.M. 8. 3:00 post meridiem 9. 22 before Christ 10. Medical Doctor B.C. M.D. Fri. Tues. 20. American Medical Association AMA 21. Carl Cook Junior Jr. 22. Central Intelligence Agency 12. January Jan. 13. November Thurs. 18. North Atlantic Treaty Organization 7. Food and Drug Administration 11. Friday MSW CIA Nov. 14. Juan Lopez Senior 23. 11:00 in the evening Sr. 24. International Olympic Committee IOC 256 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 P.M. AMA Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 1. Mister Adams Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 83 Abbreviations II In charts, graphs, and tables abbreviate units of measure. ounce(s) oz. meter(s) m pound(s) lb. foot (feet) ft. yard(s) yd. inch(es) in. mile(s) mi. liter(s) l gallon(s) gal. kilometer(s) km On envelopes abbreviate the words that refer to street names. Street St. Boulevard Blvd. Avenue Ave. Road Rd. Court Ct. On envelopes use Postal Service abbreviations for the names of states. Massachusetts MA Wisconsin WI Mississippi MS Oregon OR Ohio OH Indiana IN West Virginia WV Maine ME New York NY Iowa IA Nevada NV Texas TX Juan Lopez 1557 Rochester Boulevard Boston, Massachusetts 13799 Juan Lopez 1557 Rochester Blvd. Boston, MA 13799 Susan Ming 375 Fredericks Street Salem, Oregon 10227 Susan Ming 375 Fredericks St. Salem, OR 10227 Adrien Frank 879 Meander Court Youngstown, Ohio 11337 Adrien Frank 879 Meander Ct. Youngstown, OH 11337 Mechanics Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill  Exercise 1 Rewrite the following addresses, using abbreviations as they would appear on envelopes.  Exercise 2 Using the form on the next page, rewrite the following chart, substituting abbreviations for the words in parentheses. Approximate Equivalent Measurements 16 (ounces) = 1 (pound) = 453.6 (grams) 1 (gallon) = 4 (quarts) = 3.8 (liters) 12 (inches) = 1 (foot) = .3 (meter) 3 (feet) = 1 (yard) = .9 (meter) 5,280 (feet) = 1 (mile) = 1,609 (meter) 3,279 (feet) = .62 (mile) = 1 (kilometer) Unit 12, Punctuation 257 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Approximate Equivalent Measurements 16 oz. = 1 lb. = 453.6 g 1 gal. = 4 qt. = 3.8 l 12 in. = 1 ft. = .3 m 3 ft. = 1 yd. = .9 m 5,280 ft. = 1 mi. = 1,609 m 3,279 ft. = .62 mi. = 1 km  Exercise 3 Write the abbreviation for each italicized word. lb. 3 pounds TX 1. Galveston, Texas Rd. 2. Oak Road ME 3. Portland, Maine St. 5. 15 miles mi. 6. 16 yards yd. 7. Tuscon Avenue Ave. in. 8. 42 inches IN 9. Indianapolis, Indiana 10. Dayton, Ohio 11. 17 liters OH l 12. Biloxi, Mississippi MS 13. 20 kilometers km 14. Carson City, Nevada NV 15. Buffalo, New York NY 258 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mechanics 4. Easy Street Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 84 Writing Numbers I In charts and tables always write numbers as figures. However, in sentences numbers are sometimes spelled out and sometimes written as numerals. Spell out numbers that can be written in one or two words. There are twenty-two days until my birthday. Use numerals for numbers of more than two words. I think the answer is 333. Spell out any number that begins a sentence, or reword the sentence. Five thousand two hundred people watched the eclipse from the park. Write a very large number as a numeral followed by million or billion. The sun is about 93 million miles from Earth.  Exercise 1 Write the correct form of the number in each sentence. Write C if the sentence is correct. thirteen 1. Tickets to the game cost six dollars. C 2. The population of Avon is about four thousand. Mechanics C Fourteen thousand Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Buffalo has won 13 games so far this year. 3. 14,000 people signed the petition. 608 4. Last year the shelter found homes for six hundred eight cats. four 5. The blizzard dumped 4 feet of snow on our town. C 6. Light travels at about 186,000 miles per second. C 7. The planet Saturn is about 900 million miles from the sun. C 8. Crater Lake in Oregon is more than 1,950 feet deep. three 9. I’ve seen that movie 3 times. C 10. In 1990 this country imported about 2 million cars from Japan. C 11. The Grand Canyon is about one mile deep. Unit 12, Punctuation 259 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ C 12. Nevada is about 490 miles long from north to south. 5 13. About five million people have seen this movie. two hundred 14. The meeting room will hold 200 people. C 15. The Ohio River is about 981 miles long.  Exercise 2 Draw a line under the correct form. (40, forty) minutes 1. (6, six) billion cats 2. (8, eight) cars 3. (20, twenty) inches 4. (642, six hundred forty-two) miles 5. (12, twelve) inches 6. (2, Two) bikes are parked there. 7. (3, three) million dollars 8. (81, eighty-one) feet high 10. (13, thirteen) years old 11. (20, twenty) minutes 12. (3, three) phone calls 13. (88,000, eighty-eight thousand) pounds 14. A yard is shorter than (1, one) meter. 15. Is the answer (15, fifteen) million or billion? 260 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mechanics 9. (60, sixty) meters wide Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 85 Writing Numbers II If one number in a sentence must be written as a numeral, use all numerals, even though you might spell out one of the numbers if it appeared alone. Jessica has 305 points, and Cleon has 300 points. Spell out ordinal numbers (first, second, and so forth). Alaina was first in line to buy tickets to the concert. Use words for amounts of money that can be written in one or two words, for the approximate time of day, and for the time of day when A.M. or P.M. is not used. ten cents half past six a quarter past five two o’clock Use numerals for dates, for decimals, for house, apartment and room numbers, for street or avenue numbers, for telephone numbers, for page numbers, for percentages, for amounts of money involving both dollars and cents, to emphasize the exact time of day, or when A.M. or P.M. is used. May 9, 1996 20 percent $45.75 1:12 P.M. 96 Central finished the game with ninety-six points, but South had 104 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill points. C 1. There will be a partial eclipse of the moon on May 15. C 2. The eclipse begins at 2:15 P.M. first 48 percent 3. She was the lst in her family to go to college. 4. About forty-eight % of the students bring their lunches to school. 60 5. This slice of bread has 120 calories; that one has sixty. C 6. I think she lives at 20 St. James Place. 21 7. My grandmother lives in Apartment twenty-one. C 8. He dropped his books for the second time that day. C 9. The telephone number of the planetarium is 787-2112. third 10. Did you do the 3rd problem yet? Unit 12, Punctuation 261 Mechanics  Exercise 1 Write the correct form of the number in each sentence. Write C if the sentence is correct. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ C 12. Alabama has 53 miles of coastline; Florida has 770. 53 13. Please open your book to page fifty-three. C 14. When it’s ten o’clock in Ohio, it’s seven o’clock in California. C 15. I’ve seen that movie three times. C 16. Twenty-five percent of all our customers are under sixteen years old. forty-five 17. Can you lend me 45 cents until tomorrow? 5:25 18. Supper is at five-twenty-five P.M. sharp. third 19. Last night we had spaghetti for the 3rd time this week. 33 20. Send your postcards to thirty-three Exchange St. C 21. Massachusetts entered the Union on February 6, 1788. first 22. Delaware was the lst state to enter the Union. 4000 23. People began writing in about four thousand B.C. 1 fifteen C Mechanics 11. Mom got home at around 6 o’clock. eight percent 24. In A.D. one there were about 200 million people in the world. 25. Is fifteen miles longer than 15 kilometers? 26. This is the sixth episode of the show that I’ve seen. 27. Is it 8 o’clock already? 28. We are 100% ready. C 29. The movie starts at 6:20 P.M. and ends at eight o’clock. C 30. Confucius lived around 500 B.C. 262 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill six Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 12 Review  Exercise 1 Add punctuation marks where needed. Underline words or phrases that should be in italics. Terri, you’re in charge of refreshments for our next meeting. 1. Usually on Saturday nights my family eats at a restaurant, goes to a movie, or plays a board game at home. 2. For the first time in his life, he went to Disneyland. 3. No, he wasn’t a bit afraid of the roller coaster. or ! 4. Terry wore a green-striped shirt, and Jerry wore a polka-dotted one. 5. The Children’s Hour is popular on our local cable channel. 6. “Get out of the way!”yelled Jeff. 7. December 1, 1968, is Aunt Barbie’s birthday. 8. What an exciting movie! 9. Gerald moved to Indianapolis, Indiana, just before school started. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 11. My oldest sister graduated on June 9, 1995, and her title is now Jean Stewart, M. D. 12. On New Year’s Eve I resolved the following:get plenty of sleep, exercise daily, and eat nothing but chocolate for the rest of the day! or . : 13. I planned to get up at 6 00 A. M.;I arose at seven. 14. Mary asked,“Where are you going?” 15. Tranh’s favorite movie is Angels in the Outfield. 16. Alisha, your mother is here to take you home. 17. Why couldn’t the coin’s inscription be 4 B. C.? 18. Mr. Cline works at NASA as an engineer. Unit 12, Punctuation 263 Mechanics 10. The grand total of Lisa’s savings was twenty-seven cents. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Cumulative Review: Units 1–12  Exercise 1 Draw a line under the correct word in parentheses. I gave my sketches (to, two) Akira. 1. (Their, They’re) flying to Canada next week. 2. We had (all ready, already) finished the homework. 3. Gene has (two, too) pet turtles. 4. I (accept, except) your apology. 5. Let’s toast the marshmallows and (than, then) play cricket. 6. The problem is this (loose, lose) wire. 7. Put the bike (in, into) the garage. 8. (Its, It’s) a shame that you missed the parade. 9. Karen went to (lay, lie) down. 10. I bought a tape that teaches Spanish because I like to (learn, teach) other languages. 11. Will you (let, leave) me go horseback riding with Steve? 13. (Beside, Besides) math, I enjoy band and science. 14. If I have to (choose, chose) the dog’s name, it’s going to be “Arfie.” 15. Gail is (all ready, already) for the recital. 16. (Lay, Lie) the bottle of sunscreen on the beach. 17. Everyone in our family (accept, except) Alex had a cold last weekend. 18. A lilac bush grows (between, among) the house and the garage. 19. The sad-eyed puppy licked (its, it’s) paw. 20. (Sit, Set) the box on top of the washer. 264 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mechanics 12. Sophie was bobbing up and down (in, into) the pool. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 2 Draw a line under each prepositional phrase and write whether it is used as an adjective (adj.) or adverb. (adv.). Insert a comma if the sentence requires it. adv. adv., adv. 1. After the movie, we went to Burger[Heaven. adv. 2. The newfallen snow glittered in the moonlight. adv. 3. The choir is singing at the mall. adj. 4. The song of whales is beautiful. adv. 5. The bay was filled with smog. adv. 6. Because of the storm we stayed inside. adv. 7. The sunset leaked gold accents across the deep purple sky. adv. 8. The car emerged from the garage. adv. 9. The lightning crashed into the tree. 10. The dog from next door followed me home. adv. 11. The breeze carried Camilla’s voice across the lake. adv. 12. Melisa left the room before the bell. adj. 13. Carol, write a poem about our town. adv. 14. Do you see the colorful oriole in that big tree? adv. 15. East of town the circus will be held. 16. The echoes of a faraway bell spread across the remote valley. adv. 17. The baby birds were chirping inside of their nest. adv. 18. The toddler spilled lemonade on Jenifer’s new slacks. adv. 19. Bart splashed the cool water against his face. adv. 20. Does anyone know why Victor is flying to Texas? adj. 21. I want the chair next to Gloria. adj. 22. The teapot with the broken lid was never used. adv., adj. Mechanics adj. adj., adv. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill From the doorway I heard the phone ringing. 23. After the rehersal on Wednesday, the director felt discouraged. adv. 24. Across the street rolled the empty wagon. adv. 25. The lion cub tumbled down the hill. Unit 12, Punctuation 265 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 3 Place the correct punctuation mark after each sentence. What do you think of my haircut? 1. We did it! or . 2. Where did you put my eyeshadow? 3. I left my bike under the shade tree. 4. Madras is coming! or . 5. Mr. Dubois is ready to judge the Science Fair. 6. Gary, what did you do with my history book? 7. Close the refrigerator door. 8. Who ate all the fudge? 9. I want to write like Roald Dahl. 10. My parents decided to unplug the TV for one whole week. 11. Did Tio Jorge call? 13. Is that story about a Trojan horse based on fact? ! 14. Henny Penny warned, “The sky is falling” 15. Get out of there fast! or . 16. How can you not like that band? 17. I’ve already read that book. 18. The hamster got out! or . 19. My bike needs new tires and a paint job. 20. Eat healthful foods, and get plenty of exercise. ! 21. The sailor in the crow’s nest shouted, “Land ahoy” 22. The kindergartners listened closely to Carlene’s story. 23. Was first prize a computer? 24. Tom added a Ted Williams card to his baseball card collection. 25. First, line up in alphabetic order. 266 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Mechanics 12. Let Daniel come with us to Garcy Park to play baseball. Vocabulary and Spelling Vocabulary and Spelling 267 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 13: Vocabulary and Spelling Lesson 86 Building Vocabulary: Learning from Context Context clues are words and sentences around an unfamiliar word that explain its meaning. Three types of context clues are definition, example, and general context. The definition, or meaning, of the unfamiliar word may be given in the sentence. Clue words such as that is, in other words, or which means tell you that a definition is following. Sometimes examples are given to explain an unfamiliar word. The clue words like, for example, including, or such as often come before an example. If there are no special clue words in the sentence, you can use the general context. That is, you can use the details in the words or sentences around the new word to determine its meaning. Darla is a philatelist, which means that she collects stamps. (The clue words which means tell you that the word philatelist means “stamp collector.”) Bovines, including domestic cattle and the American bison, are an important source of food for many cultures. (The word including introduces examples of bovines. From the examples you can guess that bovines are members of the cattle family.)  Exercise 1 Write in the blank the meaning of the word in italics. Vocabulary and Spelling Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Armand took the rough stones to a lapidary. She was going to cut, grind, and polish the stones so that they could be set in silver bracelets. (The general context tells you that a lapidary has something to do with making jewelry. A lapidary is a person who works with gemstones.) Arnold is good at ciphering, which is an old way of saying he is good at math. using numbers as in math 1. Wolves are carnivores, which means they are meat eaters. animals that eat meat 2. Fina owns several large implements such as a tractor, a combine, and a baler. tools 3. Ms. Chien praised our deportment, or in other words, our behavior. behavior, manner Unit 13, Vocabulary and Spelling 269 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 4. Jerry’s father filled the spaces between the tiles with grout, that is, thin finishing plaster. a plaster or cement used to hold tiles in place 5. Primates, such as apes and humans, usually have well-developed brains. a high order of mammals 6. The motel offered many amenities, such as a pool and free soda. special added features 7. Marla grew up in a parsonage, that is, a minister’s home. a home provided for a pastor 8. The sisters cleaned the vacant lot gratis; in other words, they were not paid. for free 9. We just finished a unit on famous edifices, such as cathedrals and skyscrapers. large, imposing buildings 10. Jingdan is quite meticulous; that is, she pays attention to every detail. very exact and accurate 11. Marco played several percussion instruments, including snare drum, tympani, and xylophone. instruments that produce sound by being struck 12. Chicago hosted a convention of numismatists, who are people who collect coins. 13. The crowd guffawed; in other words, they laughed loudly. Vocabulary and Spelling laughed loudly 14. A good chef uses many herbs, such as basil and garlic. plants used for seasoning 15. Mr. Ramirez has sports memorabilia such as his ticket stub from the 1956 World Series. objects that bring memories 16. The picnic grounds were very tranquil. No traffic noise interrupted us. The wind was calm. Even the birds were quiet. peaceful, relaxed 270 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill coin collectors Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 87 Building Vocabulary: Prefixes A prefix is a word part that is added to the beginning of a word and changes its meaning. An understanding of prefixes and their meanings will help you learn new words. The king was dethroned. (The prefix de - means “remove from” or “reduce”; therefore, the king was removed from his throne.) PREFIX MEANING EXAMPLE MEANING innot indirect not direct nonwithout nonstop without stopping not nonsalable unable to be sold unopposite of, not unclean not clean to reverse untie to loosen prebefore prepay to pay in advance deremove from dethrone remove from the throne reduce degrade to make lower disopposite of, not disagree not agree  Exercise 1 Underline the prefix of each word. Using the meaning of the prefix, write in the blank the meaning of the word. Use a dictionary if you are uncertain of the meaning. to select in advance 1. devalue to lower in value 11. nonsense without reason or sense 2. disassemble to take apart 12. preheat to heat in advance 3. unfit not proper or qualified 13. deactivate to stop action 4. preview to view in advance 14. undo to reverse what 5. inactive not active, at rest 6. nonverbal without speech 15. discourage to take away one’s courage 7. defrost to remove frost 16. insensitive not sensitive, unfeeling 8. unfold to remove the folds, 17. disadvantage opposite of advantage to open up 18. nonskid without sliding or skidding before the war 19. involuntary not voluntary to remove a plant’s buds 20. prejudge to judge in advance 9. prewar 10. disbud has been done Unit 13, Vocabulary and Spelling 271 Vocabulary and Spelling Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill preselect Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 2 Write in the blank a word with a prefix that means the same as the words in parentheses. preview 1. His actions were very [ the new movie. (view in advance) unkind 2. Mara’s homework was [ . (not kind) incomplete . (not complete) 3. When playing this card game, after each turn you must [ card from your hand) 4. Harold completed the job in one [ 5. Does your mother always [ advance) 6. Juan helped Teresa [ 9. We agree to [ preapprove defrost 7. Detectives often travel in [ 8. The man used [ nonstop disagree the refrigerator. (remove the frost) deplane 13. The items at the bake sale were [ Vocabulary and Spelling 15. The chilly wind added to his [ cars. (no markings) . (not agree) nonfat 11. Mr. Alvarez was very thin during his [ 14. The puppy was a victim of [ session. (without stopping) quotations in his speech. (not direct) 10. The sauce was made with [ 12. Passengers may [ airplane) . (remove a the books that you read? (approve in unmarked indirect discard milk. (fat removed) preteen years. (before teenage) at gate forty-two. (remove themselves from the unpriced inhumane discomfort . (not priced) treatment. (not humane) . (lack of comfort).  Writing Link Write a paragraph about a relaxing Saturday afternoon. Use at least three words with prefixes and underline them. 272 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Achim was chosen to [ Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 88 Building Vocabulary: Suffixes A suffix is a word part that is added to the end of a word and changes its part of speech and its meaning. Adding the suffix -er to read (a verb) makes reader (a noun). Adding -less to face (a noun) makes faceless (an adjective). SUFFIX -er -or -ist -less -able -ible EXAMPLE baker dicer more one who one who without can be having the quality of can be having the quality of quality of state of being stronger debtor clarinetist changeless washable valuable MEANING one who bakes a device that chops or dices vegetables more strong one who owes a debt one who plays a clarinet without change can be washed having value deductible sensible can be deducted having sense gentleness greatness quality of being gentle state of being great  Exercise 1 Write the word that is formed by adding the given suffix to each word. Then write a basic meaning of the new word. Be careful to check the spelling of the new word. winner one who wins 1. fault + -less faultless without fault 2. advise + -or adviser one who advises 3. make + -er maker one who makes 4. like + -able likable can be liked 5. piano + -ist pianist one who plays the piano 6. ready + -ness readiness the state of being ready 7. kind + -ness kindness the quality of being kind win + -er Unit 13, Vocabulary and Spelling Vocabulary and Spelling Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill -ness MEANING one who that which 273 8. freeze + -er freezer that which freezes something 9. depend + -able dependable can be depended on 10. terror + -ible terrible having the quality of terror 11. weak + -er weaker more weak 12. mow + -er mower that which mows 13. match + -less matchless without match or equal 14. admire + -able admirable can be admired 15. good + -ness goodness quality of being good 16. resist + -ible resistible can be resisted 17. defense + -ible defensible can be defended 18. aware + -ness awareness state of being aware 19. grant + -or grantor one who grants or gives 20. type + -ist typist one who types 21. wrestle + -er wrestler one who wrestles 22. laugh + -able laughable can be laughed at 23. sure + -er surer more sure 24. calm + -ness calmness state of being calm 25. force + -ible forcible having the quality of force 26. burn + -er burner that which burns something 27. thin + -er thinner more thin 28. cycle + -ist cyclist one who rides cycles 29. ill + -ness illness state of being ill 30. honor + -able honorable having the quality of honor 31. write + -er writer one who writes 32. fast + -er faster more fast, speedier 33. damp + -ness dampness state of being damp 34. sleep + -less sleepless without sleep 35. teach + -er teacher one who teaches 274 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Vocabulary and Spelling Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 89 Synonyms and Antonyms Synonyms are words that have similar meanings. Knowing synonyms can help you understand new words. Some dictionaries list synonyms with the definition of a word. A thesaurus is a special dictionary that lists all synonyms. Because each synonym has a slightly different meaning, choosing the right one can help you say exactly what you mean. The cat sprang at the ball of yarn. (Substituting a synonym such as jumped or leaped could help in understanding the unfamiliar word sprang.) The man walked to the store. (Ambled and trudged are synonyms for walked. Using one of these synonyms would give a slightly different meaning to the sentence.) Antonyms are words that have opposite or nearly opposite meanings. Knowing antonyms can also help you understand unfamiliar words. Common ones are hotcold, large-small, and love-hate. Many antonyms can be formed by adding a prefix meaning not. Adding un- to bending makes unbending, the antonym to bending.  Exercise 1 Circle the best synonym for each italicized word. Use a dictionary if necessary. 1. The band has an immense following. large intense crude silly 2. Francisco pleaded with his mother for a new skateboard. pulled argued asked begged Vocabulary and Spelling Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Maria enjoyed the placid atmosphere of the library. plastic quiet studious stressed 3. If you want to acquire fame, do something better than anyone else. buy get know allow 4. Most birds go to roost at dusk. bedtime night twilight afternoon 5. Alan took good care of his molars. clippers binoculars moles teeth 6. Rabbits shed their coats four times a year. jackets skin fur nails Unit 13, Vocabulary and Spelling 275 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 7. Micah went shopping for sports apparel. clothing equipment cards item 8. At the end of the race, Ke Min was exhausted. happy upset tired last 9. Kim was proud of her raven hair. brown blonde black red 10. Yoshin loved the scent of roses. price beauty smell color 11. Renee has great affection for Pedro. falsehood dislike candy love 12. I witnessed his solemn vow. sad serious fame silent 13. The mariner prized his blue parrot. seaman cook preacher master 14. How will you conclude that story for English class? end produce copy write 15. Grandpa spent his entire life in agronomy. pain teasing farming astronomy  Exercise 2 Write an antonym for each word by adding the proper prefix. Use a dictionary to check meaning and spelling. unhappy 1. appear disappear 11. compress decompress 2. direct indirect 12. infect disinfect 3. complete incomplete 13. support nonsupport 4. true untrue 14. dress undress 5. sense nonsense 15. pack unpack 6. equal unequal 16. mount dismount 7. own disown 17. activate deactivate 8. root uproot 18. essential nonessential 9. hook unhook 19. place displace disjoin 20. welcome unwelcome 10. join 276 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Vocabulary and Spelling happy Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 90 Homonyms Homonyms are words that sound alike but have different meanings. Homonyms may have the same spelling or different spellings. Those that have different spellings can be tricky when writing. Be careful to choose the correct word for the meaning you want to use. HOMONYM here hear through threw its it’s to too two principal principle their there they’re your you’re MEANING this place listen in one side, out the opposite tossed belonging to it contraction for it is or it has in the direction of also, in addition to the number one in charge of a school a rule, guideline, or law belonging to them in that place contraction for they are belonging to you contraction for you are Katya wrote a letter (while, wile) Lu Chan talked on the phone. 1. The (knight, night) wore shining armor. Vocabulary and Spelling Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill  Exercise 1 Underline the homonym in parentheses that best completes each sentence. 2. Mrs. Chin (new, knew) that yesterday was my birthday. 3. I had eight (right, write, rite) answers out of ten. 4. Jason (through, threw) his jacket on the couch. 5. A blue jay perched on the lowest (bough, bow) of the tree. 6. Who will be the first to (break, brake) the piñata? 7. The tomato vines were tied to wooden (steaks, stakes). 8. Would you like a (peace, piece) of pie? Unit 13, Vocabulary and Spelling 277 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 9. The man wore (wholly, holey, holy) gloves. 10. When (your, you’re) all alone, the sound of the wind is frightening. 11. Aggie couldn’t wait to (hear, here) the results of the election. 12. Billy and An-Li lost (there, their) homework. 13. (Its, It’s) a wonderful story. 14. My brother likes going (too, to, two) the fair. 15. The contest was guided by the (principles, principals) of fair play. 16. (Who’s, Whose) notebook is on the floor? 17. How many times does the (tied, tide) rise each day? 18. Carlos sanded his bicycle frame to the (bear, bare) metal. 19. Did Consuelo (tare, tear) her sleeve? 20. The wild (boar, bore) is a dangerous animal. 21. The storm delayed her departure for an (our, hour). 22. The cabin was located on a (hi, high) mountain. 23. The (cent, scent) reminded me of the woods. 24. Is that the (sight, site, cite) of the new mall? 25. Will Myra’s apology (lesson, lessen) Merle’s pain? 27. My quarter rolled off the curb and through the sewer (great, grate). Vocabulary and Spelling 28. Does the fireplace need more (would, wood)? 29. Beethoven was (borne, born) on December 16, 1770. 30. I put a (pear, pair) in my backpack for a snack.  Writing Link Write two or more sentences with homonym pairs. 278 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 26. This discussion makes no (scents, cents, sense). Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 91 Basic Spelling Rules I SUFFIXES AND THE SILENT E When adding a suffix that begins with a consonant to a word that ends with a silent e, keep the e. When adding a suffix that begins with a or o to a word that ends with ce or ge, keep the e. When adding a suffix that begins with a vowel to a word that ends in ee or oe, keep the e. love + -ly = lovely knowledge + -able = knowledgeable canoe + -ing = canoeing When adding -ly to a word that ends with an l plus a silent e, drop the e. When adding a suffix that begins with a vowel or y to a word that ends with a silent e, usually drop the e. terrible + -ly = terribly shine + -ing = shining nose + -y = nosy SUFFIXES AND THE FINAL Y When a word ends in a consonant + y, change the y to i. When the suffix begins with an i, do not change the y to i. When a word ends in a vowel + y, keep the y. fry + -ed = fried cry + -ing = crying relay + -ed = relayed SPELLING IE AND EI Put i before e except after c and when sounded like a, as in neighbor and weigh. Some exceptions to this rule are height, seize, leisure, either, efficient. deceive eight  Exercise 1 Write the word that is formed when the suffix given is added to each word. try + -ed tried 1. try + -ing trying 8. awe + -some awesome 2. admire + -able admirable 9. probable + -ly probably 3. home + -ly homely 10. manage + -able manageable 4. cry + -ed cried 11. muddy + -ing muddying 5. state + -ment statement 12. fry + -ing frying 6. foresee + -able foreseeable 13. like + -ness likeness 7. annoy + -ing annoying 14. gentle + -ly gently Unit 13, Vocabulary and Spelling 279 Vocabulary and Spelling Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill belief Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 15. change + -able changeable 18. mercy + -ful merciful 16. play + -ful playful 19. craze + -y crazy 17. shoe + -ing shoeing 20. merry + -ment merriment  Exercise 2 Write the word in the blank that is formed by adding ei or ie to the incomplete word in each sentence. belief 1. Ms. Kang will not stray from her bel[ f. receipt 2. Wally did not bring his rec[ pt with him. vein 3. The v[ n of ore ran for nearly three miles. conceive 4. How could anyone conc[ ve of such a thing? achieve 5. Dowana worked hard to ach[ ve honor-roll status. freight 6. In the distance, we heard the whistle of a fr[ ght train. chief 7. Mr. Suzuki was appointed ch[ f of staff. priest 8. Father O’Brien had been a parish pr[ st for forty years. eight 9. Mario had [ ght years of piano lessons. retrieve 10. Duke learned to retr[ ve a stick in only three days. receive 11. Is Pam well enough to rec[ ve visitors? height 12. Our sunflowers grew to a h[ ght of eleven feet. eight 13. I read [ ght books this month. conceited Vocabulary and Spelling The Hawaiians gave me a necklace of flowers called a l[ . 14. Sue’s brother is conc[ ted. grieve 15. How long did Alice gr[ ve after Alejandra moved to Texas? ceiling 16. What color shall we paint the c[ ling? veil 17. What kind of lace did Jana choose for her v[ l? deceit 18. Be careful that his promises contain no dec[ t. sleigh 19. We went for a sl[ gh ride. weight 20. Athletes must maintain a certain w[ ght. 280 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill lei Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 92 Basic Spelling Rules II When a word ends in a single consonant following one vowel, double the final consonant if the word is one syllable. Also double the final consonant if the last syllable of the word is accented and the accent stays there after the suffix is added. sit + -ing = sitting refer + -ed = referred slap + -ed = slapped occur + -ence = occurrence sad + -er = sadder deter + -ing = deterring Do not double the final consonant if the suffix begins with a consonant, if the accent is not on the last syllable, or if the accent moves when the suffix is added. hurt + ful = hurtful envelop + -ed = enveloped refer + -ence = reference pain + -less = painless great + -ly = greatly govern + -ing = governing motor + -ize = motorize confer + -ence = conference Do not double the final consonant if two vowels come before the final consonant or if the word ends in two consonants. drain + -ed = drained start + -er = starter moan + -ing = moaning belong + -ing = belonging keep + -ing = keeping apart + -ment = apartment When adding -ly to a word that ends in ll, drop one l. dull + -ly = dully full + -ly = fully When forming compound words, keep the original spelling of both words. fly + wheel = flywheel back + pack = backpack  Exercise 1 Write the word that is formed when the suffix given is added to each word. fan + -ing Vocabulary and Spelling Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill soap + box = soapbox fanning 1. pat + -ed patted 8. confer + -ence conference 2. expel + -ing expelling 9. glad + -est gladdest 3. full + -ly fully 10. main + -ly mainly 4. rain + -ing raining 11. equip + -ed equipped 5. admit + -ance admittance 12. sharp + -ly sharply 6. shut + -er shutter 13. layer + -ing layering 7. civil + -ize civilize 14. pad + -ing padding Unit 13, Vocabulary and Spelling 281 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 15. rebel + -ed rebelled 18. tip + -ing tipping 16. loan + -ed loaned 19. smart + -est smartest 17. plant + -ed planted 20. begin + -er beginner  Exercise 2 Write the compound word formed from the words in parentheses. If the sentence is correct, write C in the blank. C bedroom C beehive C 1. What did you use for a (steering wheel) on your go-cart? 2. Micah does his studying in his (bed room). 3. Marisha is proud of her (table manners). 4. Yesterday, our class was a (bee hive) of activity. 5. With a huge leap, Katarina caught the (line drive). bookkeeper 6. Does your mother hire a (book keeper)? earthquake 7. No one in our class has ever experienced an (earth quake). C 8. Mr. Sanchez wore gray (dress pants) with his blue blazer. anybody 9. Achim finished the test before (any body) else. C 10. Did you remember to bring your (fishing pole)? snowstorm C somewhere Vocabulary and Spelling Please hand me the smallest (screw driver). 11. How many hours did the (snow storm) last? 12. Do you think Mimi would like a (jewelry box) for her birthday? 13. I know that book is (some where) in this room. C 14. Ms. Yedon has the most beautiful (flower garden) in the neighborhood. strawberry 15. My favorite part of the meal was the (straw berry) and banana dessert. C 16. Please bring some (light bulbs) when you come home. C 17. Elijah has a new (sport coat) to wear to the program. warehouse C windshield 18. Dad purchased our new television directly from the (ware house). 19. Our (bird feeder) needs to be refilled. 20. I was scared when the stone flew against the (wind shield). 282 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill screwdriver Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 93 Basic Spelling Rules III Many English words form plurals by specific rules. If the noun ends in s, ch, sh, x, or z (including proper names), add -es. grass, grasses catch, catches fox, foxes Lopez, Lopezes If the noun ends in a consonant + y, change the y to i and add -es. carry, carries mercy, mercies puppy, puppies If the noun ends in o or a vowel + y, add -s. rodeo, rodeos Exceptions: piano, pianos potato, potatoes key, keys echo, echoes boy, boys If the noun ends in f or ff, add -s. beef, beefs Exceptions: clef, clefs sheaf, sheaves cuff, cuffs loaf, loaves (change f to v and add -es) If the noun ends in lf or fe, change the f to v and add -es. calf, calves shelf, shelves life, lives One-word compound nouns follow the general rules for plurals. For compound nouns of more than one word or hyphenated words, make the most important word plural. lady-in-waiting, ladies-in-waiting chief of staff, chiefs of staff Some nouns have irregular plurals and follow no rules. man, men foot, feet child, children Vocabulary and Spelling Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill grandmother, grandmothers ice cream, ice creams Some nouns do not change spelling for the plural. deer, deer sheep, sheep series, series  Exercise 1, Write the correct plural form of each word. watch watches 1. dress dresses 3. factory factories 2. Aldrich Aldriches 4. goof goofs Unit 13, Vocabulary and Spelling 283 5. joy joys 23. stress stresses 6. broomstick broomsticks 24. toy toys 7. loaf loaves 25. Jones Joneses 8. glass glasses 26. buzz buzzes 9. box boxes 27. latch latches 10. wish wishes 28. moose moose 11. editor in chief editors in chief 29. mother-in-law mothers-in-law 12. Truax Truaxes 30. dish dishes 13. folly follies 31. kangaroo kangaroos 14. crutch crutches 32. berry berries 15. woman women 33. Martinez Martinezes 16. beach beaches 34. wedding ring wedding rings 17. McCandlish McCandlishes 35. cuff cuffs 18. proof proofs 36. mouse mice 19. knife knives 37. wife wives 20. fifty fifties 38. handkerchief handkerchiefs 21. secretary-general secretaries-general 39. stereo stereos 22. echo echoes 40. half halves Vocabulary and Spelling  Writing Link Write a paragraph about a group of people. Use at least four plural words. 284 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 94 Often Misspelled Words Some words do not follow basic spelling rules. This can make them hard to spell. One way to learn how to spell difficult words is to make a personal word list. List the words that you find especially difficult or that you often misspell. Study the correct spellings. Use these words in your writing to remember how to spell them.  Exercise 1 Underline the word in parentheses that is spelled correctly. Brad could become a famous (athelete, athlete) someday. 1. Julia will (recommend, reccommend) a song for the celebration. 2. The Mayfield Middle School soccer team (garantees, guarantees) a victory in tomorrow’s game. 3. Our school (chior, choir) practices three times a week. 4. Tanya found it difficult to choose a video because the store had such a wide (variety, vareity). 5. Steve and Jose ate lunch in the (cafiteria, cafeteria). 6. We are waiting for the committee to announce (definite, defanite) plans. 8. Have you filled out your (skedule, schedule) for next semester yet? 9. Margaret painted a picture of a (beatiful, beautiful) sunset while on vacation in South Carolina. Vocabulary and Spelling Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 7. Mrs. Kwan introduced her (niece, neice) to the class. 10. The well-known scientist gave us a tour of her (labertory, laboratory). 11. Mom was (truely, truly) pleased with the birthday present. 12. Randy had several books to return to the (libary, library). 13. I hope Billy doesn’t do anything to (embarass, embarrass) me. 14. Katrina is going to read her (original, orignal) story to us. 15. The festival will begin at twelve o’clock (Wednesday, Wenesday). 16. Todd’s (abcense, absence) made it impossible for us to rehearse the play. Unit 13, Vocabulary and Spelling 285 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 17. According to the weather forecaster, it will (probably, probablely) rain tomorrow. 18. The entire family is going to Little Rock to see Uncle Luigi, who will be (fourty, forty) years old this Saturday. 19. Jake saw a (humerous, humorous) program on television. 20. Rachel and Joan have (similar, simaler) taste in clothing.  Exercise 2 Complete each word by filling in the missing letters. accident [ a [ l ly (happening by accident) 1. traff [ i [ c (movement of cars along a road) 2. de [ s [ c end (to go from a higher place to a lower one) 3. rest [ a [ u rant (a place where people eat) 4. us [ u [ a lly (most of the time) 5. for [ e [ i gn (outside one’s own country) 6. ne [ c e [ s sary (needed; required) 7. perm [ a n [ e nt (lasting; without change) 8. gramm [ a r (the study of words and sentences) 9. advi [ s [ e r (a person who gives information or recommendations) 10. n [ e [ i ghborhood (the area in which one lives) Vocabulary and Spelling 12. li [ c en [ s e (a permit to do something) 13. bus [ i n [ e ss (a company or type of work) 14. immed [ i [ a te (right away; now) 15. h [ e [ i ght (the distance from the bottom to the top of something) 16. te [ c [ h nology (new knowledge or a new way of doing something) 17. rec [ o [ g nize (to know or be familiar with) 18. sep [ a r [ a te (distinct; apart) 19. ball [ e [ t (a classical dance) 20. gove [ r [ n ment (an organization formed to run a country) 286 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 11. jew [ e [ l ry (rings, bracelets, necklaces) Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 95 Easily Confused Words Some words are often confused because they sound similar, even though they have different spellings and meanings. desert, dessert When the accent is on the first syllable, desert means “a dry, barren region.” When the accent is on the second syllable, desert means “to abandon.” Dessert is a sweet course served at the end of a meal. lessen, lesson Lessen means “to shrink in size or degree.” Lesson means “something to learn.” passed, past Passed means “to have moved on or ahead.” Past means “time gone by” or “existed earlier.” quiet, quite Quiet means “little or no sound.” Quite means “wholly, completely.” weather, whether Weather means “the daily conditions of temperature, moisture, wind, and so on.” Whether is a conjunction often used in indirect quotations.  Exercise 1 Underline the word that best completes each sentence. The doctor advised Mr. Wilson to (lessen, lesson) his intake of fat. 2. Tina finished reading that story in one (hour, our). Vocabulary and Spelling Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 1. Jim’s cousins offered to show him (their, there) secret clubhouse. 3. Mom likes to drink English breakfast (tea, tee). 4. Louis cannot decide (weather, whether) to practice baseball or soccer. 5. Kim’s kite sailed (higher, hire) into the air than Bill’s kite. 6. Once the assembly began, everyone grew (quiet, quite). 7. Uncle Simon took pictures of his trip through the (desert, dessert). 8. Ling said the movie was so dull that he couldn’t (bare, bear) to watch it. 9. This book is about a poor girl who becomes (air, heir) to a fortune. 10. Calid (passed, past) Mr. Sokol on his way home from school. Unit 13, Vocabulary and Spelling 287 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 11. Dad refused to let Tommy (peak, peek) at his birthday gifts before the party. 12. Mrs. Jenkins and her husband cooked (stake, steak) for the winners of the spelling bee. 13. Sara will (right, write) a letter to her friend after dinner. 14. Jean was (holy, wholly) surprised when she won the contest. 15. Dividing fractions was today’s math (lessen, lesson). 16. Poloma ate the last (peace, piece) of blueberry pie. 17. Don’t forget to bring (your, you’re) camera. 18. My cat might (brake, break) that vase if I leave it on the windowsill. 19. Ramon (blew, blue) the trumpet, but no sound came out. 20. Jermaine saw several (dear, deer) in the park yesterday. 21. Grandmother (cent, sent) each of us a beautiful sweater. 22. Anne (wood, would) like to learn how to dance. 23. Larry bought a new computer game because it was on (sail, sale). 24. The bright sun cast (it’s, its) rays across the meadow. 25. The Watsons are planning a vacation by the (sea, see). 26. What kind of ice cream do you want for (desert, dessert)? 27. The speaker began by stating her (main, mane) purpose. Vocabulary and Spelling 29. David went to the store to buy (meat, meet) and potatoes. 30. Belinda likes to (read, reed) historical novels. 31. Of all the people who live on our street, Ms. Romanoff receives the most (mail, male). 32. The gemstones we discovered in the treasure chest were (real, reel). 33. That comedian is very entertaining; he could never be a (boar, bore). 34. Kyle was extremely (soar, sore) after the hockey game. 35. Aunt Rita is in the kitchen making (moor, more) popcorn. 288 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 28. Kendra borrowed (for, four) videotapes from Roger. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 96 Review: Building Vocabulary  Exercise 1 Write the definition of the word in italics. If there are clue words, circle them. The cooler’s buoyancy, that is, its ability to float, saved the man from drowning. ability to float 1. Jim works in a haberdashery. He sells men’s shirts, socks, belts, and other accessories. a store that specializes in men’s clothing and accessories 2. The pine tree is a conifer–– that is, it bears cones. a tree that produces cones 3. Roses are perennials, which means that they live for many years. plants that live for many years 4. The loser created a spectacle. He pouted, stamped his feet, and slammed his hat on the ground. something viewed as unusual 5. Juan is a statistician, in other words, he keeps track of data. a person who collects and analyzes data 6. Reiko is bilingual, which means that she speaks two languages. 7. Diane shows traits of an extrovert. She makes friends easily, she participates in many activities, and the presence of strangers doesn’t bother her. Vocabulary and Spelling Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill able to speak two languages a person who is outgoing and friendly 8. In case of an emergency, our home has two auxiliary heating systems, including a wood stove and a kerosene heater. extra, supplementary 9. Elaine practices excellent hygiene–– that is, she is always neat and clean. cleanliness for the prevention of disease 10. Mrs. Tadashi’s greenhouse is full of tropical plants such as palms, orchids, and African violets. relating to a climate that supports year-round plant growth Unit 13, Vocabulary and Spelling 289 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 11. The dais was well decorated, including the platform, the seats for the speakers, and the podium. a raised platform used by speakers, honored guests, and the like 12. Having published the life stories of three movie stars, Miss Suzuki became a well known biographer. a person who writes an account of another person’s life 13. Mr. Green is a valuable custodian. Our building is always clean, and its equipment is maintained regularly. one in charge of cleaning and maintaining a building 14. Some people believe they can break the law with impunity; that is, they believe they will never be punished. freedom from punishment 15. That couch is called a divan because it has no back. a long backless couch 16. Amodahy’s father repairs major appliances such as refrigerators, washers, and dryers. electrical machines designed for household use 17. Covering nearly three acres, the concourse was filled with people awaiting the arrival of Air Force One. a large gathering area 18. A little arrow, known as a cursor, is moved by a mouse to select items on a personal computer. an electronic symbol that identifies the place of activity 19. Watching television is a secondary activity for Timothy. Completing his homework is more important. second in importance Vocabulary and Spelling Pennsylvania. very small paintings or objects  Exercise 2 Write synonyms, antonyms, or homonyms to describe each pair of words. quick, fast synonyms 1. terror, fright synonyms 7. hour, our homonyms 2. start, finish antonyms 8. behold, look at synonyms 3. weave, we’ve homonyms 9. like, dislike antonyms 4. ebony, black synonyms 10. meat, mete homonyms 5. hay, hey homonyms 11. important, unimportant antonyms 6. zip, unzip antonyms 12. light, featherweight synonyms 290 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 20. Barely six inches wide, the miniatures on the wall depicted covered bridges of Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 97 Review: Basic Spelling Rules  Exercise 1 Correct each misspelled word. Write C in the blank if the word is spelled correctly. Use a dictionary if necessary. allies 1. terriblely terribly 2. deciet deceit 3. keyes keys 4. relyance reliance 5. fullly fully 6. kittens C 7. potatos potatoes 8. changable changeable 9. brother-in-laws brothers-in-law 10. partly C 11. joiful joyful 12. muffes muffs 13. referrence reference 14. lonly lonely 15. swimer swimmer 16. pianoes pianos 17. riegn reign 18. offerring offering 19. soft drinks C 20. concieve conceive 21. neighbor C 22. friing frying Vocabulary and Spelling Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill allys Unit 13, Vocabulary and Spelling 291 23. leafs leaves 24. losses C 25. releif relief 26. neither C 27. childs children 28. trainnable trainable 29. sheeps sheep 30. liesure leisure 31. preist priest 32. moveing moving 33. halfs halves 34. serieses series 35. containning containing 36. flurrys flurries 37. oxes oxen 38. freing freeing 39. vien vein 40. watchs watches 41. toeing C 42. crispper crisper 43. peanut C 44. crazyer crazier 45. eighteen C 46. boxs boxes 47. maping mapping 48. wieghtier weightier 49. chief of staffs chiefs of staff 50. pigpen C 292 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Vocabulary and Spelling Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 13 Review  Exercise 1 Underline the word in parentheses that best completes each sentence. We studied (prewar, postwar) America—that is, America before the war. 1. No one can rely on Randy’s (changeable, changeless) personality. 2. The auditorium had a sufficiently (large, small) stage for the big production. 3. Julian (threw, through) his cap in the air. 4. Laura and Harry could not (beleive, believe) they had won the doubles tournament. 5. The book you are looking for is (siting, sitting) on a shelf. 6. This movie shows the (lifes, lives) of several famous people. 7. Dr. Kotlinski’s (neice, niece) will accompany us to the museum. 8. Sheila and her mother are making cheesecake for (desert, dessert). 9. When I learn Spanish, I will be bilingual; that is, I will speak (two, three) languages. 10. The happy people sang a (joiful, joyful) song as they worked. 11. The tickets have to be paid for in advance, which means we must (prepay, postpay). 12. Early in the morning, the beach is a placid, or (loud, quiet), place. 14. If George didn’t run to the park, maybe he (raced, walked). Vocabulary and Spelling Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 13. Jennifer adored the characters, so I think she (liked, disliked) the play. 15. (There, They’re) planning to go to the zoo on Saturday. 16. Everyone agreed it was a (lovely, lovly) day for a picnic. 17. Uncle Keith is attending a (conference, conferrence) in New Orleans. 18. The Carleys have three (radioes, radios) in their house. 19. Miki is a scholar and an (athelete, athlete). 20. The (weather, whether) will change greatly next week. 21. Dad asked the tailor to change the (cuffs, cuffes) on his shirt. 22. Two former (secretaries of state, secretary of states) attended the meeting. Unit 13, Vocabulary and Spelling 293 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Cumulative Review: Units 1–13 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Vocabulary and Spelling 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. V N Georgia visits the lakeshore in the summer. N prep. Uncle Andrew is famous for his roses. conj. prep. Sam and Patrick are working on a science fair project. adj. adv. A red cardinal flew gracefully over the trees. int. adj. Wow! Look at that beautiful rainbow. pro. N Celeste gave them a tour of the radio station. V adj. The story began with a trip to an unusual castle. conj. adj. Rachel often meets Marta in the park, and they fly their kites there. adv. prep. The baseball player quickly ran around the bases. pro. N She hopes to play the piano in the spring talent show. int. adj. Whew! It’s very hot today. V conj. Carter will demonstrate his new invention, but we cannot touch it. adj. V A silvery brook ran down the mountainside. conj. pro. Either Tyler or Rick will meet us at the ice cream shop. N adj. The drama club is presenting a funny play next week. V adj. Sun drenched the sandy beach. pro. prep. He borrowed three books from the library. V adv. We are going to the pet store tomorrow. N N Grandfather told us about his adventures at the carnival. 294 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill  Exercise 1 Write the part of speech above each italicized word: N (noun), V (verb), pro. (pronoun), adj. (adjective), adv. (adverb), prep. (preposition), conj. (conjunction), or int. (interjection). Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ pro. adj. 19. Last night I had a strange dream. N prep. 20. Dad is making lasagna for dinner.  Exercise 2 Underline the word in parentheses that best completes each sentence. I hope our team does not (loose, lose) the game. 1. The cat lost control of (its, it’s) ball of yarn. 2. Sven (all ready, already) programed the videocassette recorder. 3. The members of the group brought (too, two) many desserts to the meeting. 4. Janna will (choose, chose) which song to play first. 5. Geoff hopes to (learn, teach) German from his great-aunt. 6. No one (accept, except) Michael would try the new amusement park ride. 7. It is Carol’s turn to (raise, rise) the school flag. 8. (Beside, Besides) field hockey, Keshia also likes to play tennis. 9. Does anyone know (who’s, whose) jacket this is? 10. Peter can’t decide (among, between) the cherry pie and the peach pie. 11. Dr. Skybo is (all together, altogether) certain nothing is wrong. 13. The guests moved from the living room (in, into) the dining room. 14. Where should we (set, sit) for the picnic? Vocabulary and Spelling Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 12. (Lay, Lie) the newspaper on the kitchen table. 15. After buying the magazine, Tamara had (a lot of, sixteen) dollars left. 16. The bus will (leave, let) at one o’clock. 17. (Its, It’s) amazing how much we accomplished in such a short time. 18. Mr. Lombardo doesn’t know what time (their, they’re) plane arrives. 19. Are you going (to, too) the theater tonight? 20. First mix the batter; (than, then) pour it into the cake pans. Unit 13, Vocabulary and Spelling 295 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 3 Add any missing punctuation to each sentence. Clara,of course,was the director’s first choice for the role of Anna. 1. Mom asked us to buy bread,milk,and tomatoes. 2. Watch out for that falling tree limb! 3. In the last scene of the movie,the hero saves the planet. 4. Green is Louie’s favorite color;purple is Taylor’s favorite color. 5. The following issues will be discussed:goals,costs,and publicity. 6. Carlo,did you see the eclipse? 7. “My dream,”Katia said,“is to have my own store.” 8. Take these pictures to Mrs. Jackson’s office. 9. Forty-seven persons volunteered to help with the project. 10. March 18,1995,is a day I will never forget.  Exercise 4 Complete each word by filling in the missing letters. 1. tr [ i [ e d (attempted) 11. [ e [ i ght (4 + 4) 2. lov [ e [ l y (beautiful) 12. tri [ p [ p ed (stumbled) 3. hop [ i ng (longing) 13. deligh [ t ful (full of delight) 4. knowledg [ e [ a ble (full of 14. trai [ n ing (teaching) Vocabulary and Spelling knowledge) 15. catcher [ s (plural of catcher) 5. cano [ e [ i ng (rowing) 16. cherr [ i [ e [ s (plural of cherry) 6. fr [ i [ e s (plural of fry) 17. radio [ s (plural of radio) 7. sa [ y [ i ng (to say) 18. shel [ v [ e [ s (plural of shelf) 8. repl [ i [ e d (answered) 19. Thomas [ e [ s (plural of Thomas) 9. n [ i [ e ce (the daughter of one’s brother or sister) 20. secretar [ i [ e [ s (plural of secretary) 10. rec [ e [ i ve (to be given something) 296 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 21. Mary[ s (plural of Mary) Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill bel [ i [ e ve (to have faith) Composition Composition 297 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Unit 14: Composition Lesson 98 The Writing Process: Prewriting I During the prewriting stage, you plan what you will write. You choose a topic, or subject about which you will write. You can get ideas for topics in any of the following ways: • Freewrite Write for several minutes, nonstop, about whatever comes into your mind. • Collect information Gather facts and information from various sources. • Make a list of events, experiences, people, or ideas that interest you. • Ask questions Think of a question that you would like to answer. The topic you select may cover too much information for you to use in one piece of writing. When that is the case, you continue to ask questions or group the information into related items. When the information is cut down to a more suitable size, your topic will be narrow enough to write about. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill  Exercise 1 Spend five minutes prewriting. Continue writing the entire time. Then look over your freewriting and circle any ideas that you might use as writing topics. Composition Unit 14, Composition 299 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 2 For each general topic, list two narrower topics related to it that interest you. Volunteering Why do people like to volunteer? Volunteering at the cat shelter. 1. Dancing 2. Junk food 3. Your community 4. Pets 5. Math 6. Privacy 7. Self-confidence 9. Movies Composition 10. Computers 11. Jokes 12. Winter 300 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 8. Field trips Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 99 The Writing Process: Prewriting II During prewriting, you also choose a purpose—the goal you want to accomplish by writing about your topic. Your purpose might be to inform, to persuade, to entertain, to create a work of art, or perhaps a combination of these. Finally, you select and analyze your audience, those who will read or hear your work. Knowing your audience will help you decide what information to include and what writing style to use, such as formal or informal.  Exercise 1 Rewrite each word, phrase, or sentence for the audience named in parentheses. The new rule at school really bugs me. (Rewrite for an audience of parents.) The new rule at school is very unfair. 1. Manuel hit a homer in the bottom of the ninth inning to win the game. (Rewrite for an audience who knows nothing about baseball.) Manuel scored the winning point by hitting the ball over the fence late in the game. 2. Listen up, dudes. (Rewrite as a statement to a noisy roomful of students during a class.) Listen, everyone. 3. During the 1995 annual period, the corn crop had an extremely high yield. (Rewrite as Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill an explanation for a fellow student.) During 1995 the corn crop was plentiful. 4. No suds. No clean duds. (Rewrite as a note for someone about to go to the laundry.) Don’t forget the detergent when you wash the clothes. 5. This bread is made with 3 cups of flour, a stick of melted butter, 2 beaten eggs, 1 teaspoon of vanilla, and 2 teaspoons of cinnamon. (Rewrite as a description for someone who does not intend to make the bread.) This bread is made with flour, melted butter, eggs, vanilla, and cinnamon. Composition 6. Give the dog some drops of this medicine in his ears. (Reword as a veterinarian’s instructions to the dog’s owner. Invent any missing details.) Put three drops of the medicine in each ear once a day. Unit 14, Composition 301 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 7. That cap is radical, man. (Rewrite as a statement to a teacher.) Your cap is really nice. 8. Send me some stuff about Egyptian mummies. (Rewrite for a letter to the head of the education department at a natural history museum.) Could you please send any printed information you have about Egyptian mummies?  Exercise 2 Write the purpose of each of the following types of writing: to inform, to persuade, to entertain, or to create a work of art. Some items may have more than one purpose. a retelling of a funny scene from a movie to entertain, to inform 1. an account of what happens during one scene of a play to inform 2. a short story about a frog-jumping contest to entertain 3. several paragraphs in which the speaker pretends to be a speck of dust to create a work of art 4. a speech you will read to a community group about why your school needs more classrooms to persuade 5. a riddle to entertain 6. a note giving instructions on where to find a hidden object to inform 8. a letter to a college that is sent along with an application to persuade 9. a poem about a historical event to create a work of art, to inform 10. a composition comparing funny jokes and jokes that aren’t funny to inform, to persuade 11. a report on how different animals hibernate to inform 12. an announcement in a magazine about a writing contest to inform Composition 13. an editorial in the school paper about student safety at school to persuade 14. a newspaper article about last Friday’s basketball game to inform 15. a paragraph written for a parent explaining why the writer should get a larger allowance to persuade 16. a speech made by a candidate for mayor 302 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 to persuade Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 7. a review of a movie to inform, to persuade Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 100 The Writing Process: Drafting I After you have decided on your topic and purpose and gathered ideas and details for writing, you can begin drafting. Drafting is writing about your topic in paragraph form. The first paragraph of your draft should include a thesis statement, which is a sentence that presents the theme, or main point you want to make. The other paragraphs each develop a main idea related to the theme.  Exercise 1 Underline the thesis statement that best expresses each theme. Theme: the appeal of computer games Computer games can be very expensive. My favorite computer game is Donkey Kong. Someday I hope to design a computer game. Computer games involve the hand, the eye, and the mind. 1. Theme: the benefits of some bacteria Some bacteria are harmful. Many kinds of bacteria are useful to humans. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Bacteria are very tiny, single-celled organisms. Some helpful bacteria live in the human digestive tract. 2. Theme: the satisfactions of volunteering at the cat shelter Sign up at the front desk if you want to volunteer at the cat shelter. The cat shelter is a place where you can go to adopt a cat or kitten. I like cats because they are like miniature lions. I like volunteering at the cat shelter because I know I’m helping animals as well as our Composition community. 3. Theme: the health benefits of cross-country skiing Cross-country skiing offers fun for people of all ages. Cross-country skiing develops the heart and lungs as well as the body. Unit 14, Composition 303 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Cross-country skiing is an extremely popular sport in Norway. Cross-country skiing is much safer than downhill skiing. 4. Theme: the importance of wearing a bicycle helmet Bicycle helmets are not suitable for motorcyclists. Most bicycle helmets have a sleek shape to lower wind resistance. Bicyclists who have their heads on straight always wear helmets. Bicyclists who are safe riders always use hand signals when making turns. 5. Theme: the humor in a movie you saw recently Half of the characters in the movie Bonzo Goes Bananas are apes. Bonzo Goes Bananas is funnier than Bonzo Goes Ape. If you like slapstick humor, you’ll love the movie Bonzo Goes Bananas. The movie Bonzo Goes Bananas won’t appeal to everyone.  Exercise 2 Underline the three main ideas that support the thesis statement provided. Thesis statement: My first trip in an airplane went smoother than I expected. Main ideas: Airports are busy places these days. I was a little nervous at first. I spent the middle part of the trip studying the landscape far below. 1. Thesis statement: Building a bluebird house is not difficult. Main ideas: Assemble your materials. Construct the house. Paint or stain the house. Feed the bluebirds. Composition 2. Thesis statement: This model is a replica of a medieval castle. Main ideas: The design is typical of twelfth-century English castles. Women in medieval society were in charge of household tasks. The rooms are authentically furnished and decorated. The tiny figures represent the royal family, their knights, and servants. 304 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill The descent and landing were exciting. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 101 The Writing Process: Drafting II Each paragraph has a topic sentence which states the main idea. Other sentences in the paragraph contain details that support the main idea.  Exercise 1 Write three related sentences that provide details to support the topic sentence. 1. Immigrants to the United States sometimes have difficulty adjusting to their new country. 2. The Underground Railroad was a secret network that allowed slaves to travel north to Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill freedom. 3. Sometimes a younger brother or sister can be a bother. Composition Unit 14, Composition 305 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 4. Native Americans are sometimes called the first Americans. 5. A sixth grader needs to have some private time. 6. Black Studies Week is a time to celebrate the accomplishments of African Americans. Composition 8. You can catch more flies with honey than with vinegar. 306 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 7. Students and teachers should treat one another with respect. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 102 The Writing Process: Revising I After you complete a first draft, you will want to revise, or improve your writing. Begin by looking at each individual paragraph. The topic sentence should clearly state what the paragraph is about. Each of the other sentences should support the topic sentence and work together to develop the topic in a clear, interesting way. If you find a sentence in your paragraph that does not support the topic, either move it to a paragraph where it would make sense or do not use it at all. If your sentences fit the topic but do not flow together smoothly, try adding a transition word such as first, next, or finally. Greta had a busy day. She played tennis all morning. She had lunch with Aunt Susan. She visited the aquarium in the afternoon, and she called me tonight. Greta had a busy day. First, she played tennis all morning. Next, she had lunch with Aunt Susan. She visited the aquarium in the afternoon, and, finally, she called me tonight.  Exercise 1 Revise the following paragraph. The Venus flytrap is a plant that can be grown indoors. The Venus flytrap is a plant that can move fast to catch insects. If you want help catching insects in your home, you might want to get a Venus flytrap. I have a cactus. The tip of each leaf of the Venus flytrap has Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill two pads that hinge at the base. Each pad has sensitive hairs on its surface. When an insect lands on a pad, these hairs move slightly, causing the pads to snap shut. The long “teeth” at the edges of the pad interlock to keep the insect from escaping. If you want help catching insects in your home, you might want to get a Venus flytrap. The Venus flytrap is a plant that can move fast to catch insects. It is also a plant that can be grown indoors. The tip of each leaf has two pads that hinge at the base. Each pad has sensitive hairs on its surface. When an insect lands on a pad, these hairs move slightly, causing the pads to snap shut. The long “teeth” at the Composition edges of the pad interlock to keep the insect from escaping. Unit 14, Composition 307 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 2 Write a topic sentence for this paragraph. Then revise the paragraph to support and develop the idea in your topic sentence. This means that they do not have a backbone. Many kinds of animals are included in this category. Corals and sea anemones, which are both in the sea, have a plantlike appearance. Other invertebrates are agile predators. Some invertebrates are very simple animals that never move. A spider can dart quickly when attacking its prey. Crabs and lobsters can move quickly. Beetles, butterflies, and bees are all in this class. Invertebrates such as worms, snails, and starfish move at a slower pace. One of the largest classes is the insects. You can see from these examples there are many different kinds of invertebrates. Most of the world’s animals are invertebrates. This means that they do not have a backbone. Many kinds of animals are included in this category. Some invertebrates are very simple animals that never move. For instance, corals and sea anemones have a plantlike appearance. However, other invertebrates are agile predators. A spider can dart quickly when attacking its prey. Crabs and lobsters can move quickly, too. Invertebrates such as worms, snails, and starfish move at a slower pace. One of the largest classes of invertebrates is the insects. Beetles, butterflies, and bees are all in this class. You can see Composition Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill from these examples there are many different kinds of invertebrates. 308 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 103 The Writing Process: Revising II Once you have revised the content of your paragraphs, you can revise the structure. The idea is to create sentences that make your paragraphs lively and interesting to read. Each sentence should flow smoothly into the next. Varying the length of your sentences can help. Rather than writing all long sentences or all short ones, try to create a balance. Divide a long sentence into two short ones to grab a reader’s attention. Combine two or three short sentences into one longer, flowing sentence by using a connecting word such as or, and, or but. Read your sentences aloud to hear how they sound. A combination of long and short sentences will form a pleasing pattern.  Exercise 1 Combine the short sentences into one longer sentence. Divide the longer sentences into two or three short ones. Sue had roast beef for dinner. Sue had potatoes for dinner. Sue had roast beef and potatoes for dinner. 1. Kyle likes to play football. Kyle likes to play baseball. Kyle likes to play football and baseball. 2. We met Cindy at the park. We met Jan at the park. We met Bobby at the park. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill We met Cindy, Jan, and Bobby at the park. 3. The wind whistled through the trees while the young girl made her way through the deep, dark forest. The wind whistled through the trees. The young girl made her way through the deep, dark forest. 4. I tried strawberry ice cream. I like chocolate better. I tried strawberry ice cream, but I like chocolate better. 5. The first television program was fast-paced and exciting, and the second television The second television program was slower and rather dull. Unit 14, Composition 309 Composition program was slower and rather dull. The first television program was fast-paced and exciting. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 2 Revise the following paragraph. Yesterday my class visited the new zoo, and I found it far more interesting than the old zoo because of the way the animals are kept. There are no old-fashioned cages with bars. Instead, natural-looking areas with fences prevent the animals and visitors from getting hurt. You would not believe how many animals live in this zoo! I saw elephants. I saw eels. I saw cute baby koala bears. The zoo director explained how each kind of animal lives in the wild. The zoo director explained how her staff has tried to reproduce those conditions within the zoo. I thoroughly enjoyed the trip, and I hope to go back soon. Yesterday my class visited the new zoo. I found it more interesting than the old zoo because of the way the animals are kept. Instead of the old-fashioned cages with bars, fences surround natural-looking areas and prevent animals and visitors from getting hurt. You would not believe how many animals live in this zoo! I saw elephants, eels, and cute baby koala bears. The zoo director explained how each kind of animal lives in the wild and how her staff has tried to reproduce those Composition Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill conditions within the zoo. I thoroughly enjoyed the trip. I hope to go back soon. 310 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 104 The Writing Process: Editing After you have made a clean copy of your revised draft, you should proofread it for errors in spelling, grammar, usage, and mechanics. Check for correct subjectverb agreement, correct verb tenses, and clear pronoun references. Also check for run-on sentences and sentence fragments. Use the following proofreading marks to make corrections. If you replace words or phrases, draw a line through them and write the new words just above them. MEANING EXAMPLE insert one a a time t ^ ^ delete # # bluewhale ^ close up space ( ) ^ ( ) insert space thee bee hive capitalize dear sir: make lowercase Mother Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill sp sp check spelling ordnary switch order you do new paragraph . . . game ended. Afterward . . .  Exercise 1 Edit each sentence for correct spelling, grammar, usage, and mechanics. will What did you do tomorrow? is 1. To a botanist, a tomato are a fruit. ^ o 2. You, to, can learn Japanese calligraphy. ^ 3. The boy holding the white persian cat is my brother. Composition 4. Nathaniel Jacob and play in the YMCA Basketball League. changed 5. I didn’t care for the television show, so I altered the channel. is 6. My best friend be Troy. Unit 14, Composition 311 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 7. Mary watched the Experiment with great interest. . 8. The car I really like is the Porsche it’s very sleek. ^ ) c ( 9. Pre writing is the first stage of the writing progress. # 10. Prewriting is a time for gathering writingideas. ^  Exercise 2 Edit the paragraph for correct grammar and word usage. Last Saturday knight I went on an owl walk for the first time. February is the sp # matingseason for Owls in this part of the state, so we herd many owls calling. If you ) ^ ( imitate an owl’s call, some times it calls back.  Exercise 3 Proofread each sentence to correct spelling, punctuation, and capitalization errors. ’ In my neighbors small orchard, you can find apples, peaches, and pears. ^ 1. dogs seem to understand what wee say to them. 2. Ben is president of the agassiz club, our school science club. # 3. Because the nightsky was so clear, we could see the constellations. ^ sp Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 4. Do porposses swim with a sense of purpose? # 5. The Great Saltlake in Utah is a beautiful place. ) ^ ( 6. Mr. Decker’s tree farm has white pines, and blue spruce s. 7. Jean said, “Please, mother, let me get my ears peirced. sp Composition 8. Autum,not spring, is my favorite season. ’ 9. Tiffanys swaeter matches our school colors. ^ sp 10. I looked for the lost key on my dresser,in the car,and in my cote pockets. 312 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 105 The Writing Process: Presenting When you have completed a piece of writing, you may decide to present your work to others. How you will present your writing depends on the audience you selected during prewriting and the nature of the material. An outlet for presenting your writing to a specific audience is called a market. Many different markets are available to sixth-grade students. Among these are school newspapers and classroom presentations; community groups, newspapers, and radio stations; local and national contests; and magazines that feature the work of young people. The Market Guide for Young Writers, available in many libraries, can give you some ideas for marketing your work. To decide how to present your piece, analyze your audience; then search for an outlet that serves that audience. Some outlets, such as radio programs or speech contests, offer a chance for oral presentation. In these cases, visual aids may add to your presentation.  Exercise 1 Suggest an outlet or market for each piece of writing described below. a poem about school spirit school newspaper 1. a speech about democracy community group meeting, school assembly 2. an opinion piece about the quality of school lunches school paper 3. an essay about how the first day of spring makes you feel magazine contest, the school Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill newspaper 4. words for a song school talent contest, sheet music publishing company 5. a set of ten tongue twisters class presentation, young writers’ magazine 6. a one-page short story school literary magazine, young writers’ magazine 7. a scary story with numerous sound effects campfire presentation, local radio program 8. a book review class presentation, local public television spot Composition 9. an opinion piece about whether community basketball courts should be repaired local newspaper, letter to city council 10. a poem about a historical event school assembly, classroom presentation Unit 14, Composition 313 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 2 Suggest a visual aid that could increase the effectiveness of each presentation below. 1. a speech to a science class about the 1994 flood of the Mississippi River large map showing river before flood and flooded area 2. a profile of your school for new students photographs of different school activities and facilities 3. an original cowboy song presented at a school talent show a cowboy outfit, guitar for accompaniment 4. an oral reading of a poem that has animal characters animal masks 5. a classroom presentation about smoking among teenagers a graph showing the recent trend, illustrations or photographs of lung damage 6. an oral presentation about foods from India samples of food, photographs 7. an original speech by Sir Winston Churchill a suit like that worn by Churchill, an illustration or photograph of him 8. a report on how lawn mowers contribute to air pollution a labeled diagram of a lawn mower engine or chart showing what percentage of pollution comes from lawn mowers Idea: nursery rhymes rewritten with new, humorous endings Intended audience: students in grades 2–6 Form of presentation: The rhymes will be presented as short plays. Then the narrator will recite the poem while the actors mime their parts. The characters will carry a simple prop or wear an article of clothing that identifies them. The plays would be presented in individual classrooms at different grade levels. Idea: Composition Intended audience: Form of presentation: 314 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill  Exercise 3 Think of an idea for a piece of writing intended for a specific audience. Then, in a short paragraph, describe how you would present the piece. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 106 Outlining During prewriting you generate ideas. Outlining gives you a way to organize those ideas before you begin drafting. One way to make an outline is to write pieces of information from your prewriting material on index cards. You can then arrange the cards by main topic and supporting details. When writing an outline, use roman numerals for the main topics. Use capital letters for subtopics. Under each topic, list details using regular numerals. If you include details for a topic or subtopic, always give at least two items. An outline for an account of a rafting trip might look like this: I. Beginning A. Floating calmly B. Sights along river 1. Birds fishing 2. Fish jumping II. Middle A. Shooting the rapids 1. Quick reactions of guide 2. Excitement of passengers B. Stopping for picnic lunch Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill  Exercise 1 Organize the following subtopics and details into an outline for a paragraph about a trip in a hot air balloon. The main topics are provided. Ended near Calgary, Canada Length of trip More than 6,000 miles Two heaters failed Flight lasted four days Balloonist endured zero temperatures Started in Seoul, South Korea Route of trip I. First solo balloon flight across Pacific Ocean Route of trip A. Started in Seoul, South Korea 2. Ended near Calgary, Canada Length of trip 1. More than 6,000 miles 2. Flight lasted four days Composition B. 1. Unit 14, Composition 315 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ II. Hardships of trip A. Two heaters failed B. Balloonist endured zero temperatures  Exercise 2 Use the outline below to write a paragraph about types of feathers on birds. I. Body feathers A. Used for insulation B. Used for display 1. Bright colors 2. Distinct markings II. Tail feathers A. Important for steering in flying B. Used for balance on ground III. Flight feathers A. Used for flight B. Side of feather toward wing is usually narrower C. Broader side bends easily to let air move through wing You might have known that a bird can have feathers of different colors, but did you know that all birds have different feathers with different purposes? All birds need three kinds of feathers: body feathers, tail feathers, and flight feathers. Colorful body feathers insulate the bird’s body and also serve as distinctive markings. Tail feathers are important for steering in flying. They also help the bird keep its balance on the ground. Flight feathers are, of course, used for flight. The side of the feather toward the Composition Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill wing is usually narrower. The broader side bends easily to let air move through the wing. 316 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 107 Writing Effective Sentences I Here are some tips for making your sentences more effective. • Vary the length of your sentences. Avoid using all long sentences or all short sentences. • Vary the structure of your sentences. Avoid using the same pattern for all sentences.  Exercise 1 Combine the repetitious short sentences into a longer, more interesting sentence. Reword as needed. a. The sun was setting. b. It was setting behind the barn. c. The barn is red. d. The swallows began to feed. The sun was setting behind the red barn as the swallows began to feed. 1. a. Fumio plays on a team. b. The team is a soccer team. c. Fumio is the goalie. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill d. The team’s name is the “Jets.” Fumio is the goalie on a soccer team called the “Jets.” 2. a. Fall is a beautiful time of year. b. Fall is a somewhat sad time, too. c. The trees will soon be bare. d. The grass will turn brown. Fall is a beautiful, but somewhat sad, time of year because the trees will soon be bare and the grass Composition will turn brown. Unit 14, Composition 317 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 3. a. Alice is a curious girl. b. She is intelligent. c. Alice is the main character in Alice in Wonderland. d. Her adventures in a make-believe world are humorous. Alice, the main character in Alice in Wonderland, is a curious and intelligent girl who has many humorous adventures in a make-believe world. 4. a. This fable is by Aesop. b. The title is “The Lion and the Mouse.” c. The story is about good deeds. d. In the story a good deed is rewarded. Aesop’s fable “The Lion and the Mouse” is a story about how good deeds bring rewards. 5. a. Nils keeps a journal. b. He uses a blue pen for all journal entries. c. The journal is a notebook. d. The notebook is spiral-bound.  Exercise 2 Rewrite the paragraph, changing some of the sentence patterns. Lek and I had nothing to do. We rode our bikes down the street. We came to the old park. We used to play baseball in the old park. We saw a shed in the old park. The shed looked empty. We looked into a window of the shed. We saw a mother dog and her puppies on the floor. We opened the door to the shed. We went in. We played with the dogs. Finally, we went home. Possible answer: One afternoon my friend Lek and I could think of nothing to do. After riding our bikes around town for a while, we came to the old park where we used to play baseball. We saw an Composition empty-looking shed and peeked into a window. Imagine our surprise when we saw a mother dog and her pups! We spent the rest of the afternoon playing with the dogs. 318 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Nils keeps his journal in a spiral-bound notebook and always writes in it with a blue pen. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 108 Writing Effective Sentences II • Lead with an interesting topic sentence. Word the sentence so that it “hooks” your readers and makes them want to read on. • Use active verbs primarily. In a sentence with an active verb, the subject performs the action (e.g., He speaks). In a passive-verb sentence, the subject is acted upon (e.g., He is spoken to). Active verbs generally make a stronger impression than passive verbs. Use a passive verb when the “doer” of an action is unknown or unimportant.  Exercise 1 Underline the topic sentence that best hooks the reader. Toonia, my new pen pal, lives with her grandmother in Bangkok, Thailand. Having a pen pal is one way to learn about another country. I know more about Thailand than I used to know. Amid the bright colors and noisy streets of Bangkok lives my new pen pal, Toonia. 1. That stubborn girl who prefers MegaMedia over the new MultiMedia is none other than my sister! My sister and I never agree on anything. My sister and I like two different, but similar, stores that sell books and tapes. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill I like the new store MultiMedia, but my sister prefers MegaMedia. 2. Twelve inches of snow fell yesterday, but it all melted today. Not the usual one or two inches of snow fell yesterday. How could we have ever guessed that twelve whole inches of snow would disappear almost overnight? Due to temperatures rising to 60°, all the snow that fell yesterday melted today. 3. Here is what I think about smoking: Kids shouldn’t smoke because smoking is bad for Kids shouldn’t smoke because it is bad for their health and it is a hard habit to break. Coughing every few minutes and pausing for an extra gasp of air, the speaker warned students about the dangers of smoking. Unit 14, Composition 319 Composition their health and it becomes a habit that is nearly impossible to break. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 4. The water in the river was rough, and the water bounced the raft around. If you are going out on the water, you should wear a life jacket. When the rough water bounced the raft around, we were glad that we were wearing life jackets. Here’s why you should wear a life jacket when you are on a boat.  Exercise 2 Rewrite the following passage, changing passive verbs to active verbs where appropriate. The last scene in the movie is packed with action. Tex Carlson, the sheriff, is chased into a dead-end canyon by a band of nasty-looking outlaws. A way out is found by Tex, though, at the last minute. He scrambles up the cliff like an agile mountain goat, just as his deputy is arriving. The last scene in the movie is packed with action. A band of nasty-looking outlaws chases Tex Carlson, the sheriff, into a dead-end canyon. Tex finds a way out at the last minute, though. He scrambles Composition Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill up the cliff like an agile mountain goat, just as his deputy is arriving. 320 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 109 Writing Effective Sentences III • Create special effects. You can repeat certain words or phrases for emphasis or to create a certain effect. You can also use interruption for emphasis. A sudden break in thought can call attention to an important point. Another way to emphasize is to use a different kind of sentence that stands out from all the others.  Exercise 1 Use the list to identify how the sentence or sentences below were made more effective. Some may have more than one answer. interesting topic sentence repetition for emphasis varied sentence length varied sentence structure interruption for emphasis unusual sentence for special effect 1. Did you know that 1 in 3 families today has a single parent? The situation was very different 25 years ago. At that time, only about 1 in 10 families had a single parent. interesting topic sentence, varied sentence structure 2. Some people think that if you don’t learn how to ride a bike when you’re a child that Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill you can never learn. It’s not true. My father learned to ride when he was 33 years old. varied sentence length 3. I don’t have a ride. I don’t have any money. How can I possibly go to the concert? repetition for emphasis Composition Unit 14, Composition 321 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 4. When you go out in the pasture, be sure to wear rubber boots. The ground is very soggy and the little stream is swollen. It is April, after all. varied sentence length, varied sentence structure 5. Who-o-o-o-o-o-o-o-o-o! I heard the owl call again. unusual sentence for special interest 6. My stomach tells me—oops, there it goes, growling again—that it’s time for lunch. interruption for emphasis  Exercise 2 Rewrite the paragraph below using effective sentences. The school bus was racing up the twisty mountain road. There was a tree in the road. It fell there. It happened suddenly. The tree blocked the path of the bus. Then there was thunder. Then it began to rain in buckets. Night was falling. The busload of children wondered what would happen next. The school bus was racing up the twisty mountain road. Suddenly, it screeched to a halt. A tree had came down in buckets. They realized that night was falling. The children had only one thought: what Composition would happen next? 322 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill fallen across the road, blocking the way. As the children stared at the tree, they heard thunder. Rain Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 110 Building Paragraphs I You can arrange the supporting details in a paragraph in several ways. One way is based on time. Chronological order places events in the order in which they happened. An easy way to order chronologically the events you are writing about is first to make a timeline of them. Make use of words that signal chronological order. These include the following: first, while, then, after, when, immediately, suddenly, finally, and last. Notice some of these words in the following paragraph: I took my usual walk in the park today with Fifi. First we strolled through the rose garden. Then we stopped at the green bench for a brief rest. After resting a while, we walked all the way around the pond and back down Plum Street. Eventually we became hungry, so we stopped for a lunch break under a big elm tree. Feeling full and content, I lay down for a nap in the grass. When Fifi’s barking woke me suddenly, I sat up, rubbed the sleep from my eyes, and looked around. The sun was setting, signaling that it was time to go home. Once again, Fifi and I took off walking. This time, however, we headed straight for the park entrance. Walking quickly down the sidewalk, we finally arrived at our apartment.  Exercise 1 Write the words that signaled chronological order in the paragraph above. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill First, Then, After, Eventually, When, Once again, finally  Exercise 2 Write the following list of events in paragraph form. Be sure the chronological order makes sense. Unit 14, Composition Composition The water felt cold. Then we took off our shoes and shorts. First we put on our bathing suits under our shorts. Once we got used to the water, we played in it for about an hour. Then we walked to the beach. Finally, it was time to go home. While walking barefoot on the beach, we noticed seashells. When we arrived, we spread out our towels. On our walk home, we talked about the wonderful day. After collecting shells, we waded into the water. 323 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ First, we put on our bathing suits under our shorts. Then we walked to the beach. When we arrived, we spread out our towels. Then we took off our shoes and shorts. While walking barefoot on the beach, we noticed seashells. After collecting shells, we waded into the water. The water felt very cold! Once we got used to the water, we played in it for about an hour. Finally, it was time to go home. On our walk home, we talked about the wonderful day. Composition Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill  Exercise 3 Write a paragraph about what you did last weekend. Be sure events are in chronological order. 324 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 111 Building Paragraphs II Another way to order details in a paragraph is by using spatial order. When you use spatial order, you arrange details by their location or position. There are different ways to arrange details in spatial order. For example, your description may go from near to far, left to right, or low to high. Some words that help show spatial order include the following: next to, on, below, above, across, near, far, out, by, through, over, between, away, left, and down. These words may appear as prepositions, adjectives, or adverbs. The teapot on the stove whistled. (preposition) The dog ran in a nearby field. (preposition, adjective) The following paragraph is arranged in spatial order. As I sat in the park on the green bench, I looked at Fifi to my right. Her paws were muddy from the dirt around the bench. She started barking when she noticed a German shepherd in the nearby field. The dog approached us and sat in front of the bench. I threw a stick and both dogs went running across the field. I watched them for a while from the bench, waiting to see which would return with the prize.  Exercise 1 Write the words that signaled spatial order in the above paragraph. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill in, on, at, to, around, nearby, in front of, across, from  Exercise 2 Write the following details in paragraph form. Use spatial order that moves from near to far. Unit 14, Composition Composition Farther to the right was the audio-visual section. Near the entrance to the left was the circulation desk. I stood at the entrance to the library. At the end opposite the library’s entrance were stairs leading down to the nonfiction books and up to the magazine area. Just beyond the stairs was the back entrance, filled with works of art by local patrons. To the right of the front door was the children’s room. Past the circulation desk on the left were the reference room and the reading room. Behind the circulation desk was the librarian’s office. 325 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ I stood at the entrance to the library. Near the entrance to the left was the circulation desk. Past the circulation desk were the reference room and the reading room. Behind the circulation desk was the librarian’s office. To the right of the front door was the children’s room. Farther to the right was the audio-visual section. At the end opposite the library’s entrance were stairs leading down to the nonfiction books and up to the magazine area. Just beyond the stairs was the back entrance, filled with works of art by local patrons. Composition Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill  Exercise 2 Write a paragraph describing the room you are in now. Use spatial order. 326 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 112 Building Paragraphs III In compare/contrast order, present details about two subjects by describing their similarities and differences. This can be done in two ways. You can discuss all the details about one subject and then about the other subject: Fifi is a small black poodle. She has very short, curly hair. She is very quiet and stays away from people. She loves to be lazy and lie outside in the sun. Rex is a large brown and white collie. He has long, thick fur. He is very friendly and barks loudly. He loves to play fetch with a stick in the backyard. Or you can do comparisons detail-by-detail, writing about both subjects at the same time: While Fifi is a small black poodle, Rex is a large brown and white collie. Fifi has short curly hair and Rex has long thick fur. Fifi is very quiet and stays away from people. Rex is very friendly and barks loudly. While Fifi loves to be lazy and lie in the sun, Rex prefers to play fetch with a stick. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill  Exercise 1 Write the following details in paragraph form. Use compare/contrast order. Bony fish are more common. Fish can be divided into two groups: bony fish and cartilage fish. Cartilage fish have skeletons made of cartilage. The end of your nose is cartilage. Bony fish have skeletons like human bones. Both kinds of fish have fins and gills. Only the teeth of cartilage fish are calcified like bones. Fish can be divided into two groups: bony fish and cartilage fish. Bony fish are more common. They have skeletons like human bones. Cartilage fish, on the other hand, have skeletons made of cartilage, like the end of your nose. Only the teeth of cartilage fish are calcified like bones. Both kinds of fish have fins and gills. Composition Unit 14, Composition 327 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Grandma Nora is quiet and dignified. Grandma Hazel plays the piano. Grandma Hazel works for a political organization. Grandma Nora sings with a band. Grandma Hazel is talkative and fun. Grandma Hazel lives in Phoenix. Grandma Nora lives in Chicago. Grandma Nora works for a government agency. Grandma Nora lives in Chicago. She works for a government agency and sings with a band. She is quiet and dignified. Grandma Hazel lives in Phoenix. She works for a political organization and plays the piano. She is talkative and fun. Composition Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill  Exercise 2 Write a paragraph that compares and contrasts your own interests and abilities with those of a friend. 328 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 113 Paragraph Ordering Just as you needed to choose an order for your sentences, you need to choose an order for the paragraphs in your writing. When you are revising, check that each sentence tells something about the topic of that paragraph. Cross out any sentences that do not. Be sure your paragraphs follow one another in a way that makes sense. Finally, check that you have transition words between the last sentence of one paragraph and the first sentence of the following paragraph. FIRST DRAFT: The second day we went to the beach. The sun came out, the water was cool, and we had a great time. The sky was blue. We made huge sand castles. We went swimming and waterskiing. The first day of our vacation was a big disappointment.We had to stay indoors. It rained all day long. There were thunder and lightning, too. The weather was perfect the rest of the week. I’m glad I didn’t go home after the first day! Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill REVISED DRAFT: The first day of our vacation was a big disappointment. It rained all day long. There were thunder and lightning, too, so we had to stay indoors. The second day we went to the beach. The sky was blue, and the sun came out. First we made huge sand castles; then we went swimming and waterskiing. We had a great time. The weather was perfect the rest of the week. I’m glad I didn’t go home after the first day!  Exercise 1 Write 1, 2, or 3 in the blank in front of each paragraph to show how the three paragraphs should be ordered. 3 Finally, Aunt Susan offered to bake some of her famous cherry pies. With all that food to sell, we were certain to raise enough money to go to Toronto. 1 My soccer team was invited to play in a tournament in Toronto, Canada. Unfortunately, we did not have enough money to rent a bus to take us there. We Unit 14, Composition 329 Composition really wanted to go, so we decided to have a bake sale to raise some of the money. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 2 The morning of the bake sale, we realized we did not have enough food. Kelly, who was in charge of donations, was especially upset. Since she was scheduled to work at the sale all morning, she didn’t know how she was going to get more food. I called my friend Lois, who was not scheduled to work until afternoon. She said she and her grandfather could make another four dozen cookies. Then I called my sister Kate. She asked the owner of the bakery where she works if he would donate some pastries. Meanwhile, I went home to bake two more cakes.  Exercise 2 Revise the following paragraphs. Rewrite them in the space provided. Admission is free, but seating is limited—so come early and enjoy! Polk Middle School is announcing its spring production, Images. It includes songs, dances, and sketches of life as a sixth grader. This is a new play written by the students themselves. There will also be an afternoon performance at 2:00 P.M. on June 2. Everyone in the community is invited to attend. The play will be performed at 8:00 P.M. June 1 and 7:30 P.M. June 2. Polk Middle School is announcing its spring production, Images. This is a new play written by the students themselves. It includes songs, dances, and sketches of life as a sixth grader. 7:30 P.M. June 2. There will also be an afternoon performance at 2:00 P.M. on June 2. Admission is free, Composition but seating is limited—so come early and enjoy! 330 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Everyone in the community is invited to attend. The play will be performed at 8:00 P.M. June 1 and Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 114 Personal Letters I A personal letter is an informal letter to a person that you know well. Personal letters have a tone similar to friendly conversation. They describe recent events in your life and your reactions to them. They also ask the recipient of the letter for news. In a personal letter, the heading and the closing are usually indented, as is each paragraph in the body of the letter.  Exercise 1 Read the following personal letter. Answer each question. 2496 Harrison Avenue Worthington, Ohio 43085 March 3, 1996 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Dear Yvonne, I was really happy to get your last letter. What a funny family you have. I laughed out loud when I read about how you and your dad had to carry a ladder on the subway to your new apartment. Things have been pretty quiet here, but I do have one piece of news. Our jump rope team entered the all-school jump rope competition, and we came in second! Boy, were we nervous. But we kept our cool and just kept jumping. The next time you visit I’ll show you our routine. When you come, be sure to bring your swimsuit. The new community pool is finally finished. By the way, how did you ever get that ladder up seven flights of stairs? Your good friend, Angie 1. Who is Yvonne? a friend of Angie’s 2. What lines show that Angie is interested in what is happening in Yvonne’s life? first paragraph and the question in the last paragraph Composition 3. Which paragraph gives Yvonne some news about what Angie has been doing? second Unit 14, Composition 331 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 4. What do you notice about the placement of the heading and the closing? They are positioned to the far right and indented the same amount. 5. Would you describe the tone of the letter as formal or informal? Explain. The letter is informal and friendly. The writer eagerly anticipates her friend’s next visit. The language is generally casual, using slang as well as sentence fragments.  Exercise 2 Write a letter to a friend about your summer activities. Students’ letters should be informal in tone and written in indented form. The letter should include Composition Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill information about recent events in the writer’s life and ask questions about events in the recipient’s life. 332 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 115 Personal Letters II Personal letters can also take the form of invitations and thank-you notes. For example, you might write a thank-you note to a naturalist who gave a talk to your class. You might write a letter inviting your grandmother to visit you at your home. These two kinds of personal letters are usually semiformal, avoiding the slang and sentence fragments that you might use in a postcard to a friend. The heading and the closing are usually indented, as is each paragraph in the body of the letter.  Exercise 1 Write a thank-you note to an adult relative. In your letter express your appreciation for something nice that he or she did for you. Letters should be semiformal, probably avoiding slang, and should comment in some positive way on Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill what the relative did. Letters should use indented elements and have an appropriate closing. Composition Unit 14, Composition 333 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________  Exercise 2 Write a letter inviting the parents of students in your class to attend a poetry reading by members of the class. Letters should use the salutation “Dear Parents” and a closing such as “Sincerely.” The body of the letter should explain the event. The style should be informal and the tone enthusiastic. Paragraphs should be Composition Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill indented, and the heading and closing should align. 334 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 116 Personal Letters III If you want to write to an author or a performer that you admire, you should write a personal letter. When you write to a celebrity, use a respectful tone and a semiformal writing style. Be sure to state clearly how the author’s work has affected you. Celebrities cannot respond to each and every letter. However, if your letter catches the author’s interest, you might receive a letter in return.  Exercise 1 Read the following letter. Then answer each question. Dear Jean, Mrs. Fritz, I have read all your books. The book I like best is the one about growing up in China. The things you wrote about China made me want to visit it some day. I understood how homesick you felt because once I had to spend the entire summer in Arizona, far away from my family in New Jersey. I’ve learned a lot about United States history from your biographies. I feel as if I have met each of your subjects in person. Could you please send me an autographed copy of one of your books? It doesn’t matter which one. Your friend, Janine Janiewicz 1. Did the writer use an appropriate salutation? Why or why not? No. A respectful salutation for an adult who is not a close friend would be “Dear Mrs. Fritz” or “Dear Jean Fritz.” A Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill correct salutation would make “Mrs. Fritz” in the first line unnecessary. 2. Was the writer clear about which book she admires the most? Explain. Stating the title of the book would make it clearer. style and tone is semiformal and appropriate. Unit 14, Composition 335 Composition 3. Explain whether the style and tone of the first paragraph is appropriate. Generally, the Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 4. In the second paragraph, what unrealistic request does the writer make? She asks the author to sign and mail a book back to her. 5. In what lines does the writer of the letter explain how the author’s work has affected her? in the last sentence of paragraph 1 and the first two sentences of paragraph 2 6. Is the closing appropriate? Explain. A more appropriate closing would be “Sincerely” or “Yours truly” since the writer and recipient do not have a close personal relationship.  Exercise 2 Write a personal letter to an author or performer you admire. Letters should be semiformal, use indented style, and make specific comments about the author or Composition Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill performer’s effect on the writer. 336 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 117 Business Letters: Letters of Request or Complaint Business letters are letters sent to an organization to achieve a specific purpose. One common type of business letter is the letter of request. A letter of request asks for information or service. In this type of letter, begin by identifying yourself. Then explain what information you need and why you need it. Also, be clear about where the information should be sent. Since you are asking for a favor, always show courtesy in your request. Business letters are usually written in block form or semiblock form. In block form, all parts of the letter are lined up at the left margin. In semiblock form, the heading, closing, and signature are aligned on the right side of the page. The recipient of a business letter is usually a stranger, so the letter should be formal in style and respectful in tone.  Exercise 1 Read the following letter of request. Then answer each question below. Dear Mr. Holbrook: I am a sixth grader at Horatio Alger Middle School. Could you send me some information about the national parks in the West? Thanks tons. Sincerely, Pramode Pirakh 1. Are the salutation and closing appropriate? yes Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill 2. Does the letter writer identify himself? yes 3. Does the letter writer explain why he needs the information? no 4. Is the writer specific enough about the information he wants? no 5. Is the letter courteous in tone? no—it is rather brief 6. Is the letter appropriately formal in style? no—the last line in particular is too casual  Exercise 2 Rewrite the above letter to make it better. Refer to your evaluation, and add new information as needed. Sign your own name to the letter. sample, the tone should be courteous, and the style should be formal or semiformal. A heading and an inside address should be included. Unit 14, Composition 337 Composition Students should expand the letter. The request for information should be more specific than in the Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Another common type of business letter is the letter of complaint. A letter of complaint informs someone about a problem and usually requests some type of action. In your letter state the problem and how it has affected you. Use supporting details to explain the problem. End your letter by stating what you want done. Be firm but polite. If you let your anger burst out, you are less likely to get help in solving the problem.  Exercise 3 Read the following letter of complaint. List three weak points of the letter below. Dear Sir or Madam: The other day I decided I finally needed a new daypack, so I went to three different stores at the mall. Then I saw your daypacks and bought one. Your daypacks are really crummy. I bought the daypack two weeks ago and the back pocket is already coming off! I use the pocket to hold little things like my eraser and pencil sharpener and house key. Yesterday my key fell out because of the hole in the seam of the pocket! I shouldn’t have to mend a new pack. I demand a full refund of my money! The money or else . . . Inez Garcia 1. The letter has an angry tone. 2. The letter is not brief and to the point. 3. The letter does not have an appropriate closing. Letters should be concise and state the problem at the beginning of the letter. The tone should be firm but polite. An acceptable business closing, such as “Sincerely,” should be used. A heading and an inside Composition address should be included. 338 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill  Exercise 4 Rewrite the letter of complaint above to make it more effective. Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ Lesson 118 Business Letters: Letters of Opinion A letter of opinion is a letter that voices your thoughts and ideas on a particular issue. You might write a letter of opinion to the school newspaper about a new policy or program. You might write to a public official to comment on a community or national issue. Or you might write to a magazine to react to a recent article. Here are some guidelines for writing a good letter of opinion. • Try to put your main idea into a single sentence. • Provide details to support your opinion. • If possible, suggest a solution to the problem. • Use a courteous tone: avoid name-calling or broad generalizations. Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill  Exercise 1 Read the following letter of opinion. Then answer the questions that follow. Dear Mayor Farmer: The downtown recreation center is a great idea, but the plan for it could be improved. According to the current plan, there will be room for four basketball courts, which can also serve as volleyball courts. It’s true that the youth basketball leagues need more space for their games. However, our city does not have a single indoor tennis court. More than two hundred young people take part in summer tennis tournaments in Mount Airy, but they have no place to practice during the winter. Many adults fill the five outdoor courts in summer. They, too, would benefit from an indoor facility. The new recreation center should appeal to many different groups in our community. I strongly urge you to include at least one tennis court in the plan for the new facility. Sincerely, Demar Johnson 1. What sentence states the specific problem the writer is addressing? Our city does not have a single indoor tennis court. and adults who play tennis have nowhere to practice in winter. The recreation center should appeal to many different groups in the community. Unit 14, Composition 339 Composition 2. What details does the writer include to support his point of view? Many young people Name ___________________________________________________ Class _________ Date ____________________ 3. What solution does the writer propose to the problem? Include one indoor tennis court in the new recreation center. 4. How would you describe the tone of the letter? calm and polite  Exercise 2 Write a letter of opinion to your school or community paper about an issue that is important to you, or choose one of the following topics. Use the guidelines above in drafting your letter. a change in a school rule a needed facility at your school safety in your community a way to beautify your community Letters should state the problem clearly near the beginning of the letter and offer a solution. Supporting details should be included to illustrate the problem and/or justify the solution offered. The tone of the Composition Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill letter should be courteous. 340 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Index Index 341 Index Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill A A, an, the (articles), 7, 121 Abbreviations, correct use of, 18, 255, 257 Abstract nouns, defined, 4 Accept, except, 12, 197 Action verbs, defined, 4, 75, 79 Active voice, explained, 6, 319 in writing, 319 Adjective clauses, 9, 40 nonessential, 40 Adjective phrases as participial phrases, 10 as prepositional phrases, 10, 155 Adjectives, defined, 7–8, 119 articles as, 7, 121 comparative forms of, 8, 123, 125 avoiding errors in, 36–37 demonstrative, 121 diagraming, 185 distinguishing from adverbs, 139, 141 hyphen in compound, 18 predicate, 3, 81, 119, 139, 183 proper, 7, 15, 44, 119, 225, 227 superlative, 8, 123, 125, 135 avoiding errors in, 36–37 Adverb clauses, 9, 40 commas with, 40 Adverb phrases as prepositional phrases, 10, 155 Adverbs, defined, 8, 131 comparative forms of, 8, 135, 137 conjunctive, 9, 16 diagraming, 185 distinguishing from adjectives 139, 141 distinguishing from prepositions, 157 modifying adjectives and adverbs, 8, 133 modifying verbs, 8, 131 negative words as, 8, 143 Agreement pronoun-antecedent, 7, 34, 109 subject-verb, 4, 11, 28–31, 67, 167, 169, 171, 173 and collective nouns, 4, 67 and compound subjects, 11, 30–31, 173 and subject pronouns, 11, 29, 169 and prepositional phrases, 11, 28, 171 and indefinite pronouns, 11, 29, 113 in inverted sentences, 11, 28–29, 171 with titles of works, 11 All ready, already, 12, 197 All together, altogether, 12, 197 A lot, alot, 12, 197 Already, all ready, 12, 197 Altogether, all together, 12, 197 Among, between, 12, 199 Antecedents, defined, 7, 109 agreement of pronouns with, 7, 109 clear pronoun reference, 7, 34, 109 Antonyms, 275 Apostrophes, rules for using, 17–18, 41–43, 251 in contractions, 18, 43, 251 in possessive nouns and pronouns, 17, 41– 43, 251 in special plurals, 17, 42, 251 Appositive phrases, 10, 16, 39 Appositives, 10, 16, 39 Articles, 7, 121 Audience, choosing, 20, 301, 313 Auxiliary (helping) verbs, defined, 4, 87, 89, 91 B Bad, worse, worst, 36, 125 Beside, besides, 12, 199 Between, among, 12, 199 Block form for letters, 21, 337 Bring, take, 12 Business letters, 21–22, 337–339 letters of complaint, 338 letters of opinion, 22, 339 letters of request, 22, 337 But, coordinating conjunction, 9, 159 C Can, may, 12 Capitalization, rules for, 14–15, 44, 213, 215, 217, 219, 221, 223, 225, 227 in direct quotations, 14, 44, 213 in family names and titles of persons, 15, 217, 219 Index 343 344 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 coordinating, 9, 27, 159 correlative, 9, 159 diagraming, 189 list, 9 subordinating, 9 Context Clues, 19, 269 Contractions, 18, 43, 251 Coordinating conjunctions, 9, 27, 159 Correlative conjunctions, 9, 159 D Dashes, 18 Dates, punctuating, 16, 18, 19, 239 Declarative sentences, defined, 10, 47 diagraming, 181 Demonstrative adjectives, 121 Demonstrative pronouns, 6, 121 Dependent (subordinate) clauses, 9 –10 Diagraming adjectives, 185 adverbs, 185 compound sentence parts, 189 compound sentences, 189 direct objects, 183 four kinds of sentences, 181 indirect objects, 183 predicate words, 183 predicates, 179, 181 prepositional phrases, 187 simple sentences, 179 subjects, 179, 181 simple sentences with phrases, 187 Direct objects, defined, 41, 75 diagraming, 183 Double negatives, avoiding, 8, 143 Drafting, 20, 303, 305 theme, 303, 305 thesis statement, 303 topic sentence and related sentences, 305 E Each, agreement with, 29, 113 Editing, 21, 311 proofreading marks, 311 Effective sentences, 317, 319, 321 Either, agreement with, 29, 113 Emphatic verbs, defined, 6 Except, accept, 12, 197 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill of first words of sentences, 14, 213 of proper adjectives, 8, 15, 44, 119, 225, 227 of proper nouns, 3, 15, 44, 63, 217, 219, 221, 223, 225, 227 of names of places, 15, 221, 223 of salutations and closings of letters, 14, 215 Choose, chose, 12, 199 Chronological order, 20, 323 Clauses, defined, 9 –10 Clue words, 19, 269 Collective nouns, defined, 4, 67 agreement of verb with, 4, 67 Colons, rules, 17, 245 Commas, rules, 16–17, 38–40, 235, 237, 239, 241 with addresses and dates, 16, 239 and adverb clauses, 16, 40 with appositives, 16, 39 after closes and salutations in letters, 16, 237 and compound sentences, 16, 237 after conjunctive adverbs, 16, 235 in direct address, 16, 235 in direct quotations, 17, 38–39, 241 and introductory phrases, 16, 40, 235 with nonessential elements, 16, 39– 40 in series, 16, 38, 235 with titles of persons, 15, 18, 239 Common nouns, defined, 3, 63 Comparative form, modifiers, 7– 8, 36–37, 123, 125, 135, 137 adjectives, 7– 8, 36–37, 123, 125 adverbs, 8, 135, 137 Compare/contrast order, 20, 327 Complaint, letters of, 338 Complete predicates, defined, 3, 51 Complete subjects, defined, 3, 51 Complex sentences, defined, 10 Compound elements diagraming, 189 nouns, 18, 253 prepositions, 8, 149 sentences, 10, 55 subjects, 3, 30–31, 53, 173 Concrete nouns, defined, 4 Conjunctions, defined, 9, 159 conjunctive adverbs, 9, 16 Exclamation points, 16, 49, 161, 233 quotation marks and, 17, 247 Exclamatory sentences, defined, 10, 49 diagraming, 181 F Fewer, less, 12 Formally, formerly, 13 Fragments, sentence, defined, 24 –25, 57 Freewriting, 20, 299 G Gerund phrases, defined, 11 Gerunds, defined, 11 Good, better, best, 36, 125 H Helping verbs, 4, 87, 89, 91 Homonyms, 277 Hyphens, rules, 18, 253 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill I Imperative sentences, defined, 10, 49 diagraming, 181 In, into, 13, 201 Indefinite pronouns, defined, 6, 11, 29, 113 list, 11, 113 Independent (main) clauses, 9 –10 Indirect objects, defined, 77 diagraming, 183 Indirect quotations, 215 Infinitive phrases, defined, 11 Infinitives, defined, 11 Inquiry, letters of, 22, 337 Inside addresses in letters, 21–22 Intensive pronouns, 6 Interjections, defined, 9, 161 list, 161 Interrogative pronouns, defined, 6 Interrogative sentences, defined, 10, 47 diagraming, 181 Into, in, 13, 201 Intransitive verbs, defined, 4, 79 Inverted order in sentences, 3, 11, 28–29, 171 Irregular verbs, 5, 32–33, 93, 95, 97 Italics, 17, 249 Its, it’s, 13, 43, 201 L Lay, lie, 13, 201 Learn, teach, 13, 201 Leave, let, 13, 203 Less, fewer, 12 Let, leave, 13, 203 Letter writing, 21–22, 331, 333, 335, 337–339 business, 21–22, 337–339 letters of request or complaint, 22, 337–338 opinion letters, 22, 339 personal, 21–22, 331, 333, 335 See also Business letters; Personal letters Lie, lay, 13, 201 Linking verbs, 4, 81 Loose, lose, 13, 203 M Main (independent) clauses, 9 –10 Many, much, 13 May, can, 12 Modifiers adjective clauses, 9 adjectives, 7–8, 119 , 121, 123, 125 adverb clauses, 9 adverbs, 8, 131, 133, 135, 137 comparisons, degrees, 7–8, 36–37, 123, 125, 135, 137 Much, many, 13 N Negatives, double, avoiding, 8, 143 Negative words as adverbs, 8, 143 Nominative case, pronouns, 6, 105, 107 Nor, in compound subjects, 30–31 Noun clauses, 9 Nouns, defined, 3, 63 abstract, 4 collective, 4, 67 common, 3, 63 compound, 18, 253 concrete, 4 contractions, 43, 251 as objects of prepositions, 10, 151 plurals, 3, 18, 20, 65, 251, 283 Index 345 O Objective case, pronouns, 6, 105, 107 Objects of prepositions, defined, 10, 151 pronouns as, 153 Opinion, letters of, 22, 339 Outlines, writing, 21, 315 P Paragraphs, building, 20, 323, 325, 327 chronological order, 20, 323 compare/contrast order, 20, 327 spatial order, 20, 325 Paragraphs, ordering, 20, 329 transition words, 329 Parentheses, 18 punctuation with, 18 Participial phrases, defined, 10 Participles, defined, 10 as adjectives, 10 Passive voice, 6, 319 Periods, rules, 15, 233 Personal letters, 21–22, 331, 333, 335 defined, 331 invitations, 333 thank-you notes, 333 to celebrities, 335 Personal pronouns, 6, 34–35, 105 first person, 6 intensive, 6 as objects, 35, 105, 107 possessive, 6, 42–43, 111 reflexive, 6 second person, 6 as subjects, 34–35, 105, 107, 169 third person, 6 Phrases, defined, 10–11 See also Appositive phrases; Prepositional phrases Plural nouns, 3, 18, 20, 65, 251, 283 Plurals, spelling of, 20, 283 Possessive nouns, 4, 17, 41–42, 69, 251 346 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 Possessive pronouns, 6, 42– 43, 111 Precede, proceed, 13 Predicate adjective, defined, 4, 81, 119, 139 diagraming, 183 Predicate noun, defined, 4, 81 diagraming, 183 Predicates complete, 3, 51 compound, 3, 53 simple, 3, 51 Prefixes, 19, 271 Prepositional phrases, defined, 10, 151 diagraming, 187 as adjectives, 10, 155 as adverbs, 10, 155 object of the preposition, 10, 151 pronouns as, 153 Prepositions, defined, 8, 149 compound, 8, 149 distinguishing from adverbs, 157 list, 8, 149 Presentation, of writing, 21, 313 markets, 313 Prewriting, 20, 299, 301, 315 audience, 20, 301 freewriting, 20, 299 outlining, 21, 315 purpose, 20, 301 topic, 20, 299 Principal parts of verbs, 4 –5, 85, 93, 95, 97 Proceed, precede, 13 Progressive verbs, defined, 6, 89 Pronouns, defined, 6, 105, 111, 113 agreement with antecedents, 7, 34, 109 as objects of prepositions, 153 cases of, 6, 105, 107 demonstrative, 6, 121 indefinite, 6, 11, 29, 113 intensive, 6 interrogative, 6 after linking verbs, 107 as objects, 35, 105, 107 personal, 6, 34–35, 105 possessive, 6, 42–43, 111 reflexive, 6 relative, 6 as subjects, 34–35, 105, 107, 169 who, whom, 7, 153 Proofreading, 311 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill possessive, 4, 17, 41– 42, 69, 251 proper, 3, 15, 44, 63, 217, 219, 221, 223, 225, 227 singular, 3, 65 as subjects, 3 Numbers and numerals, 18 –19, 259, 261 Proper adjectives, 8, 15, 44, 119, 225, 227 Proper nouns, defined, 3, 63 Punctuation rules. See specific types Purpose, choosing in writing, 20, 301 Q Question marks, 15, 233 and quotation marks, 17, 247 Quiet, quite, 13 Quotation marks, 17, 247 with colons or semicolons, 17 with commas or periods, 17, 38–39, 247 in direct quotations, 17, 247 within a quotation, 17 with question marks or exclamation points, 17, 247 with titles of short works, 17, 249 Quotations, capitalizing, 14, 44, 213 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill R Raise, rise, 13, 203 Reflexive pronouns, 6 Regular verbs, 4 – 6, 85 Relative pronouns, 6 Request, letters of, 22, 337 Revising, 20, 307, 309 sentence variety, 20, 309 topic sentences, 307 transition words, 307 Rise, raise, 13, 203 Roots of words, 19 Run-on sentences, 26–27, 59 S Semiblock form of letters, 21, 337 Semicolons, 16–17, 245 to correct run-on sentences, 26, 59 Sentence, defined, 47 Sentence fragments, 24 –25, 57 Sentence structure, 9–10, 55 complex, 10 compound, 10, 55 simple, 10, 55 Sentences, effective, 309, 317, 319, 321 active voice, 6, 319 passive voice, 319 special effects, 321 topic sentence, 319 varied length, 317 varied structure, 317 Sentences, kinds of declarative, 10, 47 exclamatory, 10, 49 imperative, 10, 49 interrogative, 10, 47 Sentences, run-on, 26–27, 59 Series commas in, 16, 38, 235 colon before, 17, 245 Set, sit, 14, 203 Simple predicates, defined, 3, 51 Simple sentences, defined, 10, 55 Simple subjects, defined, 3, 51 Singular nouns, 3, 65 Sit, set, 14, 203 Spatial order, 20, 325 Spelling adding -ly, 20, 281 doubling the final consonant, 19, 281 of easily confused words, 287 forming compound words, 20, 281 of often misspelled words, 285 of plural nouns, 20, 283 of prefixes, 19 of suffixes, 19, 279 of ie and ei, 19, 279 of unstressed vowels, 19 Subject-verb agreement, 4, 11, 28 –31, 67, 167, 169, 171, 173 and collective nouns, 4, 67 and compound subjects, 11, 30–31, 173 and intervening expressions, 11, 28, 171 and prepositional phrases, 11, 28, 171 and indefinite pronouns, 11, 29, 113 in inverted sentences, 11, 28–29, 171 with subject pronouns, 11, 29, 169 with titles of works, 11 Subjects agreement of verb with, 4, 11, 28–31, 67, 167, 169, 171, 173 complete, 3, 51 compound, 3, 30–31, 53, 173 pronouns as, 34–35, 105, 107, 169 simple, 3, 51 Subordinate (dependent) clauses, 9 –10 Subordinating conjunctions, 9 Index 347 T Take, bring, 12 Teach, learn, 13, 201 Tenses, defined, 5, 83, 91 future, 5, 83 future perfect, 5 past, 5, 83 past perfect, 5, 91 present, 5, 83 present perfect, 5, 91 Than, then, 14, 205 Their, they’re, 14, 205 Theirs, there’s, 14 Theme, writing, 20–21, 303 Then, than, 14, 205 There’s, theirs, 14 Thesis statement, writing, 303 They’re, their, 14, 205 To, too, two, 14, 205 Topic, choosing, 299 Topic sentences, 20, 305, 307, 319 Transition words, 307, 329 Transitive verbs, defined, 4, 79 U Understood subject you, 3, 49 V Verb phrases, defined, 4, 85 Verbal phrases, 10 –11 Verbals, defined, 10–11 Verbs, defined, 4, 75 action verbs, 4, 75, 79 348 Grammar and Language Workbook, Grade 6 agreement with subjects, rules, 4, 11, 28–31, 67, 167, 169, 171, 173 emphatic, 6 helping (auxiliary), 4, 87, 89, 91 intransitive, 4, 79 irregular, regular, 4 – 6, 32–33, 85, 93, 95, 97 linking, 4, 81 principal parts of irregular, 5, 93, 95, 97 principal parts of regular, 4, 85 progressive, 6, 89 tenses of, 5, 32–33, 83, 91 See Tenses transitive, 4, 79 voice of, active and passive, 6, 319 Vocabulary building, 19, 269, 271, 273, 275, 277 from context, 19, 269 homonyms, 277 prefixes and suffixes, 19, 271, 273 synonyms and antonyms, 275 word roots, base words, 19 Voice of verbs, defined, 6, 319 active, 6, 319 effective use of, 319 passive, 6, 319 W Well, better, best, 137 Where at, avoiding, 14 Who, whom, 7, 153 Who’s, whose, 14, 205 Writing process. See specific steps Writing letters, 21–22, 331, 333, 335, 337–339 Writing paragraphs, 20–21, 323, 325, 327, 329 Y You, as understood subject, 3, 49 Your, you’re, 14 Copyright © by Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Suffixes, 19, 273, 279 Superlative form, 7–8, 36–37, 123, 125, 135 adjectives, 7–8, 123, 125, 135 adverbs, 135, 137 Synonyms, 275